Allen-Bradley Bulletin 5370 CVIM User Manual

Important User Information

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. “Safety Guidelines for the Application,

Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls” (Publication SGI- 1.1) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.

In no event will the Allen-Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, the Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Allen-Bradley Company with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of the Allen-Bradley Company is prohibited.

-

Chapter

1

2

3

Table of Contents

Title

Introduction : CVIM Machine Vision

Chapter Objective ...............................

CVIM Quick Start Self-Training Guide .............

User Manual Objective ..........................

User Experience .................................

CVIM Machine Vision: System Overview . _ _ . _ . _ _ . .

CVIM Operating Modes ..........................

Stand-Alone Mode ...........................

HostedMode ................................

Basic Hardware .................................

CVlMModule ................................

Pyramid Integrator Chassis ....................

Chassis Power Supply .........................

Video Monitors ..............................

LightPen ....................................

Camera lnterfaceMbd~l~s’1111~1~1~~1~~~~~~1~~111~1111

User Interface Box .........................

I/OlnterfaceBox ..........................

1771 JMB Interface Board ..................

Interconnecting Cables .......................

Communication Channels ........................

Discrete I/O Lines .............................

Remotel/OPort ..............................

RS-232 Communications Port ..................

Chassis Backplane ............................

Warnings and Cautions ..........................

Reference Publications ..........................

Page l-l l-l l-l l-2 l-2 l-3 l-3 l-3 l-4 l-4 l-4 l-4 l-5 l-5 l-6 l-6 l-6 l-6 l-6 l-7 l-7 l-7 l-8 l-8 l-8 l-8 l-9

CVIM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

ChapterObjectives ..............................

CVIM System Components .......................

Connecting CVIM System Components ............

2-l

2-l

2-l

Powering Up CVIM System ....................... 2-9

CVIM User Interface

Chapter Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CVIM Userlnterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.............

LightPen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pointing and Highlighting . . . . _ . _ _ _ _ . . . . . _ _ . _ .

Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-l

3-l

3-2

3-2

3-2

2

Chapter

3

(continued)

4

5

Table of Contents

Title

Dragging ...................................

Placing .....................................

Summary: Manipulating Symbols .............

Graphic Figures .................................

Menus ......................................

Tables ......................................

Symbols .....................................

Configuration Shortcut ..........................

HelpMessages ..................................

Menu Removal Function .........................

Page

3-3

3-3

3-3

3-4

3-4

3-6

3-8

3-9

3-l 1

3-l 1

Operating Environment

Chapter Objective ..............................

Operating Environment .........................

Configuring Operating Environment .............

Selecting Environ Popup Menu ................

Selecting System Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Host Select Popup Menu ..........

Selecting Tool Display Status ...............

Selecting MonitorType ....................

Selecting Units Popup Menu ...............

Selecting /IO Popup Menu andparameters .............................

Selecting Output Assignment Popup Menu . .

Assigning Output Line Functions ...........

Selecting RS-232 Parameters ...............

Selecting 1771 Remote /IO Parameters ......

Selecting Tool Set Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Too/Set #I Camera and Trigger ...

Selecting Too/Set #2 Camera and Trigger . . _

Selecting Active Tool Set ...................

4-15

4-16

4-18

4-20

4-l

4-l

4-2

4-2

4-7

4-8

4-9

4-12

4-13

4-3

4-3

4-5

4-5

4-6

-

Camera and Lighting Parameters

Chapter Objectives . _ . . . _ . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . _ . .

Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . _ . . .

Configuring Camera and Lighting Parameters _ . . . _

Selecting Camera Popup Menu and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Camera Type/Mode Popup Menu . . . . .

Selecting Shutter Parameter . . . _ . . . . . _ . . . . _ _ . .

5-l

5-l

5-2

5-2

5-3

5-4

-

Chapter

5 (continued)

6

Table of Contents

3

Page Title

Using Focus Camera Function .................

Selecting LightinglI?eso/ution Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Resolution Popup Menu ..........

Setting Light

Reference

Threshold ..........

Selecting Light Probe Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Probe Status Popup Menu .........

Using Pick & Place Function ................

Using Learn Function ......................

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines ....

Using Object

Calibration and

Grid Calibration . . _

Selecting

Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters .............................

Using Pick & Place Function ................

Defining Edges ...........................

Performing

Calibrate

Function .............

Entering Calibration Object Dimensions

Selecting Grid Calibration Functions

..... and Parameters .............................

Using Pick & P/ace Function ................

Defining Edges ...........................

Entering Calibration Grid Dimensions

Performing Calibrate Function .............

_ _ _ _ _ _

5-6

5-7

5-8

5-10

5-12

5-14

5-15

5-18

5-18

5-25

5-26

5-27

5-33

5-34

5-34

5-36

5-38

5-44

5-46

5-48

Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Chapterobjectives .___..._.._....__.............

A Few Questions and Answers

About Reference Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reference Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . .

Using Reference Lines . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring Reference Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting

Ref. Line

Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting and Enabling Reference Line . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Define Ref. Line Popup Menus and Parameters . .._.._.____.____._..._......

Selecting

Ref.

Line Type Popup Menu . . . . . . .

Selecting Active Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting

Binary or Gray Scale

Mode . . . . . . . .

Using

Using

Pick and P/ace Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Define

Edges Function:

Binary Mode . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Define Edges Function:

Gray Scale Mode . _ . . . _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . _. _ . . . . . .

6-l

6-10

6-10

6-14

6-15

6-16

6-20

6-23

6-l

6-2

6-2

6-8

6-9

6-9

4

Chapter

6

(continued)

7

Table of Contents

Tit/e

Selecting Define Features Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Active Feature ...................

Selecting Search Direction .................

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu .............

Using

Offset

Function .....................

Using Learn Function

.........................

Selecting Output/Reference Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Output Line Selection Popup Menu

Selecting

Reference

Popup Menu ...........

Reference Windows .............................

Using Reference Windows

....................

Shift-Only Example .......................

Rotation and Shift Example ................

Selecting Workpiece Features .................

Configuring Reference Windows ..............

Selecting Ref. Win Popup Menu ...............

Selecting and Enabling Reference Window .....

Selecting Define Features Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting Active Feature

Using

P&P Feature Win.

...................

Function ...........

Using

Using

Feature Disp Function ...............

P&PSearch Win.

Function ............

Understanding

Set

Score Function ..........

Determining

Using

Set

Set Score

Score Value ...............

Function ...................

Using find Feature Function ...............

Using Learn Function .........................

Selecting Output/Reference Popup Menu and Parameters .............................

Selecting

Selecting

Output Line Selection

Reference

Popup Menu

Popup Menu ...........

Page

-

6-52 -

6-52

6-53

6-59

6-59

6-60

6-61

6-66

6-67

6-68

6-71

6-71

6-73

6-25

6-26

6-26

6-27

6-31

6-34

6-34

6-35

6-36

6-38

6-38

6-39

6-43

6-49

6-50

6-51

6-51

Inspection Tools: Gages

Chapter Objectives .......................

A Few Questions and Answers

About Gages ...........................

Gages ..................................

Using Linear Gages ....................

Using Circular Gages ..................

Configuring Gages

....................

Selecting Gage Popup Menu ...........

Selecting and Enabling Gage ...........

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

7-l

7-l

7-2

7-2

7-6 -

7-9

7-10

7-10

Chapter

7

(con timed)

8

Table of Contents

5

Page Tit/e

Selecting Define Gage Popup Menu andparameters .............................

Selecting Gage Shape .....................

Selecting Operation Popup Menu ...........

Selecting Gaging Mode Popup Menus .......

Using Pick and P/ace Function ..............

Using Define Edges Function:

Binary Gaging Mode .....................

Using Define Edges Function:

Gray Scale Gaging Mode ..................

Selecting Define Features Popup Menu andparameters .............................

Selecting Active Feature ...................

Selecting Search Direction .................

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu .............

Using Offset Function .....................

Using Learn Function .........................

Selecting Range/Reference Popup Menu andparameters .............................

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines ....

Selecting Reference Popup Menu ...........

7-l 1

7-11

7-12

7-14

7-16

7-32

7-37

7-38

7-38

7-39

7-43

7-45

7-45

7-46

7-54

inspection Too/s:

Wind0 ws

Chapterobjectives ..............................

A Few Questions and Answers

About Windows ...............................

Windows .......................................

Using Rectangular Windows ..................

Using Elliptical Windows ......................

Using Masks With Windows ...................

Using Polygonal Windows ....................

Configuring Windows . _ _ . . _ _ _ . . _ _ . _ _ _ . . _ . _ _ . _

Selecting Window Popup Menu ...............

Selecting and Enabling Window ...............

Selecting Define Window Popup Menu andparameters .............................

Selecting Window Shape ..................

Using P&P Process Win. Function ............

Selecting Window Mask Popup Menu .......

Using P&P Mask Win. Function .............

Selecting Window Operation Popup Menu _ _

Configuring #O@‘s Operations .............

Using Threshold/Filter Function (Pixel and

Object Counts) ...........................

Using PixellObj Filter Menu ................

8-l

8-13

8-13

8-15

8-26

8-27

8-28

8-30

8-l

8-2

8-2

8-5

8-9

8-10

8-11

8-12

8-12

8-34

8-36

6

Chapter

8

(con timed)

9

10

Table of Contents

Tit/e Page

-.

Configuring GradientOperations _ . . . . . . . _ _

Using ThresholdlFilterFunction (Gradient) . .

Using Gradient Menu _ . . . . . . _ _ . . . . . _ . . . . . .

Configuring

Template Match

Operations . . . .

Using Learn Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Range/Reference Popup Menu andparameters . . . . ..__...._._....__......__

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines . . _ _

Selecting Reference Popup Menu . . _ _ _ . . . _ _ _

8-37

8-39

8-40

8-43

8-46

8-46

8-47

8-55

Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuration Aids and Storage: Overview . . _ . . . . .

Using Configuration Aids and Storage Functions . _ _

Selecting

Selecting

Using

Using

Mist Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . _ _ _ . . . . . .

Archival

Popup Menu . . . . _ _ . . . . . . _ .

Set Archive Names Function _ . . . . . _ . .

Save Config.

(/nt) Function _ . . . . _ _ _ .

Using Load

Using Load

Config. c/nt) Function

Default Config Function

. . . _ . . . .

. . . . . .

Preparing RAM Card . . _ . . . . . . . . . _ . _ . . . . . . .

Using Format Card Function . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . .

Using Save to Card Function . _ . . . . . _ . . . . _ .

Using Load From Card Function . _ . . . . . . _ . .

Selecting

Using

Snapshot Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .

Acquire image

Function _ _ . . . . _ . . _ . . .

Using Display Test Image Function . . _ . . . . . _ _

Selecting Analysis Popup Menu . . . . _ _ . . . . _ _ . . .

Using Tool Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ _

Using Analyze Image Function . . _ _ . . . . . . . . .

Using Snap &Analyze Function . . . . . . . . . . . _ .

Using Continuous 5 &A Function . . . _ _ _ . . . . .

Selecting Registration Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . _ .

Using Tool Display Function . . . . . _ _ . . . . _ _ . .

Using Snap & Register Function . . . . . _ _ . . . . .

Using

Using

Using

Continuous

Register

5 & R

Learn Registration

Function to Image Function

Function

. . . _ . . . . _ _ .

. . . _ _ . . . _ _ .

. . _ _ . . _ _ _ .

9-15

9-15

9-16

9-17

9-18

9-18

9-19

9-19

9-21

9-22

9-22

9-23

9-23

9-1

9-l

9-l

9-2

9-2

9-4

9-6 _

9-6

9-7

9-9

9-11

9-12

9-13

9-15

Run time Functions

Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . _ . . . _ . . . _ . . . . . _ . . . . _ _

Runtime Functions: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _

10-l

10-l

-_

Chapter

10

(con timed)

Table of Con tents

7

Page Title

Using Runtime Functions ........................

Selecting Exit Popup Menu ....................

Selecting Runtime Init. Popup Menu ...........

Selecting Halt Status ......................

Selecting Freeze Status ....................

Selecting Output Line Status ...............

Selecting Operating Mode Status ...........

Selecting Reset Counters Function ..........

Selecting Runtime Arm Popup Menu ...........

Selecting Runtime Display Popup Menu ........

Selecting Runtime Popup Menu ...............

Selecting Save Config. (ht) Function .......

Selecting Goto Runmode Function ..........

Interpreting Run Mode Displays ...............

ImageOnly ...............................

Failed Tools ............

AllTools ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............

I/OPage ..................................

ResultsPage ..............................

Stat 1 Page ...............................

Stat2Page ...............................

Displaying Other Tool Set ..................

Using Run Mode Halt and Freeze Functions .....

10-10

10-l 1

10-l 1

10-l 1

10-l 1

10-12 lo-16

10-19

10-20

10-21

10-21

10-l

10-l

10-2

1 o-4

10-4

10-5

10-5

10-6

10-6

10-7

10-9

1 o-9

Appendix A

Appendix B

Planning Discrete /IO Assignments and Connections

Appendix Objective . . . . _ . _ . _ . . . . . . . . . _ _ . . . . . . . . .

Planning Output Line Assignments . _ . . . . . . . . _ . . .

Using Output Line Planning Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Output Signal Timing Data . _ _ . . _ . . . . . . . .

Planning Output Line Connections _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-l

A-l

A-l

A-5

A-8

Planning Connections to RS-232 Connector . . . . .

Planning I/O Connections to 1771-JMB Board . . .

A-9

A-9

Output Line Planning Sheet . . . _ . . . . _ . . . _ . . . . . . . . . A-12

Planning System Configuration

Appendix Objective .............................

System Configuration Planning ...................

Configuration Planning Tables ...................

SystemParameters ...........................

I/O Parameters (1 of 2) ........................

I/O Parameters (2 of 2) ........................

B-l

B-l

B-l

B-l

B-2

B-2

8

Table of Con tents

Chapter

Appendix

B (continued)

Title Page

ToolSetParameters

CameraParameters

. . . . . . . . .._....._.._.._...

. . .._.._...._..__.._.._...

Reference Line Parameters (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . _ .

Reference Line Parameters (2 of 3) . . . . . . . _ . . _ . .

Reference Line Parameters (3 of 3) _ . . _ . . _ . . _ . , _

Reference Window Parameters . . . . . _ . . . _ . . . . . .

Gage Parameters (1 of 6) . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gage Parameters (2 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gage Parameters (3 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gage Parameters (4 of 6) _ . . _ . _ . . . . . . _ , . _ . . _ . _

Gage Parameters (5 of 6) _ . . . . _ _ . . . . _ . . _ . . . , _

Gage Parameters (6 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . _ . . , _ . . . . _ .

Window Parameters (1 of 4) _ . . _ . . . . _ . . _ _ . . . . .

Window Parameters (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ _ . _

Window Parameters (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .

Window Parameters (4 of 4) . . . . . . _ . . _ . . _ . _ _ . .

B-6

B-7

B-8

B-9

B-10

B-l 1

B-12

B-13

B-14

B-l 5

B-3

B-3

B-4

B-4

B-5

B-5

-

Appendix C Definition of Terms

Appendix Objective . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . _ . .

Definition of Terms . . . _ . _ . . _ . . . . _ . . _ _ . . . . . . . . . _

C-l

C-l

Figure

3.9

3.10

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

1.1

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

6.6

6.7

Title Page

List of Figures

CVIM System Components and Connections ..........

CVIM Interface: Light Pen and Graphic Figures .......

Run Mode and Main Configuration Menus ...........

Two Popup Menus .................................

Configuration and StatisticsTables .................. l-2

3-l

3-4

3-5

3-6

Inspection Statistics Table ...........................

Inspection Results Table ............................

3-7

3-7

Symbols for Linear Gage and Handles ................

Linear Gage Ready for Manipulation .................

Light Pen Manipulation of Gage Symbol .............

Configuration Shortcut ............................

Reference Line Positioned Across Bottle ..............

Linear Gage Positioned Vertically Over Bottle .........

3-8

3-8

3-9

3-10

6-4

6-5

Edge Locations on Shifted Bottle and Original Bottle . . 6-6

Linear Gage After Shift Compensation ............... 6-7

Single “Active Feature” Positioned Over

Feature on Plate .................................

Linear Gage Positioned Over Hole in Plate ...........

Shifted Plate Compared to Original Plate ............

6-40

6-41

6-42

-

Figure

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

Table of Contents

9

Title Page

List of Figures

(continued)

Rotated and Shifted Plate Compared to

“Original” Unrotated Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

Two “Active Features” Positioned Over

Features on Plate _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Datum Lines and Reference Angie for Rotation Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Basis for Determining Rotation Compensation . . . . . . . 6-46

Datum Line and Midpoint for Shift Compensation . . . . 6-47

Basis for Determining Shift Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Linear Gage Configured to Measure Head-to-Edge . . . . 7-3

Linear Gage Configured to Measure

Edge-to-Edge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Linear Gage Measuring Liquid Level on Shifted Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Circular Gage Configured to Count Edges or Pixels . . . . 7-7

Circular Gages Configured to Measure

Width of a Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Screen Image of Metal Plate . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . 8-3

Rectangular Window Around Metal Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Rectangular Window Positioned Around

HolesinMetalPlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.. 8-5

Circular Windows Around Holes in Metal Plate . . . . . . . _ 8-6

Looking Into Open End of Cylinder

With and Without O-Ring . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . 8-7

Circular Window Positioned Over End of Cylinder . . . . . 8-8

Circular Window with Mask Positioned

Over End of Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Polygonal Window Around Screws in Workpiece . . . _ . 8-10

-

-

Chapter

I

Introduction..-

CVIM Machine Vision

Chapter Objective

The objective of this chapter is to introduce you to the

Allen-Bradley 5370 CVIM (Configurable Vision Input

Module) machine vision system and explain the main objective of this manual.

CVIM Quick Start

Self- Training Guide

Before you use this manual, you should first acquaint yourself with the CVIM Quick Start Self-Training Guide,

Catalog No. 5370-ND003.

The quick-start guide steps you through the basics of the

CVIM user interface. It explains the popup menus and graphic symbols on the video monitor screen, and it shows you how to use the light pen to select the menus and manipulate the symbols on the monitor screen.

User Manual Objective

The objective of the CVIM User Manual is to provide the information and procedures you need to prepare your CVIM system for an inspection application.

First, Chapter 2 steps you through the procedures for connecting the CVIM components, powering up the system, and checking the system’s status. For complete installation instructions, refer to the Allen-Bradley Pyramid Integrator

Installation Manual, Publication 5000-6.2.10.

Second, Chapter 3 introduces you to the CVIM user interface and shows you how to use it.

Third, Chapters 4 through 10 step you through the procedures for configuring system parameters and analysis tools, storing configurations, and operating the CVIM system and observing inspection results.

Where appropriate, the user manual provides one or more simple examples to help you understand the concepts involved in a particular feature or function. Following an example, the user manual provides the step-by-step instructions for configuring the feature or function.

Of course, your application may not require all of the CVIM system’s capabilities. In that case, you need refer only to the chapters or sections that your application requires.

NOTE: It is beyond the scope of this manual to show you how to configure your CVIM system for specific applications.

l-2

Chapter 1 Introduction: CVlM Machine Vision

User Experience

This manual and the CVIM system are intended for technical operators with little or no programming experience. However, if you are integrating the CVIM system into an existing programmable logic controller (PLO system, experience in PLC operation would be helpful. You should be familiar with the Allen-Bradley line of PLCs and have some Ladder-Logic programming experience.

-

CVIM Machine Vision:

System Overview

The CVIM system provides a flexible, easy-to-configure machine vision system, with powerful analysis tools, for a large variety of manufacturing inspection applications.

The system consists of several modules and peripheral components. This includes the CVIM module, a chassis and power supply, a video monitor, and one or two cameras.

Figure 1.1 identifies, in symbolic form, the basic CVIM system components and shows the connections between these components and the external equipment.

Fiaure 1 .l CVIM Svstem Components and Connections

-

: .:-.::::.::.:‘.:.:.-: :: ::.::;:::::::’

;::. :: 1 Remote 110 (obional)

RS-232 and Discrete (optional)

1

1

L

+

Ew lipment

User

Interface

Box

Video

Monitor

I

1 I

I

I/O

Interface

Box

Discrete I/O

Board

Workpiece lamera

-.

Light

Pen

1

RS-232

; ;;;;;

Equipment

-

Chapter 1 Introduction: CVlM Machine Vision l-3

Cl//M Machine Vision:

System Overview

(continued)

During CVIM system configuration, you will be using the light pen and the video monitor to prepare the CVIM system for inspection tasks.

During an inspection cycle, the solid state camera acquires an image of the item to be inspected (the “workpiece”) and sends it to the CVIM module. There, specialized machine vision circuitry digitizes the image and displays it on the video monitor, then analyzes designated parts of the image using its analysis tools.

The CVIM module sends the results of that analysis - a

“pass/fail” signal - to your production equipment, which can accordingly accept or reject the workpiece.

CVIM Operating Modes

The CVIM machine vision system can operate as a stand- alone vision system or as a hosted system, in which the

CVIM system interacts with a host system through the chassis backplane or through a front panel port.

Stand-A/one Mode

The term “stand-alone mode” means that CVIM system control takes place through a set of discrete I/O lines connected to your production equipment.

In this mode, the CVIM system receives trigger signals directly from your production equipment, and sends inspection results signals directly to that equipment. These signals are routed to your production equipment through a discrete UO port on the CVIM module’s front panel.

Hosted Mode

The term “hosted mode” means that one of the three CVIM communications ports is designated as the host: the remote

I/O port, the RS-232 port, and the chassis backplane. You can designate only one as host at any given time.

In this mode, only the designated host can issue commands to control CVIM operation, trigger inspections, upload and download configurations, and change displays.

Data, however, can be accessed through all three ports simz&aneo~sly. This means that your computer or PLC equipment can read discrete bits and numerical results information through any of the three ports, regardless of which is the designated host.

1-4

Chapter 1 Introduction: CVlM Machine Vision

Basic Hardware

This section identifies and briefly describes the basic hardware components for a CVIM system, namely:

CVIM Module

The CVIM module contains all of the machine vision circuitry - the hardware and software that analyze the camera’s image and control the communications. The module occupies one slot in the chassis.

Communications between the CVIM module and other modules in the same chassis take place through the chassis backplane.

Communications between the CVIM module and external devices take place through the front panel ports.

Pyramid Integrator Chassis

Two Pyramid Integrator chassis are available: One has four slots, and the other has eight slots.

The 4-slot chassis can accommodate up to four CVIM modules, and the 8-slot chassis can accommodate up to eight modules.

Chassis Power Supply

The chassis power supply plugs into the leftmost slot of the chassis, which is dedicated to the power supply. The power supply requires an input voltage range of either 90 to 132

VAC or 180 to 264 VAC.

The power supply provides the following DC voltage and amperage outputs: l

+ 5VDC @ 35A. l

+ 12VDC @ 800mA.

0 -12VDC @ 800mA.

-

Chapter 7 Introduction: W/M Machine Vision l-5

Chassis Power Supply

(continued)

An external + 24 VDC power supply may be needed for applications that require several cameras. If so, the chassis power supply has a front panel input connection for the

+ 24VDC source. This connection can also carry fan status signals from an optional fan chassis.

Allen-Bradley offers two cable assemblies for connecting the

24VDC power supply to the chassis power supply. The first assembly carries only the + 24VDC. The second carries fan status from the fan chassis as well as + 24VDC from the external power supply.

Video Monitors

A video monitor is required to configure the CVIM system for its inspection applications. During CVIM system operation, the monitor can also be used to observe inspection results.

The monitor screen displays the image from the camera and the popup menus and graphic symbols from the CVIM module. These menus and symbols, along with the light pen, are used to configure the CVIM system.

Allen-Bradley offers three video monitors: g-inch and 12- inch monochrome monitors, and a 13-inch rack-mounted color monitor. The g-inch monochrome monitor is available in 115VAC and 230VAC versions.

NOTE:

The procedures described in this manual are based on the assumption that you have a color monitor.

Light Pen

Like the video monitor, the light pen is required to configure the CVIM system for its inspection applications.

The light pen has a light-sensitive sensor and a spring- loaded switch in its tip. Light from the monitor screen reaches the sensor through a small hole in the tip. The tip activates the switch when you press the tip against the monitor screen.

You operate the light pen by pressing its tip against a popup menu or other symbol on the monitor screen. This generates signals from the sensor and switch. The CVIM system uses the timing of these signals to determine the appropriate response.

Together, the light pen and the screen symbols form the user interface, which is the means by which you configure the

CVIM system for its inspection tasks. Chapter 3, CV1M User

Interface, describes the user interface in detail.

l-6

Chapter 1 In trodoction: CVIM Machine Vision

Camera

Allen-Bradley offers a solid state camera for use with the

CVIM system. One CVIM module can accomodate two cameras.

The low voltage DC power for the camera comes from either the chassis power supply or from an external DC power supply. The chassis power supply is generally sufficient for applications using one or two cameras.

Interface Modules

The CVIM system uses two interface modules or “boxes” and one printed circuit board to distribute signals:

-

User Interface Box

This box receives video signals from the CVIM module through the user interface cable. It routes the video signals to the monitor through a single coaxial cable (monochrome) or four coaxial cables (color).

The user interface box also receives switch and light sensor signals from the light pen, and routes them to the CVIM module through the user interface cable.

Finally, the user interface box receives + 5 VDC from the

CVIM module, which it uses to energize itself and the light sensor in the light pen.

II0 Interface Box

This box routes discrete I/O signals between a 1771-JMB I/O board (described below) and the CVIM module. The I/O interface module connects directly to the 1771-JMB board.

The I/O interface box also routes RS-232 data communication signals between the CVIM module and host computer equipment. The box uses a g-pin D-type connector to carry the RS-232 signals.

1771 JMB Interface Board

This board routes discrete input and output signals between the I/O interface box and your production equipment. The

JMB board connects directly to the I/O interface box.

The JMB board contains up to 16 optically isolated discrete

I/O modules, 14 of which are for output signals from the

CVIM module and two of which are for input signals from your production equipment.

The JMB board contains an LED for each I/O module. An

LED turns on whenever the associated I/O module receives a signal.

-

_

Chapter 1 Introduction: CVlM Machine Vision

1-7

Interconnecting Cables

Since the CVIM system consists of separate components, it requires a number of interconnecting cables to join these components.

Briefly, these are the cables:

Camera cables - Catalog No. 2801-NC14, -NC15, and

NC-16 connect the camera(s) directly to the CVIM module.

User interface cables - Catalog No. 2801-NC18A,

-NC18B, and -NC18C connect the CVIM module to the user interface box.

I/O cable - Catalog No. 2801-NC17 connects the CVIM module to the I/O interface box.

Video monitor cable(s) - Catalog No. 2801-NC2 and

-NC3 connect the video monitor to the user interface box.

(The monochrome monitor uses one cable; the color monitor uses four cables.)

Communication

Channels

The CVIM module has four channels for communicating with other equipment:

Discrete 110 Lines

The CVIM system provides 16 discrete I/O lines, whose signals enable direct interaction between the system and your production equipment.

Of the 16 lines, two are “trigger signal” lines. These are dedicated input lines, which are equipped to carry signals from part-presence sensors. The other 14 lines are all dedicated output lines, whose functions you can assign during CVIM system configuration.

The CVIM module has a special front panel port (called

Module I/O) that routes both RS-232 data and discrete I/O signals to the I/O interface box.

The discrete I/O signals from the I/O interface box connect directly to the 1771 JMB board through an edge connector on the JMB board. I/O modules on the JMB board provide electrical isolation between your production equipment and the CVIM system.

7-8

Chapter 1 Introduction: CWM Machine Vision

Remote 110 Port

The CVIM system has a remote I/O port for carrying data between the CVIM system and a 1771-based PLC

(programmable logic controller) system.

Input data consists of configuration parameters or control commands. Output data consists of configuration parameters, inspection results, and CVIM module status.

RS-232 Communications

Port

The CVIM system has an RS-232 serial communications port for carrying data between the CVIM system and computer equipment or a PLC system.

Input data consists of configuration parameters or control commands. Output data consists of configuration parameters, inspection results, and CVIM module status.

Chassis Backplane

When the chassis has other modules (such as a PLC 5/250) installed, the CVIM system can use the chassis backplane to carry data between the CVIM system and the other modules.

Input data consists of configuration parameters or control commands. Output data consists of configuration parameters, inspection results, and CVIM module status.

-

Warnings and Cautions

Warnings and cautions occasionally appear in this manual.

They are included in order to protect both you and the equipment. They appear as follows:

A CAUTION: A caution symbol is used when the equipment could be damaged or performance seriously impaired if stated procedures are not followed.

WARNING : A warning symbol means that a person may be injured if the stated procedures are not followed.

-

Chapter 1 /ntroduction: W/M Machine Vision

1-9

Reference Pub/ications

The following Allen-Bradley publications are referenced in this manual:

The CVIM Quick Start Self-Training Guide, Catalog No.

5370-ND003.

The CVIM Communications Manual, Catalog No. 5370-

ND002.

Pyramid Integrator Installation Manual, Publication No.

5000-6.2.10.

Grounding and Wiring Guidelines, Publication No.

17774.1.

Solid State Control Safety Guidelines, Publication No.

SGI-1.1.

-

-

Chapter

2

Cl//M Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

Chapter Objectives

The objectives of this chapter are to show you how to connect the CVIM system components and perform a powerup check.

CVIM Sys tern

Components

The procedures in this chapter cover only those components that are related to the CVIM machine vision system, namely:

Four-slot chassis, Catalog No. 5 1 lo-A4.

Eight-slot chassis, Catalog No. 5110-A8.

~;~I~~~-inch, rack-mounted, 115VAC, Catalog No.

Monochrome, g-inch, 115VAC, Catalog No. 2801-N9.

Monochrome, g-inch, 230VAC, Catalog No. 2801-N20.

Monochrome, la-inch, 115VAC, Catalog No. 2801-N6.

User interface box, Catalog No. 2801-N22.

I./O interface box, Catalog No. 2801-N21.

Interface board, Catalog No. 1771-JMB.

Additional components may be required for some CVIM system configurations. These will be identified in the connection procedures.

For complete information on installing the CVIM system in its factory floor location, refer to the Allen-Bradley Pyramid

Integrator Installation Manual, Publication 5000-6.2.10, which is supplied with the CVIM module.

Connecting CVIM

System Components

Before you install the CVIM system at its factory-floor site, you may find it useful to connect the basic system components temporarily on a workbench or table top.

There, away from the noise and distractions typically present on a factory floor, you can perform the powerup check and use the CVIM Quick Start Self-Training Guide,

Catalog No. 5370-ND003, to get acquainted with the user interface.

Chapter 2 CVIM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-2

Connecting CWM

If, however, you intend first to install the CVIM system at

System Components

its factory-floor site, refer to the following Allen-Bradley

(con timed) publications for site installation information.

Pyramid Integrator Installation Manual, Publication No.

5000-6.2.10. Chapter 4, Grounding the Components, is of particular importance.

Grounding and Wiring Guidelines, Publication No.

1777-4.1.

Solid State Control Safety Guidelines, Publication No.

SGI-1.1.

After completing the site installation, return to this section.

Use the following steps to connect the CVIM system components and perform the powerup check.

Your Action

Place the chassis backside down on the work surface.

Comments

Pull the DUPWR LOCK This handle is at the bottom edge of the chassis. handle out as far as it will go.

Remove any foreign material from inside the chassis.

Locate the AC voltage-selection This is a slide switch near the bottom edge of the power switch on the chassis supply module. power supply.

NOTE: No disassembly is required to access this switch.

^

A

-

-

-

Chapter 2 CVlM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

Connecting CVIM

System Components

(con timed)

Your Action

Set the voltage-selection switch to match the AC input voltage.

Install the power supply module in the chassis.

Obtain an AC line cord for the chassis power supply.

Attach one end of the line cord to a plug.

Attach the other end of the line cord to thepower supply’s

AC input connector.

Comments

The chassis power supply operates within one of the following two input voltage ranges:

Low Range: 90 to 132 VAC @47 to 63 Hz.

High Range:

180 to 264 VAC @ 47 to 63Hz.

Use the 115V setting for input voltages in the low range.

Use the 230V setting for input voltages in the high range.

Carefully align the power supply with the leftmost slot in the chassis. Slide the power supply into the chassis and press down to seat the module.

Finally, tighten the thumb screws evenly to secure the power supply *

NOTE: Do not push in the DC PWR/LOCK handle yet.

Use a three-wire line cord with a suitable type of insulation and sufficient length.

Use a three-prong plug that is approriate for the AC input voltage.

At this point, refer to the Pyramid Integrator Installation

Manual, Pub. No. 5000-6.2.10,pages 9-4 and A-12.

Use the instructions and illustrations on pages 9-4 and A12.

A WARNING: Be certain to connect the ground wire to both the AC connector and the plug.

Failure to do so could result in a dangerous electric shock to personnel.

NOTE: Do not apply AC power to the power supply yet.

2-3

Chapter 2 W/M Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-4

Connecting CVIM

System

Components

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Locate the DC voltage-selection This is a slide switch near the connector edge of the CVIM switch on the CVIM module. module.

NOTE: No disassembly is required to access this switch.

-

k 12 VDc’(Internal)

(factory default setting)

-

Determine whether your application requires an external 24VDCpower supply.

The CVIM module uses a DC-to-DC converter to supply power to the cameras. The converter gets its DC voltage from either the chassis power supply (k 12V) or from an external DC power supply ( + 24V).

Your choice of DC power source should be based on whether the chassis power supply has sufficient capacity in its + 12V and -12V sections for all the modules and cameras in your application.

The following table shows the current required for one CVIM module alone and with one and two cameras:

+ 12V Current -12V Current

Requirement Requirement

0.065A

0.275A

0.405A

0.075A

0.285A

0.415A

No. of

Cameras

0

1

2

-

-

Chapter 2 CVlM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-5

Connecting Cl//M

System Components

(continued)

Your Action Comments

To determine the total current load on the + 12V and -12V sections of the chassis power supply, add the current requirements for all CVIM modules and cameras, then add to that the current requirements for all other modules (if any) in the same chassis.

If the total current load exeeds the capacity of either the

+ 12V or -12V section in the chassis power supply, you must use an external 24VDC power supply.

If your application requires an external 24VDC power supply, here are the current requirements for a CVIM module with one and two cameras:

Set the DC voltage-selection switch to match the

DC voltage source.

Install the CVIM module in the chassis.

To determine the total current load on the 24V power supply, add the current requirements for all CVIM modules and cameras in the chassis. Obtain a 24V power supply that has sufficient capacity to meet the needs of your application.

Set the switch to f 12 when the camera power source is internal - the chassis power supply. Set the switch to + 24 when the camera power source is external - a 24VDC power supply.

Carefully align the CVIM module with any available slot in the chassis. Slide the module into the chassis and press down to seat the module.

Finally, tighten the thumb screws evenly to secure the

CVIM module.

NOTE: Do not push in the DC PWR/LOCK handle yet.

Place the chassis upright on the work surface

Chapter 2 CVlM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-6

Connecting CVIM

System Components

(con timed)

Your Action Comments

Refer to the CVW interconnect The CVIM interconnect diagram is similar to the one on diagram below for the cable the side of the CVIM module. It does not, however, show connections in the next steps. connections to the communication ports. r

CVIM

MODULE COLOR MONITOR

MONOCHROME

MONITOR

-L

(

R

G B

-

-

USER INTERFACE

MODULE connections, see the CVlM Comm.

LIGHT

PEN

Locate the user interface The user interface cable is Cat. No. 2801-NC18A, -NC18B, cable. or -NClK. Note that the cable ends have identical connectors-they are both female.

NOTE: Be certain that you have the user interface cable, not the camera cable.

Chapter 2 CVIM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

Connecting CVIM

System Components

(continued)

Your Action Comments

The user interface cable has a label attached to each end:

. . .

.* .

I I

Locate the user interface box. The user interface box is Cat. No. 2801-N22. The connectors on the box are arranged as follows:

2-7

Connect one end of the cable to the CVIM module.

Connect the other end of the cable to the user interface box.

A

CAUTION: Attempting to connect the camera cable to the User Interface connector on the

CVIM module can cause damage to the CVIM module circuitry.

Carefully align the cable connector with the

User Interface port, then insert.

Carefully align the cable connector with the

INPUT connector, then insert.

Locate a camera cable. The camera cable is Cat. No. 2801-NC14, -NC15, or -NCl&

Note that the cable ends do not have identical connectors - one is female, and the other is male.

Connect the male end of the cable to the CVIM module.

Carefully align the male connector with the

Camera A or

Camera B port, then insert.

Chapter 2 W/M

Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-8

Connecting CVlM

System Components

(continued)

Your Action

Connect the female end of the cable to the camera.

Place the video monitor on the work surface.

Locate the coaxial cable(s) for the video monitor.

Ifyour monitor is color,

Connect the coaxial cables to Connect to the R, G, B, and EXT SYNC “IN” connectors.

Set the color monitor. each terminator switch to OFF.

Connect the coaxial cables to Connect the other end of each cable to the corresponding the user interface box. RED, GREEN, BLUE, and SYNC connector.

Connect the coaxial cable to the monochrome monitor.

Connect the coaxial cable to the user interface box.

Locate the light pen.

Connect the light pen plug to the user interface box.

The coaxial cable is Catalog No 2801-NC2 or -NC3. A color monitor requires four cables; a monochrome monitor requires one cable. or, ifyour monitor is monochrome,

Connect to the VIDEO IN connector. Set the terminator switch to OFF.

Connect the other end of the cable to the GREEN connector.

Connect to the

Comments

LIGHT PEN jack.

Obtain an AC line cord for the 24VDCpower supply.

Attach one end to a plug.

Attach the other end to the

24VDC power supply.

For systems requiring a 24VDCpower supply, follow the next several steps:

Use a three-wire line cord with a suitable type of insulation and sufficient length.

Use a three-prong plug that is approriate for the AC input voltage.

Observe the markings on the power supply’s AC input.

WARNING: Be certain to connect the ground wire to both the AC input and the plug. Failure to do so could result in a dangerous electric shock to personnel.

NOTE: Do not apply AC power to the 24VDC power supply yet.

-

-

_

-

Chapter 2 Cl//M Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-9

Connecting CVIM

System Components

(con tin ued)

Your Action

Locate the DCpower cable for the external power supply.

Connect the &wires to the power supply output.

Connect the black wires to the power supply output.

Connect the molded plug to the chassis power supply.

Comments

The power supply cable will be either Cat. No 5120-CP2 or

5120-CP3. Each has a set of color-coded wires and a right- angle molded plug.

If your power supply has a ” + Sense” terminal, connect the single red wire to that terminal. Connect the triple red wire to the other ” + Output” terminal.

If your power supply does not have a ” + Sense” terminal, connect both red wires to the ” + Output” terminal.

If your power supply has a “-Sense” terminal, connect the single black wire to that terminal. Connect the triple black wire to the other “-Output” terminal.

If your power supply does not have a “-Sense” terminal, connect both black wires to the “-Output” terminal.

The molded plug is olarized. the

+ 24V Input jac kp

Align the plug carefully with on the front panel of the chassis power supply, then push the plug in until it latches in the jack.

This completes the component connections for the powerup check. Now, continue with the powerup check.

Powering

U

CVlM

P

ystem

At this point, with all basic components connected together, the CVIM system is ready for the powerup check,

Your Action

Prepare the video monitor for powerup.

Insert the video monitor line cord plug in the AC outlet.

Set the video monitor power switch to ON.

Comment

Set the monitor brightness and contrast controls to the middle of their range. Set the scan mode switch to

“UNDER.” Set the power switch to OFF.

A

CAUTION:

Verify that the AC voltage source is within limits for both the video monitor and the

CVIM system.

After a few seconds, the raster should be dimly visible on the monitor screen. If you’re not sure, increase the screen brightness to maximum for a moment, then return it to its midrange setting.

Chapter 2 CVIM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-10

Powering Up CVM

SJGtW?l (continued)

Your Action

Insert the CVIM system line cord plug in the AC outlet.

If your CVIM system is using a + 24VDC power supply, insert the line cord plug in the AC outlet.

Comment

Push in the DCIPWR LOCK Be sure the lock handle is in as far as possible. The handle. power/lock mechanism connects DC power to the modules and locks them in the chassis. It also prevents anyone from removing a module with DC power applied.

On the power supply front panel, the DC light should turn on.

On the CVIM module front panel, the red

Memory Active and green

Trigger

1 lights will be on briefly. The

Pass/Fail light should be a steady green.

After about

15 seconds, the

Memory Active and

Trigger 1 lights should be off, but the

Pass/Fai

I light should still be green. If so, the powerup sequence was successful.

Assuming the powerup sequence was successful, the monitor screen will display the “banner” message, the test pattern, and several “menu boxes”:

-

-

ALLEN-BRADLEY

Configurable Vision Input Module

Bulletin 5370-CVIM

Series A Revision A Firmware Rev. CO1

Language: English Packages: None

Copyright 1990 Allen-Bradley Company

Phase I Diagnostics Completed

Phase II Diagnostics Completed

System Initialization Completed

Status = OK

Status = OK

Status = OK

Arm

Display

Chapter 2 W/M Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

2-17

Powering Up CVlM

SyStef7? (continued)

Your Action Comment

If the

Pass/Fail light turns red, the powerup sequence was not successful. In addition, a failure message may appear on the monitor screen. If these conditions appear, a malfunction has occurred during the powerup sequence. Pull out the DUPWR

LOCK handle and remove the AC power plug, then check the cable connections and re-seat the power supply and CVIM modules. Try the powerup sequence again.

If the system repeatedly fails to complete the powerup sequence successfully, record all messages appearing on the monitor screen, then contact your Allen-Bradley

Representative.

Use the following steps to perform a simple test of the

“user interface.”

CVIM

Aim the light pen at the Move the pen around slightly until a red border appears menu box labeled

Setup. around the

Setup menu box.

Press the light pen tip against the

Setup menu box.

When you press the light pen tip against the menu box

(“pick” the box), the banner message and the original set of menu boxes will disappear, and the “Main Configuration menu” will appear. This indicates that the CVIM system has entered the “setup” or configuration mode.

Env. Camera A Ref.Llne Ref.Wln Gage Window MISC Exit

If the user interface appears to be OK, the CVIM system is now ready for use.

2- 12

Chapter 2 CVlM Hardware Connection and Powerup Check

Powering Up CVIM

SyStetTl (continued)

-

At this point, your should refer to the CV1M Quick Start

Self-Training Guide, Catalog No. 5370-ND003, and familiarize yourself with the CVIM user interface. When you complete that manual, and you are comfortable with the user interface, you should be ready to investigate the configuration procedures described in this manual.

If you have not yet installed the CVIM system at its factory- floor site, refer to the following Allen-Bradley manuals:

Grounding and Wiring Guidelines, Publication No. 1777-

4.1.

Solid State Control Safety Guidelines, Publication No.

SGI-1.1.

These manuals contains all the information required for panel- or rack-mounting, electrical grounding, and connecting the I/O components.

You will have already performed in this chapter some of the steps described in the PI installation manual. When you encounter one of those steps, verify that you have performed it correctly, then continue.

_

Chapter

3

CVlM User Interface

Chapter Objective

The objective of this chapter is to acquaint you with the

CVIM user interface -the means by which you set up the

CVIM system to perform your vision application, operate the system, and monitor its operation.

CVIM User Interface

The term “CVIM user interface” refers to the specific devices that enable you to interact with the CVIM system.

The user interface consists of just two main parts:

1. A light pen.

2. Graphic figures on the video monitor screen.

You will use the user interface to configure the CVIM system for its inspection tasks and, during system operation, monitor the results of those inspections.

Figure 3.1 shows the light pen pointed at a graphic figure on the monitor screen.

Figure

3.1

Light Pen and Graphic Figures

ALLEN-BRADLEY

Configurable Vision Input Module

Bulletin 5370-CVIM

Series A Revision A firmware Rev. CO1

Language: English Packages: None

Phase

Phase

Copyright 1990 Allen-Bradley Company

I Diagnostics Completed

II Diagnostics Completed

System Initialization Completed

Status = OK

Status = OK

Status = OK

Notice that the user interface has no keyboard. To interact with the CVIM system, you just point the light pen at a graphic figure on the monitor screen and press the light pen tip against the figure.

3-2

Chapter

3

CVlM User Interface

fight Pen

If you compare the CVIM user interface to a keyboard- driven system, the light pen is the equivalent of the cursor- control keys - it points to figures on the monitor screen so that you can select some kind of operation or function.

When you point the light pen at a graphic figure (a popup menu or a symbol) on the monitor screen, the light pen “sees” that figure through a hole in its tip. When you then press the light pen tip against the figure, the CVIM system selects or

“picks” the figure. Your next step would depend on which graphic figure you selected.

The light pen’s main functions are selecting menu boxes andmanipulating symbols. Performing these functions involves several specific actions, as follows:

Pointing and Highlighting

“Pointing” means aiming the light pen at a specific graphic figure (menu box or symbol) in order to “highlight” that figure.

A sensor in the light pen sees light through a hole in the light pen tip. When you point the light pen directly at a graphic figure, the CVIM system will respond by

“highlighting” the figure, indicating that the sensor sees it.

You will know the fTgure is highlighted when some part of it changes to a brighter color; however, when pointing at a small figure, you may need to move the light pen around a bit before the figure will be highlighted.

Your next step is “picking” the highlighted figure.

Picking

“Picking” means pressing the light pen tip against a highlighted graphic figure in order to select the function that the figure represents.

Pressing the tip against the screen activates a switch.

Signals from the light sensor and switch cause the CVIM system to “pick” the highlighted figure.

-

Chapter

3

W/M User interface

Picking (continued)

3-3

The results of picking vary. Picking a menu box usually causes additional menus or tables to appear above or alongside the menu box. Picking a symbol usually enables

“dragging” (moving) the symbol or changing its size.

For symbols, your next step is “dragging” the picked symbol.

Dragging

“Dragging” means moving a picked symbol to a different location on the screen, and/or changing the symbol’s size.

(Dragging has no meaning for popup menus, since they are in fixed positions.)

You drag a symbol by first picking the symbol, then backing the light pen tip about a half inch from the screen -the sensor must still “see” the symbol. When you move the light pen across the screen, the symbol will follow.

Your next step is “placing” the dragged symbol.

Placing

“Placing” means locking a symbol at its destination on the screen after dragging it there.

When you have dragged the symbol to its correct position, you simply press the light pen tip against the screen to lock the symbol at that position.

Summary:

Manipulating Symbols

Point the light pen at a symbol until the symbol “highlights”

(brightens or changes color), then press the light pen tip against the highlighted symbol to “pick” the symbol. Next,

“drag” the entire symbol across the screen or change its size or shape, whichever is appropriate for that symbol. Finally, press the light pen tip against the screen to “place” (lock) the symbol in position.

3-4

Chapter 3 CVlM User Interface

Graphic Figures

The CVIM system generates the graphic figures and superimposes them over the camera image on the monitor screen. Graphic figures are of three main types: Menus, tables, and symbols.

Menus

consist of two or more rectangular boxes, arranged horizontally and vertically, with words and/or numbers inside. These words and numbers identify a particular configuration parameter, function, or operating mode.

Menus always appear in specific positions in relation to other menus -they cannot be moved.

Tables

contain mostly numeric values. Some are used for selecting parameters, and others display data resulting from inspections.

Symbols

consist mainly of the various geometric shapes that represent the analysis tools and the devices that enable you to position the tools and set some of the tool parameters.

During system configuration, you can set the size, shape, and position of these tools in relation to the screen image of the item to be inspected.

-

Menus

Menus consist of boxes that appear both singly and in groups that are joined horizontally or vertically.

In Figure 3.2, the Run Mode menu (A) appears at the bottom of the monitor screen after the CVIM system completes its powerup cycle, and also during the system run mode.

The Main Configuration menu (B), appears at the bottom of the screen during system configuration.

Figure 3.2 Run Mode and Main Configuration Menus

-

Setup Resume Display T.S. 1 Reset Stat’s

Paw t

Page h

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

,-

Chapter 3 CVIM User Interface

3-5

Men us (con timed)

Menu boxes that are joined vertically (except the two in the

Runtime menu) are called tCp~p~p” menus because they

“pop” up when you select one of the menu boxes in the Main

Configuration menu (and also in many of the popup menus themselves).

Figure 3.3 shows an example of two popup menus above the

Main Configuration menu.

Figure 3.3 Two Popup Menus

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Light Probe

Object Calibration

Grid Calibration

E”“. .y .j j j : ..j: .:..

C$@er+&:. Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

All menu boxes contain words, abbreviations, and/or numbers that identify their function. In the example above, these functions include:

A Main Configuration menu configuration category

(Camera A)

*Aconfigurationsubject(Lighting/Resolution,CaIibration).

A configuration function (Focus Camera, Light Reference).

256Hx256V).

Notice that some menu boxes contain three dots (ooo). When you pick one of these boxes, one or more additioltal menus, or tables, will appear. At that same time, a carriage return symbol (+J) will replace the three dots, and the menu box’s background color will change to black. This indicates that if you pick the menu box again, it will return to its previous state, and the additional menu or table will disappear.

LOCKED MENU BOXES: Y ou will occasionally see one or more menu boxes containing black type. The black type means that these menu boxes are disabled or “locked,” and you cannot pick them until some condition is met. The conditions vary considerably, but often involve enabling a tool or changing a tool parameter. In most cases the reason for the locked menu box will be evident from the immediate circumstances.

3-6

Chapter

3

W/M User Interface

Menus (continued)

To select a configuration subject or parameter, or to perform a function, you must select or “pick” the proper menu box with the light pen. And you “pick” a menu box as follows.

Point the light pen at the menu box until the box perimeter “highlights” by turning red. Then, push the light pen tip against the highlighted box to “pick” the box. This starts the function or selects the configuration subject, whichever applies.

In Figure 3.3, you would first have picked the

Camera A menu box, causing the first popup menu to appear. You would then have picked the Lighting/Resolution menu box, causing the second popup menu to appear.

Sometimes several “picks” are needed to reach a particular parameter-setting menu and change a parameter. In the

Figure 3.3 example you would need to make three more picks to reach the Resolution menu (not shown) and change the camera resolution from 256Hx256V to, say, 512Hx256V.

-

Tables Tables are of two main types: Those that are used to select configuration parameters, and those that display inspection results and statistics.

In Figure 3.4, table A is a configuration table. It is used during configuration to enter range limit values and assign output lines for the inspection tools.

Figure 3.4 Configuration and Statistics Tables

A B

-

Note that in table A the menu boxes contain three dots (ooo).

When you pick one of these boxes, either another table or a

“calculator pad” will appear. These enable you to select new values. At that same time, in the menu box a carriage return symbol (~1) will replace the three dots, and the box’s background color will change to black.

Chapter 3 CVIM User Interface

3-7

Tables (continued)

Table B in Figure 3.4 and Figure 3.5 are statistics tables.

These tables display statistical values derived from the inspection “results” data for all enabled tools during a series of inspection cycles.

Figure 3.5 lnmection Statistics Table

PROBE

1.

GAGE

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

WINDOW

1.

2.

3.

4.

Samples

123

Samples

Mean

50.000

Mean

123

123

123

123

37.287

145.395

0.768

6.000

Std. Dev.

55.000

Std. Dev.

1.348

5.386

0.0460

0.000

Samples Mean

123 3245.245

123 181.662

123 11.000

Std. Dev.

32.399

3.542

0.000

MinReading

59.187

Min.Reading

36.413

141.165

0.748

6.000

MinReading

3221.476

179.198

11.000

Max.Reading

61.000

Max.Reading

39.293

148.223

0.781

6.000

Max.Reading

3278.243

183.421

11.000

Figure 3.6 is an inspection results table. This table displays the inspection “results” data for all enabled tools following each inspection cycle.

Figure 3.6 Inspection Results Table

GAGE

1.

2.

3.

4.

WINDOW

I.

2.

3.

TRIGGERS FA U LTS Reference Lines / Windows

I.

2.

0 1.

2. Accepted: 123456 Master Fault:

Missed:

Total:

123 Light Probe:

123579

PROBE

I. 0 50.000

Warn Low

55.000

123

34

Reading

59.187

3.

Warn Hi

61.000

3.

0

63.000

0

12

130.000

25.000

Warn Low

140.000

28.000

150.187

32.354

Warn Hi

160.000

34.000

170.000

37.000

0 3000.000

Warn Low

3100.000

Reading

3214.485

Warn Hi

3300.000 3400.000

3-8

Chapter

3

W/M User Interface

Symbols Symbols consist of lines, rectangles, and other geometric shapes that represent the analysis tools and the devices used to manipulate these tools and set some tool parameters.

Figure 3.7 shows the symbol for a linear gage, along with its manipulation

“handles” and the “highlight square.”

Figure 3.7 Symbols for Linear Gage and Handles

.;.j

!

::

,: j.

: ,:i Area of ‘i

. . : Head of

Gage

: ” Linea

The dotted circle on the left is the “head” of the linear gage.

The three small squares are the gage manipulation

“handles.” The white box around the gage is the “area of interest,” which is the part of the image that the CVIM system evaluates during an inspection.

The “highlight square” appears as shown when you aim the light pen at a handle. This indicates that the you can pick the handle and manipulate the gage.

To manipulate any tool, you must first pick the menu box(es) that cause the tool and its handles to appear on the screen.

Then you highlight and pick one of the handles. When you do this, the handles and area of interest disappear, and a square

“spotlight” appears where the highlighted handle was, as shown in Figure 3.8.

Figure 3.8 Linear Gage Ready for Manipulation

:

:.

:

. . . .

:.

. . . . .

;,

. . . :.

:i

:. j::.

:. : .: ” .j ; :

:.

.:::.

::

: :

:..

:

:

‘...

: j

. .

:

: :. :

-

Chapter 3 CVlM User Interface

3-9

SpbOlS (continued)

Figure 3.9 shows how the linear gage in Figure 3.8 might look if you dragged the right end of the gage to a new position. In this case, the right end of the gage moves, but the left end remains anchored.

Figure 3.9 Light Pen Manipulation of Gage Symbol

Configuration Shortcut

So far, you have seen how to access menus and manipulate symbols. But what about exiting a menu after you have completed parameter selection and/or symbol manipulation?

A key time-saving feature of the CVIM user interface is that it enables you to jump directly from wherever you are in a menu to any part of the same menu, or to another menu, or even to another configuration category in the Main Configuration menu.

You do not need to “back out” of any menu the way you entered it. This shortcut can save you considerable time getting around the screen.

Try this shortcut example:

Set up the menu with the two popup menus as shown in the following figure. To do this, pick the Camera (A or B) menu box. You should get the first popup menu. Then, pick the

Lighting/Resolution menu box in the first popup menu. You should get the second popup menu.

Now, pick the Res.: 256Hx256V menu box in the second popup menu (the numbers might actually be 5 12 Hx256V or

5

12Hx5

12V at this time - it doesn’t matter). A third popup menu should appear just above, and to the right of, the second popup menu. This is the Resolution popup menu.

Your screen should now look like A in Figure 3.10.

Chapter 3 CVIM User Interface

3-10

Configuration Shortcut

(continued)

Figure 3.10 Configuration Shortcut

Second Popup

Menu

4

Light Reference

...

I

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode 0.0

- Resolution

Popup Menu

1 Object Calibration

Grid Calibration

En”, :?--rT?-

$@?$?&$:i Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window cl

A From this.. .

Mist Exit

1

B . . . to this

7

Here’s the shortcut: Pick the Env. menu box in the Main

Configuration menu. The three popup menus in A will disappear, and your screen will now display the new popup menu as shown in B. (All changes you may have made in A are saved.)

The point to remember is this: No matter where you are in a menu (whether you are finished with it or not), you can take a shortcut to the Main Configuration menu and pick a different configuration category.

-

Chapter 3 CVIM User interface

3-71

Help Messages

By picking the help message symbol in the upper right corner of the monitor screen, you can have immediate access to a situation-related help message. No matter where you are in the configuration process, anytime you press this symbol. . .

. . . a help message will appear in the box just to the left of the help message symbol, as follows:

HELP MESSAGE HERE

/3 a

The contents of each message will vary according to the last menu box you picked. If you pick a different menu box, the message relating to that box will appear.

Each help message provides a brief statement about the purpose of the related menu box. In some instances, X and Y coordinates, threshold levels, and other values will also appear within the message box.

Menu Removal Function

Since the popup menus share the monitor screen with the camera image, and necessarily overlie the camera image, at times these menus may obscure all or part of the image where you want to position your analysis tools.

The menu removal function enables you to make the menus

“transparent,” thus enabling you to see through them, or to remove them altogether from the monitor screen.

By repeatedly picking the menu removal symbol in the upper right corner of the monitor screen, you can make the menus

“transparent,” remove them from the screen altogether, and restore them to their original appearance. No matter where you are in the configuration process, anytime you pick this symbol. . .

.: :

0

OFI li!zam

Chapter 3

CVlM

User Interface

3-12

Menu Removal Function . .

.the menus become “transparent,” and the symbol

(continued) changes to this:

-

When you pick the symbol again, the menus disappear from the screen, and the symbol changes to this:

To restore the menus to their normal appearance, pick the symbol one more time. The popup menus and the menu removal symbol will return to their normal appearance.

-

-

Chapter

4

Operating Environment

Chapter Objective

The objective of this chapter is to show you how to configure the operating environment parameters in the Env. popup menu. This menu appears when you pick the Env. menu box in the Main Configuration menu.

For the most part, the operating environment parameters define the relationship of the CVIM module to the external devices with which it communicates. These parameters apply to the overall

CVIM system, not just to specific tools.

Operating Environment

The main elements of the CVIM system operating environment are these:

Host selection. Your CVIM system can operate in one of two modes: The stand-alone mode, or the hosted mode. You can specify which of these modes is appropriate for your application.

Video monitor. Your system can use either a color or a monochrome video monitor. You can specify which one your system will be using.

Output lines. The 14 discrete output lines carry signals that indicate the results of CVIM inspections, as well as various timing signals, to your process equipment. You can assign a specific signal function to each output line.

Data communication ports. CVIM has two data communications ports: an RS-232 serial port, and a remote I/O port. If your application requires one or both of these ports, you will specify the data transmission rates and other parameters.

Trigger. The trigger is the signal that begins an inspection cycle. You can select trigger sources for configuration (“setup”) and for the run mode.

Strobe. Two strobe outputs are available, one for each tool set. You can enable or disable these outputs.

Units. If your application will use gages for making calibrated linear or circular measurements, you can select pixels, inches, or centimeters as the unit of measure.

Tool Sets. A tool set consists of all of the analytical tools that CVIM can use to perform an inspection. Two identical tool sets are available, which you can apply to two separate tasks during each inspection cycle. You will select the appropriate combinations of tool set (1 or

2) and camera (A or B).

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-2

Configurin Operating

P nvironment

This section shows you the procedures for configuring the operating environment parameters.

You will begin by picking the Env. menu box in the Main

Configuration menu. You will then configure a variety of parameters grouped into three categories: System, I/O, and

Tool Set.

Selecting Env.

Popup

Menu

Your first step is to select the Env. popup menu.

Your Action

Pick Env. in the Main

Configuration menu.

Comments

When you pick the Env. menu box, the Env. popup menu appears above the Main Configuration menu, as follows:

System 0.0 j:, @-$.‘::~

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

These are the three parameter categories in the Env. popup menu:

System: Selects stand-alone or hosted mode, monitor type, tool display status, and gage measurement units.

I/O: Assigns functions to the 14 discrete output lines, and sets operating parameters for RS-232 and remote I/O communications.

Tool Set: Selects trigger source, active tool set and assigns cameras to tool sets.

In the following pages, the steps for configuring these parameters are presented in top-down order. You need not perform them in that order, however.

Chapter 4

Operating Environment

Selecting

System

Popup

Menu and Parameters

Select the System in that menu. popup menu, then select the parameters

Your

Action

Pick the System menu box in the

Env.popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the System menu box, the System popup menu appears above the Env. menu, as follows:

43

Host: Stand Alone l

Tool Display: Off .- Svstem

-

,-

:.. E&.

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

From the top down, these are the parameters in the System popup menu:

Selects the CVIM system operating mode. The mode can be Stand Alone, Pyramid, Remote I/O, or RS-232.

During the tool configuration mode, it causes all enabled tools of one type, and within one tool set, to appear on the monitor screen when set to On. The tool display can be either On or Off.

Selects either a color or a monochrome video monitor. The monitor can be Color or Monochrome.

Selects the unit of measurement for linear or circular gages that perform calibrated linear measurements.

The units can be Pixels, Inches, or CM (centimeters).

Selecting Host Select Popup Menu

Select the Host Select popup menu, then select the CVIM system operating mode from that menu.

The operating mode selection specifies whether your CVIM system will be configured for stand-alone or hosted operation.

Your Action

Look at the Host menu box in the System popup menu.

Comments

The Host menu box displays the currently selected CVIM system operating mode. The operating mode can be Stand

Alone, Pyramid, Remote I/O, or RS-232.

4-4

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

Selecting System

Popup Selecting Host Select Popup Menu (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Host menu box. When you pick the Host menu box, the Host Select popup menu appears alongside the System popup menu, as follows:

System

Popup Menu

Units: Inches 0.0 I

0 RS-232

I

I/O

0.0 +-.-. Env.

Popup Menu

Tool Set

;i g& : 1:

0.0

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the Stand Alone box in the Host Select menu has a shaded square (0) This indicates that Stand Alone is the currently selected operating mode. Chapter 1, Introduction:

CVIM Machine Vision, differentiates the stand-alone and hosted operating modes.

Here is a brief description of each box in the Host Select menu:

Selects the stand-alone operating mode. In this mode, the CVIM system is controlled solely through the discrete I/O lines connected to the production equipment.

If a host system is connected to the CVIM system, and the

CVIM system is configured for stand-alone operation, the host system can o&y read inspection results from the CVIM system.

Selects the hosted operating mode. In this mode, the CVIM system can be controlled by Pyramid system modules occupying the same chassis.

I/O: Selects the hosted operating mode. In this mode, the CVIM system can be controlled by a remote PLC system (or an Allen-Bradley 6008 scanner card installed in a computer) connected to the CVIM module’s remote I/O port.

Selects the hosted operating mode. In this mode, the CVIM system can be controlled by computer equipment connected to the CVIM module’s RS-232 port.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-5

Selecting System Popup

Menu and Parameters

(con tinoed)

Selecting Host Select Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate box in the

Host Select popup menu.

Comments

The selection you make depends on the requirements of your particular application of the CVIM system.

Note that if you pick a different operating mode, the new selection will be highlighted in the

Host Select popup menu and will also appear in the

Host menu box.

Note also that if you change to the Pyramid operating mode, you must power the CVIM system down, then back up again, in order for the Pyramid system to recognize the CVIM system. Before powering down, be sure to save the current configuration first, if appropriate.

Selecting Tool Display Status

Select the on or off status for the tool display during the tool configuration mode.

When the tool display is on, all tools in the currently selected tool category will appear on the monitor screen.

For example, assume that you are currently configuring gage #4 and that you have already configured and enabled gages #l through #3. If the tool display were on, gage #4 would be red and gages # 1 through #3 would be green.

When the tool display is off, only the tool that you are currently configuring appears on the monitor screen. In the example above, you would see only gage

#4.

Your Action

Look at the

Tool Display menu box in the

System popup menu.

Pick the

Tool Display box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Tool Display menu box displays the currently selected tool display status. The tool display will be either

On or

Off.

When you pick the

Tool Display box, the status will toggle to the opposite condition. Thus,

On will change to

Off, or vice versa.

Selecting Monitor Type

Select color or monochrome, whichever is appropriate for the type of monitor you are using.

NOTE: If you are using a monochrome monitor and the monitor type is set to color, the highlighting that appears in and around the menu boxes when you point the light pen at them will be very difficult to see.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-6

Selecting System Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting

Monitor

Type (continued)

Your Action

Look at the Monitor menu box in the System popup menu.

Pick the Monitor menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The Monitor menu box displays the currently selected monitor type. The monitor will be either Color or

Monochrome.

When you pick the Monitor box, the monitor type will toggle to the opposite type. Thus, Monochrome will change to

Color, or vice versa.

Selecting Units Popup Menu

If your application will be using linear or circular gages to make calibrated linear measurements, select Pixels, Inches, or CM (centimeters) as the unit of measurement. Note that you will also need to perform one of the calibration procedures described in Chapter 5.

If your application will not need “units,” you can skip this procedure.

Your Action

Look at the Units menu box in the System popup menu.

Pick the Units menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The Units menu box displays the currently selected unit unit for calibrated measurements. The unit will be Pixels,

Inches, or CM (centimeters).

When you pick the U n its menu box, the Units popup menu will appear alongside the System popup menu, as follows:

System

Popup Menu

Host: Stand Alone 000

Tool Display: Off

Monitor: Color

Note that the Pixels box in the Units menu has a shaded square (0) This indicates that Pixels the currently selected measurement unit.

-

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-7

Selecting System Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Units Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate box in the Units popup menu.

Comments

The selection you make depends on the requirements of your particular application of the CVIM system.

Note that if you pick a different unit, the new selection will be highlighted in the Units popup menu and will also appear in the Units menu box.

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the I/O popup menu then select the parameters in that menu.

Your Action

Pick the I/O menu box in the Env. popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the I/O menu box, the l/O popup menu appears above the Env. menu, as follows:

I

:-.&&~~j:.~ Camera *

1

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

From the top down, these are the parameters in the System popup menu:

Selects the specific signal function for each of the 14 discrete output lines. Also, selects the pulse duration for the Results, Data Valid, and Master Range signals.

RS-232: Selects the protocol and baud rate parameters for the RS-232 port.

Selects the data rate and rack address parameters for the node adapter.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-8

Selecting I/O Popup Menu Selecting Output Assignment Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Select the popup menu, then select the appropriate signal function for each output line that your application requires.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Output Assignment menu box in the I/O

When you pick the

Output Assignment

Output Assignment menu box, the popup menu appears alongside the I/O popup menu. popup menu, as follows:

-

2 Not Used

Output Assignment

Popup Menu

I/O

Popup Menu

177 1 Remote I/O

1 System

0.0

5 Not Used

6 Not Used

7 Not Used

8 Not Used

9 Not Used

10 Not Used

11 Not Used

12 Not Used

13 Not Used

14 Not Used l/Duration Oms

Z/Duration Oms

0.0

-1

--1

The Output Assignment popup menu consists of 16 boxes -

14 boxes for output line function assignments and two boxes for pulse duration settings.

Initially, the 14 function boxes will read “Not Used” and the two pulse duration boxes will read “Oms,” as shown in the example menu above. If the boxes had been previously configured, and the configuration stored, it would display whatever functions were assigned at that time.

NOTE: If a function box displays “l/Results” or “21Results” in black type, it means that at least one analysis tool is already assigned to the output line designated by that function box. To change the function for that output line, you must first remove all tool assignments to it.

-

-

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-9

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Output fine Functions

At this point, you should refer to the Output Line Planning

Sheet in Appendix A, Planning Discrete II0 Assignments and Connections. This sheet will show you the function for each output line to be used in your application.

If you have not prepared this sheet yet, you should do so at this time.

If you have already prepared this sheet, you can now enter the output line functions as described in the following steps.

Your Action

Look at the Frst function box in the Output Assignment popup menu.

Pick the first function box.

Comments

This box indicates the currently assigned function for output line #l. In the Output Assignment menu shown above, the current assignment is “Not Used .” This indicates that no function has been assigned to output line #I.

When you pick this box, the Output Line Function popup menu will appear alongside the Output Assignment popup

Output AssignmenL

Popup Menu

I/O

Popup Menu

1 RS-232

1771 Remote I/O

System

I

3 Not Used

4 Not Used

5 Not Used

1

6 Not Used

0.0

..a

I

9 Not Used

10 Not Used

11 Not Used

0.0

0.0

0.0

I

I I

0 l/Results

I

0 Z/Trigger Nak 1

12 Not Used

13 Not Used

14 Not Used 0.0

~ l/Duration Oms 0.0

I

Z/Duration Oms 0.0 I

0 Z/Results t

Output Line

Function

Popup Menu

I

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Chapter 4 Operating En wironmen t

4-10

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Output Line Functions (continued)

Your Action

Pick a function for output line #l, if appropriate.

Pick the functions for the remaining output lines.

Look at the two

“Duration” boxes in the

Assignment

Output menu.

Comments

Note that the

Not Used box in the

Output Line Function menu has a shaded square (0) This indicates that

Not Used the currently assigned function for output line #l.

Refer to your Output Line Planning Sheet from Appendix

A, and pick the appropriate function box in the

Output Line

Function menu for output line #l.

Note that if you pick a different function than the current one, the new function will be highlighted in the

Output Line

Function menu and will also appear in the

Output

Assignment menu.

Refer to your Output Line Planning Sheet and assign the appropriate functions to the remaining output lines.

NOTE: Be certain to assign

“Not Used” to all output lines that are not to be used in your application. This ensures that no signals will be present on the unused lines.

The two boxes display the currently selected pulse duration for the Results, Data Valid, and Master Range signals for the two tool sets.

The pulse duration is stated in milliseconds, and the acceptable range is 1 to 2000 milliseconds.

NOTE: If you specify 0 (zero) milliseconds, the signals will be latched. They will be updated at the completion of the next inspection cycle.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-71

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Output Line Functions

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the l/Duration box to set the pulse duration for tool set #I signals.

Comments

When you pick the l/Duration box, the “calculator” pad will appear alongside the Output Assignment popup menu, as follows:

I

Output Assignment

Popup Menu

Calculator

Pad

1

11 NotUsed 0.0

0.0

I

13 Not Used 0.0

I

I

14 Not Used

( Enter

-

On the calculator pad, pick Refer to the II0 Parameters table in Appendix B for the the appropriate pulse duration pulse duration you selected for tool set #l signals. When you for tool set #1 signals. pick the new pulse duration number, it will appear in the calculator “display.”

Pick the Enter key on the When you pick the Enter key, the number you entered will calculator

pad.

appear in the l/Duration box.

If appropriate, repeat the sameprocess to set thepulse duration for tool set #2 signals.

Before you connect the CVIM

II0 lines to your production equipment, read this warning.

A

WARNING:

The CVIM local I/O lines will be disabled whenever hardware or software faults occur in the CVIM module and/or other modules in the Pyramid Integrator chassis. Failure to accommodate this logic convention when you interface the CVIM I/O lines to your production equipment may cause unintended operation of your equipment, which may result in serious personal injury or death.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-72

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting RS-232 Parameters

If your application will be using the RS-232 port for data communication, you must select the appropriate RS-232 parameters.

For additional information on CVIM data communications, refer to the CVIM Communications Manual, Catalog No.

5370-ND002.

Your Action

Pick the RS-232 menu box in the I/O menu.

Comments

When you pick this box, the RS-232 popup menus appear alongside the I/O popup menu, as follows:

Popup Menu v

Output Assignment 000 p/popup

@: ya: ; : :;: ;. ‘:. :

1

( f-J

9600

10

19200

L

System

I

]

RS-232

Menus

.! .‘:~&$’ .: Camera A

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the ASCII box in the Protocol menu and the 300 box in the Baud Rate menu has a shaded square (0) This indicates that the RS-232 port is currently configured to use

ASCII data communications protocol at 300 baud.

In the Protocol popup menu, the selections indicate the two

RS-232 data communications protocols available with the

CVIM system.

- This indicates that the CVIM system uses standard

ASCII characters for data communications through the RS-

232 port.

- This indicates that the CVIM system uses the Allen-

Bradley DFl protocol for data communications through the

RS-232 port.

-

Chapter

4-13

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting RS-232 Parameters (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate protocol in the

Protocol menu.

Pick the appropriate baud rate in the Baud Rate menu.

Comments

Selecting 177 1 Remote I/O Parameters

If your application will be using the remote I/O port for data communication, you must select the appropriate remote I/O parameters. For more information about CVIM data communications, refer to the CV1M Communications

Manual,

Catalog No. 5370-ND002.

Your Action Comments

Pick the 1771 Remote I/O menu When you pick this box, the

177 1 Remote I/O popup menus box in the I/O popup menu. appear alongside the

I/O popup menu, as follows:

1 IJ Disabled

System

I

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

Enabled box in the

Remote I/O menu and the

57.6 box in the

Data Rate menu have a shaded square (0)

This indicates that the remote I/O port is currently enabled for data communications at 57.6K baud. Also, the number 7 in the

Rack Address menu indicates the CVIM is currently selected as the 1771 rack address.

Chapter 4 Operating

Environment

4-14

Selecting I/O Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting 177 1 Remote I/O Parameters (continued)

Your Action

Pi& Ena bled or Disabled in the Remote I/O menu.

Pick the appropriate baud rate in the

Data Rate menu.

Look at the address number in the

Rack Address menu.

If

appropriate, pick the menu box in the

Rack Address menu.

Comments

Pick

Ena bled to enable using the remote I/O port.

Otherwise, pick

Disabled.

If the current rack address number is correct, skip the next step.

When you pick the menu box, the “calculator” pad will appear alongside the

177 1 Remote I/O popup menus, as follows:

10 Disabled 1

Calculator Pad

I/O

On the calculator pad, pick the appropriate rack address.

I

I t

Popup Menu

1 System

+

Output Assignment

, Data Rate

I

10

230.4

I

I

7 8

0 .

9

4 5 6

1 2 3

Exit t

: x

%

/ =

Clr

Enter

The new number will appear in the calculator “display.”

Note that the acceptable address numbers are 0 through 7.

+ - v

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist

Pick the

Enter key on the calculator pad.

When you pick the

Enter key, the new address will appear in the

Rack Address menu.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-15

Selecting Tool Set Popup

Select the

Tool Set popup menu, then select the appropriate

Menu and Parameters combination of cameras, tool sets, and trigger sources.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Tool Set menu box When you pick the

Tool Set menu box, the three-part

Tool in the

Env. popup menu. Set popup menu will appear above the

Env. popup menu, as follows:

Trigger Source

Trigger Source

Active Tool Set: 1

System

.‘.I. : :

;; :Erfv; : Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

In the three-part

Tool Set popup menu, the top two parts pertain to the camera and trigger source parameters for tool sets #l and #2. The bottom part determines the active tool set number during configuration.

The three parts of the

Tool Set menu have the following meanings: l Tool Set 1

- In this part you can select either camera A or B as the image source for the tool set # 1 analysis tools. In addition, you can select a tool set #l trigger source for configuration and for runmode. l Tool Set 2

-This is identical to

Tool Set

1, except that it applies to tool set #2.

0 Active Tool Set

- In this part you can select the tool set and camera image that will appear on the monitor screen during configuration. The number will be either 1 or 2 for tool set #l or tool set #2.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-16

Selecting Tool Set Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Tool Set # 1 Camera and Trigger

Select camera

A or

B, then select the trigger source popup menus for tool set # 1.

Your Action

Look at the

Camera menu box under

Tool Set 1.

If

appropriate, pick the

Camera menu box.

Pick the

Trigger

Source menu box under

Tool Set 1.

Comments

This box indicates the currently selected camera

(A or

B) whose image will be used with tool set #l.

When you pick the

Camera menu box, the letter

A will toggle to

B, or vice versa. At the same time, the image on the monitor screen will change from one camera to the other, and a new image will be acquired.

When you pick the

Trigger Source menu box, the

Runtime and Setup menus appear alongside the

Tool Set popup menu, as follows:

Tool Set

Popu Menu

P

Camera B

- .

I rigger Source

Active Tool Set: 1

0.0 ’

10 = RuntimeTrigger 1

4

T”:,,..”

Illyyer

Source

POPUP Menus

.;: ,:; :::I : .: j:.

:: :.: Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

None/Disabled box in the

Runtime menu and the

Auto/Internal box in the Setup menu has a shaded square

(0) This indicates that the tool set #l run mode currently has no trigger source enabled, and the configuration

(“Setup”) mode has th e automatic internal trigger enabled.

Note also that the

2 (Auto/Internal), 2 (l/O), and

2 (Hosted) boxes are in black type, indicating that you cannot pick them at this time. (They will be enabled when you pick the

Trigger Source menu box under

Tool

Set 2.)

-

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-17

Selecting Tool Set Popup Selecting Tool Set # 1 Camera and Trigger (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

In the

Runtime popup menu, the selections in the menu boxes have the following meanings:

None/Disabled

- This indicates that no trigger source will be enabled during the run mode. l 1 (Auto/Internal)

- This indicates that the trigger source for tool set #l will be the CVIM module’s internal circuitry. The trigger period will be one trigger pulse every 50 milliseconds, f 5. This is an approximate rate of 20 trigger pulses per second.

NOTE: If you select

1 (Auto/Internal) for tool set #l, you can

&so select

1 (Auto/Internal) for tool set #2. l 1 (l/O)

- This indicates that the trigger source will be the #l trigger input through the CVIM module front panel.

NOTE: If you select 1 (I/O) for tool set # 1, you can also select

1 (I/O) for tool set #2. l 1 (Hosted)

- This indicates that the trigger source will be the #l host system trigger input through the backplane

(Pyramid system), through the remote I/O port, or through the RS-232 port (computer system).

NOTE: If you select

1 (Hosted) for tool set #l, you can also select

1 (Hosted) for tool set #2.

2 (Auto/Internal), 2

(l/O), and

2 (Hosted) -

These are in black type, indicating that you cannot select them at this time.

The selections in the

Setup popup menu apply only during

CVIM system configuration. They have the following meanings:

Auto/Internal

- This is the same trigger source described in

1 (Auto/Internal), above. When enabled, it ensures that a

“live” camera image will appear on the monitor screen durin the following functions:

Focus Camera, Take

Snaps ot, Light Reference, Snap 81 Analyze, Continuous

S&A, Snap & Register, and

Continuous S&R. l = Runtime Trigger

- At various times during tool configuration, new camera images may be required to be synchronized with moving workpieces. By selecting the =

Runtime Trigger box, you can use the run node I/O trigger source to acquire synchronized images during tool configuration. In this case, the CVIM system will ulait for the trigger signal to acquire each new image.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-78

Selecting Tool Set Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Tool Set #2 Camera and Trigger

If your application requires using tool set #2, select camera

A or B, then select the trigger source popup menus for tool set #2.

Your Action

Look at the

Camera menu box under

Tool Set 1.

If appropriate, pick the

Camera menu box.

Pick the

Trigger Source menu box under

Tool Set 2.

Comments

This box indicates the currently selected camera

(A or

B) whose image will be used with tool set #2.

When you pick the

Camera menu box, the letter

A will toggle to

B, or vice versa. At the same time, the image on the monitor screen will change from one camera to the other, and a new image will be acquired.

When you pick the

Trigger Source menu box, the

Runtime and

Setup menus appear alongside the

Tool Set popup menus, as follows:

Tool Set

-

10 1 (Auto/Internal)

I

0 1 (Hosted)

Active Tool Set:

1 System 0.0 I 1 q

+. Env.

Popup Menu

.ine Ref. Win Gage Window

II SC

Note that the

2 Auto/Internal box in the

Runtime menu and the =

Runtime Trigger box in the

Setup menu have a shaded square (01 This indicates that the run mode for tool set #2 currently uses the automatic internal trigger source, and the configuration (“Setup”) mode use the same trigger source as the run mode.

Note also that the

1 (Auto/Internal), 1 (l/O), and

1 (Hosted) boxes are in black type, indicating that you cannot pick them at this time. (They will be enabled when you pick the

Trigger Source menu box under

Tool Set 1.)

-

-

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-19

Selecting Tool Set Popup

Menu (and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Selecting Tool Set #2 Camera and Trigger (continued)

Comments

The selections in the

Runtime popup menu apply only during

CVIM system run mode. They have the following meanings:

None/Disabled trigger source will be enabled during the run mode.

2 (Auto/Internal)

- This indicates that the trigger source for tool set #2 will be the CVIM module’s internal circuitry. The trigger period will be one trigger pulse every 50 milliseconds, + 5. This is an approximate rate of 20 trigger pulses per second.

2 (l/O) - This indicates that the trigger source will be the #2 trigger input through the CVIM module front panel.

2 (Hosted)

- This indicates that the trigger source will be the #2 host system trigger input through the backplane

(Pyramid system), through the remote L’O port, or through the RS-232 port (computer system). l 1 (Auto/Internal), 1 (l/O), and

1 (Hosted) -

These are in

black

type, indicating that you cannot select them at this time.

The selections in the

Setup popup menu apply only during

CVIM system configuration. They have the following meanings:

Auto/Internal

- This is the same trigger source described in

2 (Auto/Internal), above. When enabled, it ensures that a

“live” camera image will appear on the monitor screen during the following functions:

Focus Camera, Take

Snapshot, Light Reference, Snap & Analyze, Continuous

S&A, Snap & Register, and

Continuous S&R.

0 = Runtime Trigger - At various times during tool’ configuration, new camera images may be required to be synchronized with moving workpieces. By selecting the =

Runtime Trigger box, you can use the run mode I/O trigger source to acquire synchronized images during tool configuration. In this case, the CVIM system will wait for the trigger signal to acquire each new image.

Chapter 4 Operating Environment

4-20

Selecting Tool Set Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Active Tool Set

During CVIM system configuration, the camera image and tool set that will appear on the monitor screen depend on the setting shown in the

Active Tool Set menu box, the third part of the

Tool

Set popup menu.

Set the

Active Tool

Set menu box according to which tool set you want to configure at this time.

If

Your Action

Look at the

Active Tool Set menu box.

Comments

This box indicates the currently selected “active” tool set. appropriate, pick the

Active

Tool Set menu box.

If you want to configure tools in tool set #l, the menu box must display

1.

If you want to configure tools in tool set #2, the menu box must display 2.

When you pick the

Active Tool Set menu box, the tool set number will toggle from

1 to 2, or vice versa.

At the same time, the image on the monitor screen will change from one camera to the other provided that you have selected different cameras under

Tool Set 1 and

Tool Set 2.

-

Chapter

5

Camera and lighting

Parameters

Chapter Objectives

The objectives of this chapter are to show you how to configure the camera and lighting parameters in the

Camera popup menu. This includes adjusting the camera, selecting the camera type and operating mode, and setting the lighting threshold, camera resolution, light probe, and calibration parameters.

The

Camera popup menu appears when you pick the

Camera menu box in the Main Configuration menu.

Configuration

Categories

The main function and configuration categories in the

Camera popup menu are these:

Focus camera. This function is a continuous series of digitized “snapshots,” and it provides a “live” image on the video monitor screen. You can use it to set up and adjust the lighting and camera.

Camera type/mode. This configuration category identifies the type of camera to be used: standard, or frame reset. It also sets the operating mode when a standard camera is used: normal trigger, or delayed trigger.

Lighting/Resolution. The lighting threshold adjustment enables you to maximize the contrast in a stored camera image. The resolution parameter provides you with a choice of three degrees of image resolution. You can adjust the lighting threshold for optimum contrast and select an image resolution appropriate to your application.

Light probe. The light probe automatically compensates for changes in the intensity of the light falling on the workpiece. You can configure the light probe according to the type of lighting to be used in your application.

Object calibration. This function compensates linear and circular gages so that they can measure a specific distance equally in both the X and Y axes, and in all angles in between. You can use this function when your application requires gages to make calibrated measurements.

Grid calibration. This function compensates linear and circular gages similar to object calibration, but also compensates for optical distortion throughout the camera image. You can use this function when your application requires gages to make calibrated measurements anywhere within the camera image.

5-2

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

Con figurin Camera

Parameters

This section shows you the details of configuring the camera and lighting parameters.

You will begin by picking the

Camera menu box in the Main

Configuration menu. You will then configure several parameters relating to the camera and lighting.

Before proceeding with this section, you should have read

Chapter 3, CVIM User Interface.

Selecting Camera Popup

Menu and Parameters

Your Action

Look at the

Camera menu box in the Main

Configuration menu.

Pick

Camera in the Main

Configuration menu.

Your first step is to select the

Camera popup menu.

Comments

The Camera menu box indicates the camera, A or B, that is associated with the currently active tool set.

When you pick the

Camera menu box, the

Camera popup menu appears above the Main Comiguration menu, as follows:

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Lighting/Resolution

Light Probe em.

0.0 4-

.a@

Camera

Popup Menu

Env. Csmqa A: Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

The

Camera popup menu shows the six configuration categories described earlier. You should perform the

Camera

Type/Mode, Focus Camera and

Lighting/Resolution configurations before any of the others.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-3

Selecting Camera Type/Mode

Popup Menu

Select the

Camera Type/Mode menu box, then select the camera type and mode.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Camera Type/Mode menu box in the

Camera

When you pick the

Camera Type/Mode

Camera Type/Mode popup menu. popup menu, as follows: menu box, the popup menu appears above the

Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Popup Menu -

@ Standard Cij&riI 1; : : :

IJ Frame Reset Camera

Shutter (usec): 690 me.

I

Grid Calibration

Env. #&?&ziI&,

0.0

1

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

Standard Camera box in the

Camera

Type/Mode popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that a standard camera, with normal response to triggers, is currently selected.

From the top down, the selections in the

Camera Type/Mode popup menu have the following meanings:

Standard Camera:

Selects a standard camera and normal response mode to trigger input signals.

Using the normal response mode, the CVIM system responds to trigger signals only when it is not busy processing a previous image. If the CVIM system is busy, it misses the trigger signal and does not acquire a new image.

Std. Cam., DTR Mode:

Selects a standard camera and a delayed reject response (DTR) to trigger input signals.

Using this response mode, the CVIM system waits until the last possible instant (waits until the end of the current camera field) before determining whether it can accept a trigger. If the CVIM system is still busy at that time, it misses the trigger and does not acquire a new image.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-4

Selecting Camera Type/Mode

Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate box in the

Camera Type/Mode popup menu.

Comments

Frame Reset Camera:

Selects a frame reset camera.

Using the frame reset camera, the CVIM system can reset the camera’s image sensor, and the camera can then begin acquiring a new image immediately.

NOTE: If you select Frame Reset Camera and intend to use two cameras, both must be frame reset cameras.

When you pick the box, the new selection will be highlighted in the

Camera Type/Mode popup menu.

Selecting Shutter Parameter

Ifyou selected

Standard Camera or

Std. Cam., DTR Mode in the

Camera Type/Mode popup menu, skip this step.

Ifyou selected

Frame Reset Camera in the

Camera

Type/Mode popup menu, you must set the

Shutter parameter

(in microseconds) to the same shutter speed that you set on the frame reset camera.

NOTE: If your application uses two frame reset cameras, both must be set to the same shutter speed.

To determine the correct shutter speed setting for the camera(s) used in your application, refer to the camera user manual.

Your Action

Look at the

Shutter menu box in the

Camera popup menu.

Comments

The

5 h utter menu box displays the currently selected value for the shutter parameter.

NOTE: The allowable range of values for the shutter parameter is 400 to 16,667. If you try to enter a number less than 400, the number in the

Shutter menu box will remain

(or change to) 0 (zero), which is the default value.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

Selecting Shutter Parameter

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Shutter menu box. When you pick the

Shutter menu box, the “calculator” pad appears alongside the

Camera menu, as follows:

5-5

-

1 0 Standard Camera

Std. Cam., DTR Mode

1

I

_Camera Type/MO

Popup Menu de

Env.

Calculator Pad

1

.,

:

.: .:. :.;

,:. j :, : j:.. .j ;

::

. . . :

: ::

.., 6;o’ ;:;; :.. :j..‘; : I. ‘-;:,I h:.j:‘;

::,.-.: :. :: . . .

Camera

Popup Menu

I f

Focus Camera

.. ... Ref. Win a x

+ I -

/

O/O

Clr

.-

=

Enter

Gage 1 Window 1 Mist 1 Exit

A 1

Pick each digit of the shutter As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator parameter. “display.” Thus, for a value of 690, pick “6,” pick “9,” and pick “0.”

Pick the

Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the new shutter parameter value will appear in the

Shutter menu box.

5-6

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

Using Focus Camera

Select the

Focus Camera function, then focus the camera

Function lens and set the aperture for the best contrast.

NOTE: Before proceeding with this function, be sure that the “Setup” trigger source for the active tool set will enable trigger inputs from either the internal or an external source.

If an external source is selected, the CVIM system will display the following message and will wait for the trigger signal:

The system is waiting for a trigger.

Depress the lightpen to continue.

--

For information on the selection of trigger sources for each tool set, refer to the appropriate sections in Chapter 4,

Operating Environment.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Focus Camera

When you pick the

Focus Camera menu box, the screen menu box. image becomes “live,” and a message box appears above the

Camera popup menu, as follows:

Depress the light pen to continue

Focus Camera

‘~

Light Probe

... .- Camera

Popup Menu

Env. C#n$rs& Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the image on the monitor screen now displays what the camera currently “sees.“The image is “live,” and consists of a rapid, continuous series of digitized camera snapshots.

Chapter 5 Camera andLighting Parameters

5-7

Using Focus Camera

Function (continued)

Your Action

Adjust the lighting and camera.

When al2 adjustments are satisfactory, exit the

Focus Camera function.

Comments

Adjust the lighting fixture as necessary for optimum effect on the camera’s field of view - the area in which the workpiece will be inspected.

Adjust the camera focus and aperture for the clearest focus and best contrast. Also, adjust the camera’s distance to the workpiece for the optimum field of view size.

After you have a satisfactory image, exit the Focus Camera function by pushing in the light pen tip. The camera image will “freeze,” and the message box will disappear.

-

Selecting

Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the Lighting/Resolution parameters in that menu. popup menu, then select the

Your Action

Pick the Lighting/Resolution menu box in the Camera popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the Lighting/Resolution

Lighting/Resolution popup menu, as follows: menu box, the popup menu appears above the Camera

Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Light Probe

Object Calibration

Grid Calibration

Env. j.

C&teia:&;

000 4

0.0

0.0

Camera

Popup Menu

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window

From the top down, these are the configuration parameters in the Lighting/Resolution popup menu:

Optimizes the contrast in the stored camera image.

Selects the image resolution to be used in your application. The numbers refer to horizontal and vertical image resolution. This is the number of pixels along the horizontal and vertical axes.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-8

Selecting Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Resolution Popup Menu

Select the Resolution popup menu, then select the camera image resolution required for your application.

NOTE: Be sure that the camera image resolution that you select is the one you want for your application. If you change the resolution after you have configured the tools, you may need to re-configure those tools.

Your Action

Look at the Res menu box in the Lighting/Resolution popup menu.

Pick the Res menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The Res menu box displays the currently selected image resolution.

Refer to the Camera Parameters table in Appendix B for the image resolution you selected for the currently active tool set. If the resolution you checked in that table is not currently displayed in the Res menu box, use the next steps to select a different resolution.

When you pick the Res menu box, the Resolution popup menu appears alongside the Lighting/Resolution popup menu, as follows:

Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu

1

In

512Hx256V

0 512Hx512V

I

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

; &$&&@&j&.jfi;

: .: .: .. :.

Light Probe

Object Calibration

Grid Calibration

0.0

0.0

0.0

Popup Menu

Camera

Popup Menu

Env. ‘. ’ i Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the 256Hx256V box in the Resolution popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that the currently selected camera image resolution is based on 256 pixels along both the vertical and horizontal axis.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-9

Selecting Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Resolution

Popup Menu

(continued)

Your Action Comments

NOTE 1: During runmode operation, the CVIM system displays all camera images with 256-pixel vertical resolution regardless of the resolution selected in the

Resolution popup menu. Consequently, when the CVIM system returns to the setup mode from the run mode, and the selected resolution is

512H x 512V, any “learn” operation that you perform on the run mode camera image may have a different result from the result indicated in the

Results Page or from prior learn operations.

Thus, to regain a

f&Z

(512V) resolution image, you must acquire a new camera image using either the

Snapshot or the

Focus Camera function.

NOTE

2:

If the

Delete Templates box is in light type and the resolution boxes are in black type, it means that at least one window is configured for the

Template Match operation, and a template has been saved. It also means that an “active feature” has been saved in at least one reference window. In both cases, the windows may be either enabled or disabled.

Before you can change the image resolution, you must first pick the

Delete Templates box.

When you pick the

Delete Templates box, the following message appears in the upper-left corner of the monitor screen:

Pick the same box again to continue.

Pick the appropriate box in the

Resolution popup menu.

WARNING: All templates and features for tool set 1 must be deleted before the res- olution can be modified. Reselect to confirm.

L

When you pick the same box the second time, the saved templates and/or “active features” will be erased. At the same time, the resolution boxes will change to light type, and you can proceed to change the image resolution if you wish.

When you pick a box in the

Resolution popup menu, the following message will appear in the message box at the upper-left corner of the monitor screen:

WARNING: Selecting a new camera resolution will require recalibration and may invalidate the tool results. Reselect to confirm.

The purpose of this message is to warn you that changing the image resolution will change the calibration and may invalidate tool results.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-70

-

Selecting Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Resolution fopup

Menu

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the same box again to When you pick the same box the second time, the new complete the change. selection will be highlighted in the Resolution popup menu and will appear in the Res menu box.

Your Action

Pick the Light Reference menu box in the Lighting/

Resolution popup menu.

Setting Light Reference Threshold

Select the Light Reference slide bar, then adjust the contrast in the image to its optimum level.

The function of the light reference threshold adjustment is to optimize image contrast around the part of the workpiece that is to be inspected. The corresponding assumption is that the contrast levels in all other parts of the image are not important to the outcome of the inspection.

Comments

When you pick the Light Reference menu box, the

REFERENCE slide bar and its two cursors will appear at the right edge of the screen, as follows:

--

Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu

I

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Left

-:

Cursor

Slide

Bar-

II>

H

’ I

R

E

N

C

E

R

E

F

E

L

0

En”. m,

~~~f~~;; Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist b

-

Exit

1

NOTE: Some parts of the camera image may have turned green and/or blue at this time. If so, ignore it for now.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting

Parameters

5-71

Selecting Lighting/Resolution

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Setting Light Reference Threshold (continued)

Your Action

Pick the left cursor.

Drag the left cursor to its

!opmost position.

Pick the right cursor.

Drag the right cursor to its bottommost position.

Comments

When you pick the left cursor, its color changes to yellow.

You can now “drag” the cursor up and down.

This initializes the “high reference” to 150.

This initializes the “low reference” to 0 (zero).

Pick the

Adjust

Focus Camera menu box. the lens aperture to its :optimum setting.

NOTE: The green and blue colors referred to earlier are provided to assist you in visually setting the light reference threshold. They have the following meanings:

Green: All green areas of the camera image will turn completely white when you exit the

Light Reference adjustment.

Blue: All blue areas of the camera image will turn completely black when you exit the

Light Reference adjustment.

If any part of the screen image is still green and/or blue at this time, perform the following two additional steps. If not, skip these two steps.

When you pick the

Focus Camera menu box, the image on the screen will be “live” again, and the message box will reappear.

A smaller f-stop provides a greater depth of field.

Drag the I& cursor slowly downward.

Drag the ri,$ht cursor slowly upward.

Use the “help” menu for the next two steps.

Drag the left cursor slowly downward until the green color begins to “invade” the workpiece image, then reverse the cursor until the green color just barely disappears from the workpiece image.

On the help menu, a “high reference” range of 85 to 95 typically provides the best results.

Drag the right cursor slowly upward until the blue color begins to “invade” the workpiece image, then reverse the cursor until the blue color just barely disappears from the workpiece image.

On the help menu, a “low reference” range of 7 to 12 typically provides the best results.

Although the image contrast should now be optimized, you may need to experiment by making slight changes in the aperture setting, the threshold settings (for gages and windows), and the light reference threshold. Your objective is to get the most consistent results from the inspection tools.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-72

Selecting Light Probe Popup

Menu and Parameters

Select the

Light Probe popup menu, then select and configure the parameters and functions in that menu.

NOTE: You must configure a light probe for each camera if your application requires two cameras. Otherwise, configure only the light probe for the camera port (A or B) that you will be using.

The light probe detects the intensity of light at a particular place within the camera’s field of view. The probe measures light intensity on a scale of 0 to 63, where 0 is the darkest light intensity value and 63 the brightest.

The light probe is a pre-inspection tool: If the probe finds that the light intensity has changed, but is within prevously specified range limits, the CVIM system will provide brightness compensation for the light variations and continue the inspection.

Brightness compensation modifies gray scale values from the camera to best match the original image. Thus, the

CVIM system can continue inspections in spite of light variations, so long as those variations remain within the specified range limits.

If the light intensity is above or below a specified limit, the

CVIM system discontinues the inspection and reports the condition on a specified output line.

The basic steps for configuring the light probe are these:

Enable the light probe for use with either a strobe light or continuous light.

Prepare a light intensity reference patch and position it within the screen image.

Position the light probe “box” over the reference patch in the screen image.

Perform a “learn” function to get the light intensity value that the light probe “sees” at the reference patch.

Determine the light-intensity range limits for the light probe.

The following steps show you the details of configuring the light probe,

-

-

-

Chapter 5

Camera and

5-13

Selecting Light Probe Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pi& the Light Probe

When you pick the

Light Probe menu box, the

Light Probe menu box. popup menu appears above the

Camera A (or B) popup menu, as follows:

Status Disabled

Pick & Place

Learn:

45.140

Range/Outputs

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

0.0

+

0.0

Light Probe

Popup Menu t--P Camera

Popup Menu

Object Calibration 0.0

Grid Calibration j:: :

!&

0.0

I

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

These are the configuration parameters and functions in the

Light Pro be popup menu:

Status:

Selects the

Probe Status popup menu, from which you can enable or disable the probe and select the image field that the probe is to measure.

Pick

&

Place:

Enables you to position the light probe on the screen, subject to the setting in the

Status menu box.

Learn:

Takes a sample reading of the light probe each time that you pick this menu box.

Range/Output:

Selects the acceptable range limits for the values that the light probe reads, and assigns the results

(pass/fail) to the output lines that you specify.

In addition to the

Light Probe popup menu, a small red box will appear somewhere on the screen, as follows: l-l

+----- Light Probe Symbol

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-14

Selecting Light Probe

Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Probe Status Popup Menu

Select the Probe Status popup menu, then select the light probe status required in your application.

Your Action

Look at the Status menu box in the Light Pro be popup menu.

Comments

The Status menu box displays the currently selected probe status for camera A (or B).

Pick the box

Status menu in the Light Probe popup menu.

Refer to the Camera Parameters table in Appendix B for the light probe status you selected for the camera currently appearing in the Camera menu box. If the status you checked in that table is not currently in the Status menu box, use the next steps to select a different status.

When you pick the Status menu box, the Probe Status popup menu appears alongside the Light Pro be popup menu, as follows:

-Probe Status

Popup Menu

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Lighting/Resolution

0.0

0.0 I

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the Disabled box in the Probe Status popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that the light probe

(for camera A) is off. Note also that Range/Outputs, Learn, and Pick

&

Place are in

black

type. This means that you cannot pick these boxes at this time.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-15

Selecting Light Probe Popup Selecting Probe Status Popup Menu (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action the

Pick the appropriate box in

Probe Statuspopup menu.

Comments

The probe status parameters have the following meanings:

Disabled:

This means that the light probe for camera A (in this case) is off (“disabled”).

Same Field:

This means that the light probe must lie somewhere approximately within the top fifth of the monitor screen (it depends on tool locations). The light probe will examine the light intensity within this area and apply any required brightness compensation to the remaining part of the same image field.

You must select

Same Field if your application will be using a strobe light.

Next Field:

This means that the light probe can lie anywhere in the screen image field. The light probe will examine the light intensity within this field, but will apply any required brightness compensation to the nelct image field. Processing time increases when you select

Next Field.

You can select

Next Field if your application will be using the full screen image.

When you pick the box, the new selection will be highlighted in the

Probe Status popup menu and will appear in the

Status menu box.

Using Pick & Place

Function

The following steps show you how to use the

Pick & Place function for positioning the light probe.

The basic steps for positioning the light probe are these:

Attach a reference “patch” of light gray-colored tape near the workpiece so that it always appears in the same place within the screen image field. This material will be the permanent light-intensity reference patch for the light probe.

Position the light probe symbol over the reference patch in the screen image.

Use the following steps to position the light probe.

Your Action

Position a light-gray light reference patch in the sueen image field.

Comments

The exact shade of gray will depend on the specific lighting conditions in you application. You may have to try various shades to find one that results in a light probe reading of about 40-50 when you perform a “learn” operation later on.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-76

Selecting Light Probe Popup Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Pick

&

Place menu box iri the Light Pro be popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Pick

&

Place menu box, a small magenta square will appear inside the light probe:

P

+----- Light probe

Ha\ndle

Limit line

/

(Applies to Same

Field status only)

Aim the lightpen at the light probe handle.

The magenta square is the “handle” that the light pen uses to move the probe around the screen image.

Also appearing near the top of the screen is a green limit line. If you have selected

Same Field status, you can move the probe anywhere above the green limit line.

If you’ve selected

Next Field status, you can move the probe anywhere on the screen image.

Aim the light pen at the light probe handle until the light pen “sees” the handle. You may have to move the light pen around slightly.

When the light pen sees the handle, a larger “highlight” square will surround the light probe box:

4

-

“Highlight” square

Hold the pen steady in this position - the appearance of the “highlight” square means that the light pen is now properly aimed at the handle.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-77

Selecting Light Probe Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick

&

Place

Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the light probe handle.

Drag the light probe over the light reference patch.

Comments

You can now “drag” the light probe around on the screen.

When you move the pen, the probe will follow.

Note: Keep the pen tip within about one-half inch of the screen.

When you have the light probe centered over the light reference patch, press the pen against the screen to “lock” the probe at that position.

If

necessary, use arrows to “fine-tune” the using the vernier arrows. These arrows enable you to move position the of vernier the probe.

You can position the probe more precisely by using the the probe in increments of one pixel.

-- against the probe handle.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking the probe handle or placing the probe.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will appear in the lower-right corner of the screen:

VERNIER ARROWS

Move probe up, down, left, or right

Pick an arrow once to move the probe one pixel in the arrow’s direction.

.- move the probe continuously.

Pick the crreturn” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

Pick the up, down, right, or left arrow, as appropriate, to move the probe one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the probe will move slowly for the first five or six pixels. It will then accelerate tc a more rapid rate of movement.

3

When the probe is properly positioned, pick the “return” symbol (+A) to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-78

Selecting Light. Probe Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Using Learn Function

The following step shows you how to use and interpret the

Learn function.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Learn menu box When you pick the

Learn menu box, the light probe in the

Light Pro be will calculate (“learn”) the average light intensity value at popup menu. the light reference patch and will display this value, in the range of 0.000 (darkest) to 63.000 (lightest), in the

Learn menu box.

The light intensity value reflects the relative brightness of the reference patch. This value should be approximately 40-

50 for adequate light compensation flexibility.

NOTE: You may have to try several patches, each with a different shade of gray, to find one that results in a value close to 40-50.

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines

Range Limits - the term range limit, as it applies to the light probe, refers to a level of light intensity above or below which the CVIM system might not (or cannot) successfully perform an inspection.

In general, range limits specify the upper and lower boundaries of acceptable inspection results. For the light probe, this means that any increase or decrease in light intensity beyond one of these limits will result in unreliable light compensation.

The CVIM system provides two sets of range limits: warning range limits, and fault range limits. Warning range limits must always lie at or luithin fault range limits.

The two sets of range limits have this relationship:

LFc=LW<=NOMINAL<=UW<=UF

The

NOMINAL

range value.LW and UW are the lower and upper warning limits. LF and value refers to a desired middle-of-the-

UF

are the lower and upper fault limits.

Here is a general example, using a nominal value of 45, to demonstrate the concept:

LW

value (lower warning limit) could be set to

40.

UW

value (upper warning limit) could be set to 50.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-19

Selecting Light Probe Popup Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

During an inspection, if the light intensity goes outside either warning limit, the CVIM system will generate a warning signal. If the light intensity goes outside both a warning limit and a fault limit, the CVIM system will generate a warning signal and a fault signal.

In a practical application, a warning signal can function as an early indication of a deteriorating light level. A fault signal can indicate a “hard” failure, such as a burned-out lamp. In each case, the signal that results when a range limit is exceeded can be used to alert operations personnel to fix the problem.

Output Lines -the term output lines refers to the 14 discrete output lines that you can configure to carry various signals to your production equipment. Of these signals, the “results” signals indicate whether or not any of the warning and/or fault range limits have been exceeded.

In Chapter 4, Operating Environment, you can assign signal functions to the output lines. In this chapter, you can assign the light probe warning and fault “results” to any output lines that you designated earlier as “results” lines.

Here are a couple of examples of using the light probe warning and fault range limits and their corresponding output lines:

Example 1:

If the light intensity of a lamp dims to the point that the light probe value falls below the specified warning limit, the CVIM system will issue a signal to the “results” output line that you specified for the light probe warning signal. The inspection processing would then continue.

The warning signal could be used to inform operations personnel that the lamp needs to be adjusted or replaced soon, but not necessarily right away. They could then plan the lamp adjustment or replacement at a convenient time, if possible, such as during a shift change.

Example 2:

If a lamp burns out, the light intensity will drop abruptly below both the warning limit and the fault limit. In this case, the CVIM system will issue both a warning signal and a fault signal to the specified output lines, and the inspection processing would then stop.

The fault signal could be used to inform operations personnel that the lamp needs to be replaced right away.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameter5

S-20

Selecting Light Probe Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range limits and Output lines (continued)

Use the following steps to determine the appropriate range limits for your application and then configure them on your

CVIM system.

Your Action

Perform a

Learn function, as described earlier.

Note the light probe reading in the

Learn menu box.

Calculate and record the upper warnil% range limit.

Calculate and record the lower warning range limit.

Calculate and record the upper fault range limit.

Calculate and record the lower fault range limit.

Comments

Before you perform the “learn” function, be sure the light probe is properly positioned over the reference patch in the screen image.

NOTE:

The reference patch should be positioned so that the light probe is as high as possible in the screen image if you selected the

Same Field operation for the light probe.

The light probe reading should be between 40 and 50. If it is not 40 to 50, try reference patches with different shades of iPY*

To calculate the upper warning range limit, multiply the reading by

15%, add that value to the reading, and write the result on a sheet of paper.

For example, if the reading is 45, 15% of 45 is 6.75. Adding

6.75 to 45 equals 51.75, the upper warning limit.

To calculate the lower warning range limit, multiply the reading by 12%, subtract that value from the reading, and write the result on a sheet of paper.

For example, if the reading is 45,12% of 45 is 5.4. ymutracting 5.4 from 45 equals 39.6, the lower warning

.

To calculate the upper fault range limit, multiply the reading by 25%, add that value to the reading, and write the result on a sheet of paper.

For example, if the reading is 45,25% of 45 is 11.25. Adding

11.25 to 45 equals 56.25, the upper fault limit.

To calculate the lower fault range limit, multiply the reading by 20%, subtract that value from the reading, and write it on a sheet of paper.

For example, if the reading is 45,20% of 45 is 9. Subtracting

9 from 45 equals 36, the lower fault limit.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-21

Selecting Light Probe Popup Assigning Range Limits and Output lines (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the Range/Outputs menu box in the

Range/Outputs popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Range/Outputs menu box, two tables will appear on the screen, as follows:

-

Learn: 45.140

;. .; &j: \

Focus Camera

Light Probe

Popup Menu

Grid Calibration

Env.

0.0

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

The Range/Output Setup table is the one you will use to set the range limits and assign the output lines. The numbers appearing in it now are the limits and lines set previously.

Note that each box in the table has the three dots (-a), which indicates that you will need to pick each box, one at a time, in order to set its value.

The Inspection Statistics table shows “results” data from a series of trial inspections performed while the CVIM system is running inspections in the “1earn”mode. These numbers can help you choose the best values for the range limits.

Chapter 10, Runtime Operations has more information about this subject.

Chapter 5 Camera and

5-22

Selecting Light Probe Popup Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Menu and Parameters

(con timed)

The next steps show you how to select values for the range limits

NOTE:

The order in which these steps are presented may not be appropriate in all cases. If not, a message will appear that says:

VALUE OUT OF RANGE.

For example, this message will appear if you try to change the upper warning range limit to a value below the lower warning range limit.

Your Action

Pick the upper box under

WARNING RANGE.

Comments

This is the warning range upper

(“High”) limit. When you pick this box, the calculator pad appears on the screen:

: Nominal 45.140

Sartiples

Maximum

1020

47.125 hlinimuti 43.640

I i. lb@?@? 45.909

0.076 t

Inspection

Statistics Table

1

1 Status: Next Field 0.0

I

Pick & Place

Learn:

45.140

0.0

;Ra”gef@&&$ :;; ,; :. +l

:

Focus Camera

\

4~-

I

Range/Output

Setup Table

Light Probe

Popup Menu

Env. ”

I

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Pick each digit of the upper warning limit value.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.” Thus, for a value of 50, pick “5,” then pick “0.”

Pick the Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the upper box under

WARNING RANGE.

Pick the middle box under

WARNING RANGE.

This is the warning range lower

(“Low”) limit.

Pick each digit of the lower warning limit value.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

-

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-23

Selecting Light Probe Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Enter key.

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Comments

When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the middle box under

WARNING RANGE.

This is the fault range upper

(“High”) limit. Pick the upper box under

FAULT RANGE.

Pick each digit of the upper fault limit value.

Pick the

Enter key.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the upper box under

FAULT RANGE.

This is the fault range lower

(“Low”) limit.

FAULT RANGE.

Pick each digit of the lower iFault limit value.

Pick the

Enter key.

Pick the lower box under

WARNING RANGE.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the middle box under

FAULT RANGE.

When you pick this box, a variation of the

Output

Assignment popup menu appears on the screen, as follows:

.:.j ; .Hiqi.l

:ji: &;

::,:.

:

:

:. q

5 Z/Results

0 6 Z/Results q

7 Not Used

0 8 Not Used q

9 Not Used

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

1 Lighting/Resolution

Out ut Line

Popup Menu

.a. 1

+ Camera

Popup Menu j. :

Env. ::Qcr?e~a&:

:

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Wi

0 10 Not Used q

11 Not Used q

12 Not Used

I

0 13 Not Used

----I

I q

14 Not Used

I

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-24

Selecting Light Pro be Popup

Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range limits and Output lines (continued)

Your Action

Pick the output line number for the

WARNING RANGE.

Comments

This is the

Output Line Selection popup menu. It shows the output line functions that you assigned to the

Output

Assignment popup menu in Chapter 4, Operating

Environment.

NOTE: This menu shows that only the output lines that you designated in Chapter

4 as “l/Results” are available to this light probe (the one for Camera A). These appear in light type, and all others appear in black type (meaning that you cannot pick them).

Note also that the

No Output box in the

Output Line

Selection popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that no output line is currently assigned to carry

WARNING RANGE signals for this (Camera A) light probe.

If you prepared an Output Line Planning Sheet in Appendix

A, refer to it for the output line assignments for this (Camera

A) light probe.

From the

Output Line Selection popup menu, pick one of the available output lines boxes labeled

“l/Results”.

When you pick the appropriate box, the shaded square will shift to it.

In addition, the output line number appears in the lower box under

WARNING RANGE.

Pick the lower box under

FAULT RANGE

Pick the output line number for the

FAULT RANGE.

From the

Output Line Selection popup menu, pick one of the available output lines boxes labeled

” l/Resu Its”.

When you pick the appropriate box, the shaded square will shift to it.

In addition, the output line number appears in the lower box under

FAULT RANGE.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

Using Object Calibration andlGrid Calibration

5-25

NOTE: Object and grid calibration applies only to gages configured for linear or angular gaging measurements,

Ideally, a ratio of 1 to 1 should exist for a measurement of the same physical distance along the X and Y axis of the screen image. But, because of image resolution, pixel shape, and optical and other distortions, the actual ratio may not be 1 to

1.

Thus, an uncalibrated gage will return different values for the same physical distance along the X and Y axes, and for angles in between. The reason is that the gage “measures” the number of pixels along its length, and a gage of a specific length will encounter a different number of pixels on the X and Y axes.

Object and grid calibration can compensate for these distortions and, at the same time, convert the calibrated measurements into inches or centimeters. The main difference between object and grid calibration is this:

Object calibration uses four reference points - two on each axis - as the basis for its calibration calculation. It is most accurate when the inspected parts appear in the same part of the screen image where the calibration is performed.

Grid calibration uses multiple reference points as the basis for its calibration calculation. It is more accurate than object calibration, and can compensate for distortions in al2 areas of the screen image.

In performing object and grid calibration, the CVIM system measures a calibration object or calibration grid of known dimensions, then calculates a calibration factor on the basis of these measurements. The CVIM system will then apply the calibration factor to all subsequent linear and angular gaging measurements.

The basic steps in object and grid calibration are these:

Object calibration: Position the calibration object in the part of the screen image where your application will be performing the gage measurements.

Grid calibration: Position the calibration grid to fill as much of the screen image as your application needs to perform the gage measurements, then align the grid with the X and Y axes of the screen image.

Position the X and Y axes of the calibration “window” so that they lie properly over the calibration object or grid.

Define the edges where the window’s X and Y axes intersect the calibration object or grid.

Calibrate the CVIM system to the calibration object or grid.

Enter the actual X and Y “edge-to-edge” dimensions.

The following steps show you the details of performing the object and grid calibration functions.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-26

Selecting Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters

Select

the

Object Calibration

popup menu, then select and configure the parameters and functions in that menu.

Your Action

Pick the Object Calibration menu box in the

Camera popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Object Calibration

menu box, the

Object

Calibration

popup menu appears above the

Camera A (or B)

popup menu, as follows:

Pick & Place

Define Edges

Calibrate

World Units

0.0

... . me

Focus Camera

I

Camera Type/Mode 0.0

Lighting/Resolution 0.0

.

Light Probe 0.0

:: t;;l

Grid Calibration me*

Env. ‘.

Object Calibration

Popup Menu

Camera

Popup Menu

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

In addition to the

Object Calibration

popup menu, the calibration window, with X and Y axes centered in it, will appear on the screen, as follows:

-

Calibration

-Window

2

X and Y Axes

-

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-27

Selecting Object Cali bration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

The calibration window and its axes are the screen symbols for the

Object Calibration function. You will use them to measure a “calibration object” of known vertical and horizontal dimensions.

Using the

Focus Camera

Before you continue, pick the

Focus Camera menu box to function, correctly position generate a “live image” on the monitor screen. Position the the calibration object in calibration object in the center of the screen so that it is the screen image. aligned with the screen’s X and Y axes.

Using Pick & Place Function

Select the

Pick

&

Place function, then move the calibration window over the calibration object and set the window to the appropriate size.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Pick

&

Place menu When you pick the

Pick

&

Place menu box, five small box in the

Calibration squares, or “handles” will appear on the X and Y axes, popup menu. as follows:

Handles

The light pen uses these handles to manipulate the calibration window on the screen image.

A im the lightpen at the Move the light pen around slightly as you aim it at the center handle. center handle. At some position of the pen you will see a larger “highlight” square surrounding the handle:

Hold the pen steady in this position -the appearance of the “highlight” square means that the light pen is now properly aimed.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-28

Selecting 0bjec:t Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(con ued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

Press the ligh.t pen against the center handle.

Comments

Press the pen firmly against the center handle, then release it. A small “X” will appear in the center of the window, and the handles will disappear, as follows:

Calibration

-Window

X

-

Calibration

Object __+

This indicates that you can now move, or “drag,” the window toward the calibration object on the monitor screen.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

Selecting Object Calibration

Functions: and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Drag the calibration window over the calibration object.

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Comments

,._....... . . . . . . . ..__...._.._._...__..

Calibration Window

“(Original position)

X

Calibration Window

(New position)

1

5-29

Aim the Zightpen at the rightmost handle.

When you have dragged the window into position, press the light pen tip against the screen to “lock” the window at that position.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameter5

S-30

Selecting Object Cali bration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the handle.

Drag the right side until it is Note that the left side remains anchored. just outside the object.

Ria ht Side Riaht Side

(OrigiGal position) (Nei p bsition)

1

“Lock” the window’s right side in position.

Aim the light pen at the Continue when the highlight square appears.

-- alibration

Object

_

Pick the handle.

-

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

Selecting Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Drag the bottom side until it Note that the top side remains anchored. is just below the object.

Calibration

Object -

Cali bration

Window’

Bottom Side ----b

(Original position)

5-31

Lock the window’s bottom side in position.

Bottom Side

(New position) h

At this point, you have adjusted the window’s position and size so that it just covers the calibration object.

The X and Y axes should look like this:

Note that the X axis is now in a position to detect the left and right edges of the calibration object, and the Y axis is in a position to detect the top and bottom edges.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-32

Selecting Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

If

necessary, use the vernier arrows to “fine-tune” the position

OF size

of

the window.

Comments

You can position the calibration window and its sides more precisely by using the vernier arrows. These arrows enable you to move the window or window sides in small increments.

Press and hold the light pen tip against the window handle, window,

OF side.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a window handle or placing the window or one of its sides.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the monitor screen:

This:

VERNIER ARROWS

or this: or this:

-

-j-,~,~, -

Move left or right side left or right

Move window up, down, left or right

Move top or bottom side up or down

Pick an arrou? once to move the window or window side one pixel in the arrow’s direction.

Pick and hold an arrow to change the window size

OF position-continuously.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

The up, down, right, or left arrow will move the entire window or window side onepixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the window’s size or position will change slowly for the first five or six increments. It will then change at a more rapid rate.

When the window’s size and/or position are correct, pick the

“return” symbol

(+J> to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

Selecting Object Calibration functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the Define Edges menu bon in the

Calibration popup menu.

Defining Edges

Select the

Define Edges menu box, then adjust the threshold/scale cursors until an X appears on each outer edge of the calibration object along the X and Y axes.

Comments

When you pick the

Define Edges menu box, several magenta X’s may appear along the axes, and a slide bar will appear at the right side of the screen, as follows:

5-33

Calibration

Object -

-

I

4

Object Calibration

Popup Menu r

Pick & Place

Calibrate

_ 1 t

World Units

C

Focus Camera r Camera Type/Mode

I

Lighting/Resolution ea.

Left ____+ 1; i.

Cursor II>

Slide

Bar-

S

H

0

L

D

T

H

R

E

/

S

C

A

L

5 me

0.0

I

-popup

Camera

Menu

1

C Env. ’ ” ’ Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window

Pick and move each cursor until the X’s are as shown.

Mist Exit b

-

Pick and move the cursors alternately until you see X’s at the outer edges of the calibration object, as shown above.

Using trial and observation, you should try to find the most stabEe cursor positions; that is, positions that do not alter the

X’s when you move one cursor or the other up or down a small amount.

NOTE: Disregard any X’s on either axis that lie between the edges of the calibration object. The system will ignore them.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-34

Selecting Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Performing Calibrate Function

Perform the

Calibrate function to calibrate the image to the edges on the calibration object.

NOTE: Before performing this function, be certain that the image resolution parameter is correct for your application.

You should have selected that parameter earlier in this chapter in the Selecting Resolution Popup Menu section.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Calibrate menu box When you pick the

Calibrate menu box, the following in the Calibration popup menu. message appears in the message box.

VERIFY EDGES: Select ‘Verify Calibration’ if the displayed edges correctly identify the target. Make any other selection to abort.

Pick the

Verify Cali bration menu box in the

Cali bration popup menu.

Note that the

Calibrate menu box has changed to Verify

Calibration.

If X’s are correctly positioned where the X and Y axes intersect the calibration object’s edges, continue.

When you pick the

Verify Cali bration menu box, the

CVIM system performs the calibration calculation.

-

Your Action

Pick the

World Units menu box in the

Calibration popup menu.

Entering Calibration Object Dimensions

Select the

World Units popup menu, then enter the actual edge-to-edge dimensions for the calibration object along its

X- and Y-axes.

Comments

When you pick the

World Units menu box, a table will appear above the

Calibration popup menu, as follows:

&. :I . . .

-j 86.8353 0.0 1 53.7104 00. 11

You will use this table to enter the X and Y dimensions of the calibration object. The numbers appearing in the table at this time are those that resulted when you performed the

Calibrate function.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

Entering Calibration Object DifrWnsiOns (continued) Selecting Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Comments ‘Your Action

The table has three lines of numbers, which have the following meanings:

- This line shows the value, in pixels, of the calibration window’s measurements along the X and Y axes.

- This is the dimension line. You use it to enter the

X- and Y-axis dimensions of the calibration object along its X and Y axes. At this time, the line shows the same pixel-based values that are in the

Pixels line, above.

NOTE: The word

Inches reflects the “units” selection that you made in Chapter 4, Operating Environment. This word could be Pixels or CM instead of Inches.

- This line displays the number of pixels per unit along the X and Y axes after you enter the calibration object dimensions in the dimension line. The CVIM system calculates this value by dividing the pixel-based value in the

Pixels line. line by the value that you entered in the dimension

Pick the dimension box in the

X-Axis column of the table.

When you pick this box, the calculator pad appears on the screen, as follows:

Object Calibration

Popup Menu r

: ::. :.

:.

.

I

0.0 Pick & Place

1 Define Edges

Calibrate

:j; ; 86.8353 :;

5-35

Calculator

Pad -

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

I

Env.

.,: j :.‘.

1: Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-36

-

Selecting Object Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Entering Calibration Object Dimensions (continued)

Your Action

Pick each digit of the

X-axis dimension of the calibration object.

Pick: the

Enter key.

Comments

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter key, the X-axis dimension in the display will appear in the X-axis dimension box. At the same time, the CVIM system will calculate the pixels-per-unit ratio and display that in the box under the X-axis dimension box.

Pick the dimension box in the

-

Pick each digit of the

Y-axis dimension of the calz.bration object.

Pick the

Enter key.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter key, the Y-axis dimension in the display will appear in the Y-axis dimension box. At the same time, the CVIM system will calculate the pixels-per-unit ratio and display that in the box under the Y-axis dimension box.

-

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

Select the

Grid Calibration popup menu, then select and configure the parameters and functions in that menu.

To use the

Grid Cali bration function, you will need to acquire an accurately crafted grid whose size and grid dimensions are suitable for your application.

As a general guide, the grid should be of a size and shape that enables you to see eight to sixteen squares across the screen image area in which the gage measurements are to be performed. The grid itself should be placed at the same distance from the camera as the parts to be inspected.

Grids can be purchased from scientific or optical equipment suppliers.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters s-37

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Grid Calibration

When you pick the

Grid Cali bration menu box, the

Grid menu box in the

Camera Cali bration popup menu appears above the

Camera A (or B) popup menu. popup menu, as follows:

Pick & Place

~-op.,

0.0

Menu

Calibrate

Focus Camera

Env. ..” ’ Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

In addition to the

Grid Calibration popup menu, the calibration window, with X and Y axes centered in it, will appear on the screen, as follows:

, Calibration

Window

\

X and Y Axes

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-38

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

The calibration window and its axes are the screen symbols for the

Grid Calibration function. You will use them to measure a “calibration grid” of known vertical and horizontal dimensions.

Using the

Focus Camera function, correctly position

Before you continue, pick the

Focus Camera menu box to generate a “live image” on the monitor screen. Position the the caliliration grid in calibration grid in the center of the screen so that it is the screen image. aligned with the screen’s X and Y axes.

Using Pick & Place Function

Select the

Pick

&

Place function, then move the calibration window over the calibration grid and set the window to the appropriate size.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Pick & Place menu When you pick the

Pick & Place menu box, five small bon in the

Calibration squares, or “handles” will appear on the X and Y axes, popup menu. as follows:

-

Handles

The light pen uses these handles to manipulate the calibration window on the screen image.

Aim the light pen at the Move the light pen around slightly as you aim it at the center handle. center handle. At some position of the pen you will see a larger square surrounding the handle, as follows:

Hold the pen steady in this position - the appearance of t$el!lr-ger square means that the light pen is now properly

-

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-39

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

Press the light pen against the squares.

Comments

Press the pen firmly against the squares on the screen, then release it. A small “X” will appear in the center of the window, and the handles will disappear, as follows:

Calibration

-Window

X

Calibrat :ion

Grid

This indicates that you can now move, or “drag,” the window toward the calibration grid on the monitor screen.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-m

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Drag the calibration windolu over the calibration grid.

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Comments

_ . -

__............

Cali bration Window

_ -(Original position)

X l

.

.

. l

.

. .

. .

.

. l

.

.

.

.

.

.

Calibration Window

(New position)

I

-

Calibration

Grid -

Aim the lightpen at the rightmost handle.

When you have dragged the window into position, press the light pen tip against the screen to “lock” the window at that position.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the handle.

Drag the right side until it is Note that the left side remains anchored. just inside thegrid.

Right Side

(Original position)

I

Right Side

(New position)

I

5-4 1

“Lock” the window’s right side in position.

Aim th.e light pen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. bottom handle.

Cal i bration

Grid

Pick the handle.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-42

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

Drag the bottom side until it is just inside the grid.

Comments

Note that the top side remains anchored.

Bottom Side

(Original position)

---I

Bottom Side

(New position) f. I

Lock the win.dow’s bottom side in position.

At this point, you have adjusted the window’s position and size so that it is just inside the calibration grid.

The X and Y axes should look like this:

Note that all of the edges along the X and Y axes will be inside the calibration grid.

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-43

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(con timed)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

If necessary, use the vernier arrows to “fine-tune” the position or size of the window.

Comments

You can position the calibration window and its sides more precisely by using the vernier arrows. These arrows enable you to move the window or window sides in small increments.

-- against the window handle, window, or side.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a window handle or placing the window or one of its sides.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the monitor screen:

This:

VERNIER ARROWS

or this: or this:

Move left or right side left or right

Move window up, down, left or right

Move top or bottom side up or down

Pick an arrow once to move the window or’ window side one pixel in the arrow’s direction.

Pick ana! hold an arrow to change thxndow size or position continuously.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

The up, down, right, or left arrow will move the entire window or window side one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the window’s size or position will change slowly for the first five or six increments. It will then change at a more rapid rate.

When the window’s size and/or position are correct, pick the

“return” symbol (~1) to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-44

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(con tinoed)

Defining Edges

Select the

Define Edges menu box, then adjust the threshold/scale adjustment cursors until an X appears on each side of each black line and on each outer edge of the calibration grid along the X and Y axes.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Define Edges menu When you pick the

Define Edges menu box, numerous box in the

Calibration

X’s may appear along the axes, and a slide bar popup menu. will appear at the right side of the screen, as follows:

Calibrati

Grid on

Pick & Place

I

Grid Dimensions

Grid Calibration

0.0 I

-Popup Menu

I Camera Type/Mode

0.0

Calibration

-Window

Left

Curs07

Slide

Bar, b

-

-

4

T

H

0

L

D

R

E

5

H

L

/

E

/

S

C

A

:

I :’

-

-

Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

-

-

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

5-45

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Defining Edges

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick and move each cursor

Pick and move the cursors alternately until you see an X on until the .X’s are as shown. both sides of each square along the X and Y axes, as shown in the preceeding figure and in the following magnified view of the center section of the calibration grid:

X-Axis X-Axis

White Black

Y-Axis

“i

-&---

/Black

Y-Axis t

++ Y-Axis

White c

X-Axis

-

Calibration

Grid

Using trial and observation, try to find the most stable cursor positions; that is, positions that do not alter the X’s when you move one cursor or the other up or down a small amount.

5-46

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Calibration

Your Action

Chapter 5 Camera and lighting Parameters

Pick the Grid Dimensions popup menu.

Entering Calibration Grid Dimensions

Select the

Grid Dimensions popup menu, then enter the actual edge-to-edge dimensions of the white and black areas that the X and Y axes cross.

NOTE: Grid dimensions are supplied with the grid.

Comments

When you pick the

Grid Dimensions menu box, the

Grid

Dimensions popup menu will appear alongside the

Grid

Cali bration popup menu, as follows:

Grid Calibration

Popup Menu

Y-White:

1 X-Black:

Y-Black:

1.000 0.0

0.500 0.0 1

0.500 0.0 t

Grid Dimensions

Popup Menu

Calibrate

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Lighting/Resolution

Light Probe

Object Calibration

0.0

4p

0.0

0.0

Camera

Popup Menu

-

Env. :ta&j%:AAi:‘. Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

You will use the

Grid Dimensions popup menu to enter the edge-to-edge dimensions of the white and black areas along each axis. The numbers appearing in the menu at this time are either the default values or are those that were entered previously.

The

Grid Dimensions popup menu has four boxes, which have the following meanings: l

X-White

- This box shows the current value, in “world” units, of the dimension across each ulhite area of the calibration grid along the X axis. l

Y-White

-This box shows the current value, in “world” units, of the dimension across each ulhite area of the calibration grid along the Y axis.

-

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-47

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(con timed)

Entering Calibration Grid Dimensions (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

X-White box in the

Grid Diimensions menu.

Comments

X-Black

- This box shows the current value, in “world” units, of the dimension across each black area of the calibration grid along the X axis.

Y-Black

- This box shows the current value, in “world” units, of the dimension across each black area of the calibration grid along the Y axis.

When you pick the

X-White box, the calculator pad appears alongside the

Grid Dimensions popup menu, as follows:

-

Grid Cali bration

Popuy Menu

Pick & Place 0.0

1 Y-White:

1 X-Black:

1.000 .*e I

0.500 0.0 1

+

Calibrate

Focus Camera

Camera Type/Mode

Lighting/Resolution

Light Probe

Object Calibration

Calculator

Pad - me* de Camera a.0 Popup Menu

En”, ‘;fg&;$A

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Pick each digit ofthe

X-White dimension ofthe calibrationgrid.

Enter the actual dimension of the white area in the calibration grid along the X axis, as shown in the preceeding magnified view of the grid. As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator” display.”

Pick the

Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the

X-White dimension in the display will appear in the

X-White dimension box.

Repeat the last two steps for the

Y-White, X-Black, and

Y-Black grid dimensions.

Enter each of the other three grid dimensions.

Chapter 5 Camera

5-48

Selecting Grid Calibration

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Performing Calibrate function

Perform the

Calibrate function to calibrate the image to the edges on the calibration grid.

NOTE: Before performing this function, be certain that the image resolution parameter is correct for your application.

You should have selected that parameter earlier in this chapter in the Selecting Resolution Popup Menu section.

Your Action Comments

Pick. the Calibrate menu box When you pick the

Calibrate menu box, a series of small in the

Cali bration popup menu. squares will appear in the upper-left corner of each grid square, as follows:

Control Points

-

-

These are called “control points,” and they indicate whether the CVIM system “found” grid square corners everywhere that it expected to find them.

NOTE: Along each axis, the system will display control points according to the following conditions:

A control point in every square if the axis crosses fewer than eight grid squares.

A control point in every other square if the axis crosses more than eight grid squares.

A control point in every third square if the axis crosses more than sixteen grid squares.

Chapter 5 Camera and Lighting Parameters

5-49

Selecting Grid Cali bration

Functions and Parameters

(con timed)

Your Action

Performing Calibrate Function (continued)

Comments

If the system fails to find a grid square corner, it will stop displaying the control points, and the following message will appear in the message box:

ERROR: A grid square was not found where one was expected.

If this occurs, check the grid carefully for defective squares.

If the system finds all control points, the following message will appear in the message box:

VERIFY CONTROL POINTS: Select ‘Verify

Calibration’ if the control points are correct.

Make any other selection to abort.

Note that the

Calibrate menu box has changed to

Verify

Calibration.

If X’s are correctly positioned where the X and Y axes intersect the calibration object’s edges, continue.

Pick the

Verify Cali bration

When you pick the

Verify Calibration menu box, the menu box in the

Grid

CVIM system performs the calibration calculation.

Cali bration menu.

At this point, the CVIM system is configured to perform measurements in “world” units.

-

Chapter

6

Reference Took: fines and Windows

Chapter Objectives

The objectives of this chapter are first to show you how reference tools can be used, and then show you the procedure for configuring them. The chapter begins with a series of questions and answers about reference tools.

A Few Questions and

Answers

About

Reference

Too/r

This section introduces you to reference tools by asking a few questions that might occur to you, and then answering those questions.

What is a reference tool?

A reference tool is a pre-inspection tool that examines the position of each workpiece and determines whether it is shifted relative to the position of the “original” workpiece. If so, the CVIM system can calculate the amount of shift and apply shift compensation to other tools.

What kinds of reference tools are there?

The CVIM system provides two types of reference tools: lines and windows.

How do these tools work?

A reference line searches along its length for specific edges on a workpiece. It can search horizontally (X-axis), vertically

(Y-axis), or both.

A reference window searches within its boundary for a specific feature on a workpiece.

How many reference lines and windows are there?

The CVIM system provides three sets of reference lines for each of its two tool sets. Each set contains one, two, or three lines, according to the specific function.

The CVIM system provides three sets of reference windows for each of its two tool sets. Each set contains three feature/search window pairs.

What functions does a reference tool perform?

A reference tool’s main functions are to:

Locate an edge or feature on each new workpiece entering the camera’s field of view during an inspection cycle.

Check for shift and/or rotation in the position of each new workpiece relative to the position of the original workpiece.

Use the recorded shift and/or rotation information to shift the position of all associated analysis tools so that they retain correct alignment with the shifted workpiece.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and

Windows

6-2

A few Questions and

Answers About

Reference Tools

(continued)

When might a reference tool be necessary?

A reference tool might be needed if, during a normal series of inspections, successive workpieces are not likely to be in exactly the same position from inspection to inspection, but are expected to vary in position (but always within. the camera’s field of view)

What kinds of shift compensation reference tools detect? information can

Each set of reference lines can detect workpiece shift along the X and/or Y axes and rotation up to & 60 degrees.

Each set of reference windows can detect workpiece shift along the X and Y axes and rotation up to + 15 degrees.

What is the relationship of a reference tool to an inspection tool?

A reference tool exists mainly to supply shift and/or rotation compensation to one or more inspection tools. You can configure any inspection tool to receive shift and/or rotation information from any reference tool.

How does the CVIM s stem make use of shift and/or rotation information r rom a reference tool?

The CVIM system uses shift and/or rotation information from a particular reference tool to adjust the positions of all inspection tools associated with that reference tool.

Reference Lines

This section provides you with the details of using and configuring reference lines.

Under the Using Reference Lines heading, you will see a simple example application in which a reference line provides shift compensation for a linear gage configured to measure the level of liquid in a bottle.

Under the Configuring Reference Lines heading, you will use the CVIM “user interface” -the light pen, popup menus, and graphic symbols on the video monitor screen - to configure a reference line.

Using Reference Lines

The following pages describe how you can use reference lines to detect and measure workpiece shift and offset the inspection tools by the amount of the shift. This process is called “shift compensation,” and its advantage is that workpieces need not be rigidly fixtured for inspection.

Reference lines can compensate for workpiece shift along the horizontal axis only, or the vertical axis only, or along both axes at the same time.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-3

Using (Reference lines

In the following example of using a reference line, these are

(continued) the assumptions:

The workpiece is a clear glass bottle filled with an opaque liquid, such as hand lotion.

The CVIM system will use a linear gage to measure the level of the liquid. a The position of each bottle being inspected will vary horizontally from the “original,” but not uertically. a The CVIM system will use a horizontal reference line to provide shift compensation to the linear gage.

The overall objective in this example is for the CVIM system to inspect every bottle for proper fill level and to reject all bottles that are not properly filled.

The functions of the reference line in this example are these: a Find the bottle within a preset range along the X-axis.

(NOTE: The “preset range” is determined by the position and length of the reference line.) a Check each inspected bottle to determine whether it is shifted from the position of the “original” bottle. a If an inspected bottle is shifted, shift the linear gage by the same amount, and in the same direction, as the bottle.

Figure 6.1 shows how an image of a properly filled bottle might look on your monitor screen. Since both the liquid and the bottle cap are opaque, they should appear black when lighted from behind. Under the same backlighting conditions, the semi-transparent neck (above the liquid) should appear as a light shade of gray.

Figure 6.1 also shows a horizontal reference line positioned on the bottle, (During configuration, you would have moved the line to this position.) If you consider this bottle to be in the “original” position, the X marks the “original” location of the bottle’s edge on the reference line.

As the CVIM system inspects a series of bottles, the reference line will find the edge on any bottle as long as that edge lies somewhere along the reference line. (During configuration, you would have set the reference line’s length equal to the maximum allowable shift in the bottle’s position.)

If a particular bottle is shifted, but its edge lies someulhere on the reference line, the reference line will find the edge. If, however, the bottle has shifted so much that its edge lies beyond either end of the reference line, an inspection failure will occur since the reference line will root find the bottle’s edge.

6-4

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Using Reference Lines

(continued)

Figure 6.1 Reference Line Positioned Across Bottle

“X’ Indicates “Original”

Edge Location

Head

-. r’: .a

\

4

/

Reference Line

Tail d- Bottle in its

“Original” position

-

If the CVIM system did not have some way to compensate for the bottle’s horizontal shift, an inspection could fail because the gage may not coincide with the bottle’s neck.

To summarize the factors in the bottle inspection example:

A horizontal reference line will be configured to find the bottle.

A linear gage will be configured to measure the liquid level in the bottle.

The bottles in any series of inspections will be shifting horizontally.

These horizontal shifts will always occur within the length of the reference line.

All bottles will be in the same position uertica2Zy.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-5

Using Reference fines

(continued)

Figure 6.2 shows how a linear gage might appear when positioned vertically over the bottle’s neck. The gage length need only be sufficient to extend below the lowest acceptable liquid level. At that length, the gage would also be able to detect the highest acceptable level.

One way to measure the liquid level is to have the gage measure the distance from the top of the cap to the liquid surface. You could set an upper and lower limit for the level, and have CVIM reject any bottle whose level is above or below those limits.

Figure 6.2 Linear Gage Positioned Vertically Over Bottle

Linear Gage

‘X’ Indicates Location of Edge That Linear

Gage Finds at of Liquid

I m-face of

Liquid

Figure 6.3 compares the position of the “original” bottle (the one you used to configure the reference line) to the position of a shifted bottle (one that appears during an inspection). The

X’s show the respective edge positions along the reference line.

6-6

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Using Reference Lines

(continued)

Figure 6.3 Edge Locations on Shifted Bottle and Original Bottle

Head

Refe

;-

Position of

Original Bottle

Position of

Shifted Bottle

At the start of each inspection, the reference line searches along its length for the bottle’s edge. It starts the search at its head (the circle) and proceeds rightward toward its tail until it detects the edge of the bottle. It expects to find that edge somewhere along its length.

When the reference line finds the shifted bottle’s edge, the position of that edge is compared with the position of the same edge on the “original” bottle. The difference between the two edge positions is the amount of horizontal shift compensation applied to the linear gage.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-7

Using Reference Lines

For instance, assume that the reference edge of the original

(continued) bottle was at X-axis pixel location 120 along the reference line, and the linear gage was at X-axis location 150. Assume also that the reference line found the edge of the shifted bottle at pixel location 105, which is 15 pixels to the left of the original edge (pixel numbers increase, left-to-right).

The CVIM system compensates for the shifted bottle by shifting the linear gage 15 pixels to the left, thus repositioning the gage over the bottle’s neck. Figure 6.4 shows this. The system then proceeds with the linear gage measurement on the liquid level of the shifted bottle.

Look again at Figure 6.4. Notice that without shift compensation, the linear gage would be to the right of the bottle’s neck. In this particular case, the gage would probably indicate (falsely) a too-low liquid level.

Figure 6.4 Linear Gage After Shift Compensation

Shift-Compensated

Position of Linear

Position of

Shifted Bottle

6-8

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Using Reference Lines

The purpose of the bottle inspection example was to give you

(continued) simple demonstration of using a reference line.

In actual applications, three sets of reference lines are available. Within each set, you can use the horizontal and vertical lines either in pairs or singly. Each set can provide shift compensation for inspection gages and/or windows.

In addition, the reference lines can provide shift and/or rotation compensation for other reference tools, with the following restrictions: l

A reference line cannot, provide shift and/or rotation compensation to a Zourer numbered reference line. Thus, reference line #2 cannot be a reference tool for reference line

#l. l

A reference urindoul cannot provide shift or rotation compensation to a reference line.

-,

Configuring Reference Lines

To configure the reference lines, you will pick the

Ref. Line menu box in the Main Configuration menu then select the parameters and perform the functions in the

Ref. Line popup menu.

These are%he main function and configuration categories in the

Ref. Line popup menu: l

Reference line definition: Sets the reference line position and length. Selects the line type, the line to be configured, and binary or gray scale mode. Defines the edges.

Reference line features: Selects the specific edge to be used for the X and/or Y line.

Select output lines and reference tool: Selects the output line for reporting inspection “results,” and selects reference tool from which to receive shift compensation.

Learn edge references: This function “learns” the pixel location of the edge on the X and/or Y reference line.

Select reference line set: This function selects the reference line set (1,2, or 3) to be configured.

Enable/disable reference line set: This function enables or disables the currently selected reference line set.

Configuring a set of reference lines involve these basic steps:

Positioning and sizing the reference line(s) over the workpiece.

Selecting either a binary or gray scale image in which to search for the edge.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Selecting Ref.Line Popup

Your first step is to select the

Ref. Line popup menu.

Menu

Your Action Comments

Pick Ref.Line in the Main When you pick the

Ref.Line menu box, the

Ref. Line popup

Configuration menu. menu appears above the Main Configuration menu, as follows:

6-9

&WLiin; 1: [;:x”,‘d 1

Env. Camera A R$ Link Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

The

Ref. Line popup menu shows the six configuration categories described earlier.

In addition to the

Ref. Li ne popup menu, if the currently selected reference line is enabled, as shown above, that line will also appear somewhere on the monitor screen.

Selecting and Enabling

Select a reference line number and enable the reference

Reference Line line.

Your Action

Look at the

Ref.Line menu box in the

Ref.Linepopup menu.

Comments

The

Ref.Line menu box indicates the currently selected reference line number (1,2, or 31, and indicates the reference line status:

Enabled or

Disabled.

Select the reference line To change the reference line number, pick the

Next

(or number.

Previous) menu box repeatedly until the correct number appears.

Look at the

Ref.Line menu box again.

The

Next and

Previous functions work like this: When you pick the

Next box, the next higher reference line number appears: 1,2,3,. . . 1,2,3, and so on. When you pick the

Previous box, the next lower reference line number appears:

3,2,1,.

. . 3,2,1, and so on.

If the status is

Disabled, perform the next step.

Pick the

Ref.Line menu box. To enable the reference line, pick the

Ref.Line menu box.The status should now indicate

Ena bled.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools. Lines and Windows

6-10

Selecting Define Ref.Line Select the

Define Ref .Line popup menus, then select the

Popup Menus and parameters in those menus.

Parameters

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Define Ref.Line

When you pick the

Define Ref.Line menu box, the two menu box in the

Ref.Line popup

Define Ref. Line popup menus appear above the

Ref.Line menu. popup menu, as follows:

1 Define Edges 0.0 1

, Popup Menus

1 Output/Reference 0.0 1

Env. Camera A i’Fjf.:Fiti$. Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Selecting Ref.Line Type Popup Menu

Select the

Ref.Line Type menu box, then select one of the six reference line types, as follows:

1. X-axis line only.

2. Y-axis line only.

3. X- and Y-axis lines with the X-axis line evaluated first.

4. X- and Y-axis lines with the Y-axis line evaluated first.

5. Two X-axis lines and one Y-axis line with the X-axis lines evaluated first.

6. Two Y-axis lines and one X-axis line with the Y-axis lines evaluated first.

The “X” and “Y” refer to the physical orientation of the reference line(s) on the monitor screen: horizontal (X-axis), vertical (Y-axis), or both.

Your choice of “type” depends on the expected workpiece shift and/or rotation in your CVIM application.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-l 1

Selectingl Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Ref.Line Type Popup Menu (continued)

The questions you need to answer about workpiece position during an inspection is this: Do you expect the workpieces to be shift from the “original” position? If so, will they shift up or down (Y axis), left or right (X axis), or in both directions?

Will they rotate?

A general guide for choosing the appropriate reference line type is as follows:

X

Only provides a horizontal reference line. Select the

X Only reference line type if a workpiece is likely to shift horizontally, but not vertically.

Y

Only provides a vertical reference line. Select the

Y

Only reference line type if a workpiece is likely to shift vertically, but not horizontally.

X Then Y provides both a horizontal and a vertical reference line. The CVIM system checks the X-axis line first and applies shift compensation to the Y-axis line:

Reference Line Type: X Then Y:

1. If the workpiece shifts along the

XandY axes.. .

2.. . the X-axis

3.. . the Y-axis reference line is shifted by the amount 1 of the X-axis shift . . .

Select the

X Then Y reference line type if the workpiece is likely to shift both horizontally and vertically, but is expected to shift more along the X axis.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-12

Selecting Define Ref.Line Selecting Ref.Line Type Popup Menu (continued)

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued) 0 Y Then X provides both a horizontal and a vertical reference line. The CVIM system checks the Y-axis line first and applies shift compensation to the X-axis line:

Reference Line Type: Y Then X:

2. . . the Y-axis reference line is evaluated for shift. . .

1. If the workpiece shifts along the Y and X axes.. .

3. . . the )(-axis reference line is shifted by the amount of the Y-axis shift. . .

4 . . . then the X-axis reference line is evaluated for shift. . .

1. If the workpiece

2.

. . the X-axes are evaluated for both rotation and shift.. .

Y and X shift is applied to the line gage.

Select the

Y Then

X reference line type if the workpiece is likely to shift both horizontally and vertically, but is expected to shift more along the Y axis.

X-X Then Y provides two horizontal lines and one vertical line. In this case, the CVIM system checks the two X-axis lines first and applies shift compensation to the Y-axis line.

Reference Line Type: X-X Then Y: i

:I

:I

: 4

“‘--‘<“~

:\ p-&i&q

(orIgInal posItIon)

‘5. _ . and the combined

3. . . the Y-axis reference line is shifted by the amount of the X-axis shift. . .

4. . . then the Y-axis is

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-13

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Ref.Line Type Popup Menu (continued)

The

X-X Then Y reference line type also uses the difference in the amount of shift along the two X axes to calculate the number of degrees that an inspected workpiece has rotated from the position of the “original” workpiece.

Y-Y Then X provides one horizontal line and two vertical lines. The CVIM system checks the two Y-axis lines first and applies shift compensation to the

X-axis line.

1 Reference Line Type: Y-Y Then X: 1

5.. _ and the combined shift and rotation is applied to the line gage.

1. If the workpiece rotates. _

.d

2.

. . the Y-axis reference lines are evaluated for both rotation and shift _ . evaluated for shift. . .

‘unt

. .

The

Y-Y Then X reference line type also uses the difference the amount of shift along the two Y axes to calculate the number of degrees that an inspected workpiece has rotated from the position of the “original” workpiece. in

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Type menu box The

Type menu box indicates the currently selected in. the

Define Ref.Line popup reference line type. If it is not the type you want, continue menu. with the next steps.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-14

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Ref.Line Type Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Type menu box. When you pick the

Type menu box, the

Ref.Line Type popup menu should appear, as follows:

-

Mode: Binary

0 XthenY

0 YthenX

0 X-X thenY

0 Y-Y thenX t

Ref. Line Type

Popup Menu

Env.

I

Camera A

I

” ’ Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

X Only box in the

Ref.Line Type popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that X

Only is the currently selected reference line type.

Pick the appropriate “type” box in the

Ref.Line Type

When you pick the box, the new selection will be highlighted in the

Ref.Line Type popup menu and will appear in the popup menu.

Type menu box. In addition, the new reference line symbol will appear on the screen.

Selecting Active Reference Line

If you selected X

Only or Y

Only as the reference line type, skip this function. If, however, you selected one of the other types, continue with the next steps, and select the axis that you want to configure at this time.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Active Ref

The

Active Ref menu box indicates which axis is currently menu box in the

Define

Features popup menu.

“active” for configuration purposes.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-15

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Active Ref menu box, if appropriate.

Selecting Active Reference Line (continued)

Comments

When you pick the

Active Ref box, it will either toggle between

X-Axis and

Y-Axis or change from

X-Axis to Y-Axis to

X/Y-Axis, according to the type that you selected.

Select the axis that you want to configure at this time.

Selecting Binary or Gray Scale Mode

Select the appropriate mode for each reference line.

NOTE: The mode that you select will apply to X-axis and

Y-axis reference lines.

The

Binary mode changes pixels in the screen image to two states, white and black. The only pixels changed are those that directly surround the reference line in a box called the

“area of interest.” The CVIM system examines only these pixels when processing a reference line

The binary mode is most appropriate when the workpiece has a sharp black-and-white contrast with its background, such as when it is backlighted.

The Gray Scale mode does not affect the pixels surrounding the reference line - they remain in their ori inal state, in which they can have any one of 64 shades o B gray.

The gray scale mode is most appropriate when the workpiece has less contrast with its background, such as when it is frontlighted. In this case, features on the workpiece may appear in the screen image as varying shades of gray, and the binary mode may not enable you to identify a stable edge location on these features.

Use the following steps to select the

Binary or

Gray Scale mode.

Your Action

Look at the

Mode menu box in the

Define Ref.Line popup menu.

Pick the

Mode menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Mode menu box indicates the currently selected mode:

Binary, or

Gray Scale.

When you pick the to the other vice versa.

Mode mode. Thus, menu box, the mode will toggle

Binary will change to

Gray Scale, or

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-76

Selecting Define Ref.Line Using Pick & Place Function

Popup Menus and

Parameters

(continued)

Pick the

Pick

&

Place menu box, then position the reference line over the workpiece and set the line’s length.

The following procedure shows you how to use the light pen to adjust the position and length of a reference line. The procedure refers speclfzcaZZy to an X-axis line, as shown below, but you can also apply it to a Y-axis line.

Your Action Comments

Pi& the Pick

&

Place menu. When you pick the

Pick

&

Place menu box, a small square (Cl) box in the

Define Ref.Line will appear in the center, and at each end, of the currently popup menu. selected reference line, as follows:

These squares are the “handles” that the light pen uses to manipulate the reference line on the screen.

Aim the light pen at the Aim the light pen at the center handle until the light pen center handle. “sees” the handle. You may have to move the light pen around slightly.

When the light pen sees the handle, a larger “highlight” square will surround the handle, as follows:

Hold the pen steady in this position

- the appearance of the “highlight” square means that the light pen is now properly aimed.

Pick the handle. You can now “drag” the reference line around on the screen.

When you move the pen, the line follows.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-17

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Drag the rekrence line to the Note that the right end of the reference line is at the position shown. rightmost shift limit. This is the point beyond which one or more inspection tools used in your application cannot accurately inspect a workpiece - for example, the tool may be shifted out of the screen image.

Note: Keep the tip of the pen within about one-half inch of the screen.

When you have the reference line in position over the workpiece, press the pen against the screen to “lock” the line at that position.

Aim the light pen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. j!eftmost handle.

Chapter 6 Reference Took: Lines and Windows

6-18

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters

(continued)

Using Pick 81 Place Function (continued)

Comments Your Action

Pick the handle.

Drag the left end of the reference line so that it is at the leftmost shift limit.

Leftmost Shift Limit for Workpiece

., ,i ;:..::.:

.: i j:. ::::i

Reference Edqe . :. :: m::-L;-.) of Workpiece

Lock the left end in the position shown.

If necessary, use the vernier arrows to “fine-tune” the position of the line or line end.

You can position the line or line end more precisely by using the vernier arrows. These arrows enable you to move the line or line end in increments of one pixel.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a line handle or placing a line or line end.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

Press and hold the light pen tip againstThe line handle,

/line, or line end.

Comments

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the screen:

VERNIER ARROWS

6-19

+@fj--l#

Move line end left or right

(X-axis line)

Move line end up or down

(Y-axis line)

Move line up, down, left, or right

Pick an arrow once to moue the line or line end one pixel in the arrow’s direction.

-- move the line or line end continuous1.y.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

Pick the up, down, right, or left arrow, as appropriate, to move the line or line end one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the line or line end will move slowly for the first five or six pixels. It will then accelerate to a more rapid rate of movement.

When the line or line end is properly positioned, pick the

“return” symbol

(+J>

to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

The reference line should now be positioned over the workpiece so that during inspection operations it can detect the reference edge of a shifted workpiece lying within its length.

In this case, the CVIM system will supply shift compensation to any associated inspection tools.

If any workpiece shifts outside the leftmost or rightmost limits of the reference line, the CVIM system will indicate a reference tool fault and will not supply shift compensation to any associated inspection tools. Those tools will not perform their inspections. They will indicate a fault condition.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools. fines and Windows

6-20

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Mode

Pick the

Define Edges menu box, then perform the threshold adjustments in order to determine the reference edge that the reference line will be using to locate the workpiece.

If you have selected the

Gray Scale mode, skip the next steps and go directly to the section called Using Define Edges

Function: Gray Scale Mode.

Use the following steps for setting the threshold if you selected the

Binary mode.

Your Action

Pick the

Define Edges menu box in the

Define Ref.Line popup menu.

Comments

If you have selected the

Binary gaging mode, when you pick the

Define Edges menu box, the

Filter popup menu and slide bar appear on the monitor screen, as follows:

-

Reference Line

-

4

Env.

H

I

Slide

Bar’

E

5

H

0

L

D

T

H

R

Filter

Popup Menu

,

L

5

0 2 Pixels

[7 3 Pixels

I

I

Right/

Cursor b

-

Camera A :‘$&~:&~~ Ref. Win Gage Window

::, .:. : ::

Mist

Exit

Also on the monitor screen, a small “X” may appear along the reference line wherever it “sees” an edge. As shown above, the reference line sees true edges on the circular workpiece.

If no X’s appear, or if too many X’s appear, you will need to adjust the threshold cursors and possibly set some value of white or black pixel filtering.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-21

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Mode (continued)

Your Action

Look at the threshold

CUFSOFS on each side of the slide bar.

Pick leftcursor.

Comments

The cursors on each side of the slide bar are the principal means by which you will define “edges” (that is, transitions) that occur along the reference line. The reference line lies entirely within a box called the “area of interest.” This box contains the binarized image. All parts of the image outside the box remain in gray scale form.

The cursors’ positions along the slide bar represent image brightness values from 1 to 63, with 63 at the top and 1 at the bottom.

Think of the left cursor this way: Any part of the binary image area havin than the value in f a higher brightness value (that is, lighter) icated by the cursor’s current setting will appear black in the binary image. For example, if the cursor is set to a brightness value of 45, then all parts of the binary image having brightness values higher than 45 will appear black.

Think of the right cursor this way: Any part of the binary image area having a lower brightness value (that is, darker) than the value indicated by the cursor’s current setting will appear black in the binary image. For example, if the cursor is set to a brightness value of 27, then all parts of the binary image having brightness values lower than 27 will appear black.

Thus, all parts of the binary image having a brightness value between the current settings of the two cursors will appear white, In the examples above, all parts of the binary image having brightness values from 27 to 45 will appear white; all other parts will appear bEack.

Aim the light pen at the cursor. When you see a red box around the cursor, pick the cursor. This causes the cursor to turn yellow, indicating that you can now “drag” the cursor up or down.

This initializes the left cursor to the “63” brightness value. Drag thee left cursor to its itOpmOSt position.

Pick and drag the right

CUFSOF to its bottommost position.

Pick the left cursor again and drag it downward.

This initializes the right cursor to the “1” brightness value.

Drag the cursor downward until those parts of the binary image that you want to be white start to turn black. Then, drag the cursor up slightly until those same areas just change to white again.

As you drag the cursor up and down, an X will appear along the reference line wherever an edge (binary transition) is detected.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-22

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popop Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Mode (continued)

Your Action

Pick the right cursor again and drag it upward.

Alternately pick and drag each cursor until a stable X appears at the reference edge.

Look at the

Filter menu.

Pick the

White or

Black menu box in the

Filter

DODUD

Comments

Drag the cursor upward until those parts of the binary image that you want to be black just turn black.

As you drag the cursor up and down, an X will appear along the reference line wherever an edge (binary transition) is detected.

Your objective is to produce a stable X at the reference edge, which is the edge that the reference line must “see” in your application. Other X’s may also appear along the reference line; however, you can configure the system to recognize only the X at the reference edge.

Try various positions of the two cursors to produce the most stable X at the desired edge reference.

Trial and observation is the correct procedure for setting the binary threshold.

If white or black “noise” in the image prevents you from getting a single, stable X at the desired reference edge, try using white or black filtering.

In the

Filter menu, the filled-in square (0) shows the currently selected filter level. This determines the number of consecutive black or white “noise” pixels that will be removed (filtered) before the reference line looks for the reference edge.

Black or

White determines which color of pixel should be considered “noise.”

The filter, in effect, masks out the “noise” pixels so that they don’t create false edges.

For example, if the filter menu is set to

White and 3

Pixels, and the reference line encounters three (or fewer) consecutive white pixels in a stream of black pixels, these white pixels are removed (filtered out), and no edge is detected.

If, on the other hand, the reference line encounters four (or more) consecutive white pixels, an edge is detected (actually, two edges will be detected - a leading edge and a trailing edge - if the reference line crosses through the string of white pixels).

Your objective is to set the filter to a level that removes enough visual “noise” from the binary image to prevent the reference line from detecting false edges.

This menu box “toggles”between

White and

Black when you pick it repeatedly. Select

White to filter out small white noise. or select

Black to filter out small black noise.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-23

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Mode (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate filter value from the

Filter mew.

Comments

If your application does not need filtering, pick 0

Pixels.

Otherwise, try various values of filtering to get the cleanest binary image and a single, stable X at the reference edge.

As is the case in setting the binary threshold, trial and observation is appropriate here. You may want to try several filter settings to see which one is best for your particular application.

Using Define Edges Functions Gray Scale Mode

Use the following steps for setting the threshold/scale if you selected the

Gray Scale mode.

Pick the

Define Edges menu box in the

Define Ref.Line

If you have selected the Gray Scale mode, when you pick the

Def i n e Edges menu box, the slide bar appears on the popup menu. monitor screen, as follows:

#Workpiece

I

I

Reference Line

Output/Reference

I

Learn: X.Ref=O

Y.Ref = n/a

0.0

I

I I

Camera A /&$fi<Lfne. Ref. Win Gage Window

: .: :

-

4

Mist

Left ___,:

Cursor

Slide

Bar’

Right/

Cursor

D

.

D

I

5

C

5

H

0

L

A

L

T

H

R

E

c’

/

E

-

Exit

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

6-24

Selecting Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameter5 (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Gray Scale Mode (continued)

Your Action

Look at the cursors on each side of the slide bar.

Pick the &cursor.

Drag the left cursor to its bottommost position.

Pick and drag the right cursor to its bottommost position.

Pick the right cursor again and drag it upward.

Comments

Also on the monitor screen, a small “X” will appear along the reference line wherever it “sees” an edge. As shown above, the reference line sees four edges on the circular workpiece.

If no X’s appear, or if too many X’s appear, you will need to adjust the threshold/scale cursors.

The cursors on each side of the slide bar are the principal means by which you will define the gray scale image in which the “edges” (that is, the transitions) occur along the reference line.

The left cursor represents the current setting of the “gradient threshold.” This setting determines the minimum change in brightness value that must occur, within the number ofpixe2s indicated by the scale factor, before the CVIM system can

“detect” an edge.

When the left cursor is at its lowest position, it selects a gradient threshold value of 0.00. This indicates that any change in brightness value will cause the system to detect an edge. When the cursor is at its highest position, it selects a gradient threshold value of 63.00. This indicates that the system will detect an edge only when the change in brightness value is 63.

The right cursor represents the current setting of the “scale factor.“This setting determines the number of consecutive pixels that the CVIM system examines to determine whether or not an edge (transition) exists. Note that the larger values of scale factor increase processing time.

When the right cursor is at its lowest position, it selects the smallest scale factor (2); and when the cursor is at its highest position, it selects the largest scale factor (41).

Aim the light pen at the cursor. When you see a red box around the cursor, pick the cursor. This causes the cursor to turn yellow, indicating that you can now “drag” the cursor up and down.

This initializes the left cursor to the “0.00” gradient threshold.

This initializes the right cursor to the “2” scale factor.

At this point, many X’s (“edges”) may appear along the reference line.

Drag the cursor upward until the X’s at the desired edges are in good, stable locations. Many edges may still be present along the reference line.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-25

Se/e&y Define Ref.Line

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Gray Scale Mode (continued)

Pick the

Your Action left cursor again and drag it upward.

AIternat(ely pick and drag each cursor until a stable X appears at the reference edge.

Comments

Drag the cursor up ward until you remove as many of the unwanted X’s as possible without losing the X at the reference edge of your workpiece.

Your objective is to produce a stable X at the reference edge, which is the edge that the reference line must “see” in your application. Other X’s may persist along the reference line - you may not be able to get rid of all extraneous X’s. You can, however, configure the system to recognize only the X at the reference edge.

Try various positions of the two cursors to produce the most stable X at the desired edge reference.

Trial and observation is the correct procedure for setting the gray scale threshold.

-

-

Selecting Define Featu res

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the

Define Features popup menu, then select the parameters in that menu. Basically, these parameters specify the edge (or midpoint) that the X and/or Y axis of the reference line will search for and the direction of search.

Your Action

Pick the

Define Features menu box in the

Ref. Line popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Define Features menu box, the

Define

Features popup menu appears above the

Ref. Line popup menu, as follows:

1 Offset:

1

Define Features

Popup Menu

Active Feature: A

Define Ref.Line 0.0

‘Qefine Featirres $ y’

Output/Reference ..a

Learn: X.Ref = 0

Y.Ref = n/a

/

,E;lzed 1

+--. Ref. Line

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A R;ef+&e Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-26

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menus and

A will appear somewhere on the X-axis line,

B will appear

Parameters (continued)

Notice also the letter A,

B,

or C on the reference line(s). somewhere on the Y-axis line, and C will appear somewhere on the “X-X” or “Y-Y” axis.

NOTE: Reference lines have only one feature.

The letters A ,

B,

and C indicate the current location of the reference edge on the corresponding axis. The following steps provide the means for selecting the reference edge location(s) on each axis that are appropriate for your application.

-

Selecting Active Feature

If you selected X

Only or Y

Only as the reference line type, skip this function. If, however, you selected X

Then Y, Y Then

X, X-XThen Y, or

Y-Y Then X, continue with the next steps and select the axis that is to be configured at this time.

Your Action

Pick the

Active Feature menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

Look at the

Active Feature menu box in the

Define

The

Active Feature menu box indicates the “feature”

(that is, A, B, or C) that is currently “active” for

Featurespopup menu. configuration purposes. Thus, A means the X-axis line is active,

B

means the Y-axis line is active, and C means the

X-X or Y-Y axis is active.

When you pick the

Active Feature box, the “active feature” will change to the next letter. Thus, A will change to B, and

B

will change to C (or A).

Pick A to select the reference edge on the X axis, or reference edge

on

the X-X or Y-Y axis.

B

to select the reference edge on the Y axis, or C to select the

Selecting

Search

Direction

Select the direction in which the specified axis will search for the specified reference edge or midpoint.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Dir menu box in the

Define Features

The

Dir menu box shows the currently selected direction that the reference line will use to search for edges. The popup menu. direction can be either

Head to Tail

or

Tail to Head.

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-27

Selecting! Define Features

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Search Direction (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick i!he Dir menu box, When you pick the

Dir menu box, the search direction if appropriate. toggles to the opposite direction. Thus,

Head to Tail will change to Tail to Head, or vice versa.

NOTE:

The best search direction is the one in which the reference line is the least likely to encounter a false reference edge, as follows:

If this\is the reference edge . . .

. -.

.

:.: .: .i :

.> ... :

..................................

................

................

. .

.

...

....... ~~~..~:.:~:~,~:~~

...........

.............

:

:

............................

.....

:

::~::::.:,::~::;j~:~:~~~~~:~:

.:.:.::::::::::.:.,:i.~.:.

.~::r~~:~~~:~i:~:~.~

::.i:.:.:.:.:.~,.:.':.:.:.:

:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:. :

...

: :

:

:

~ .; .:

:j:::::.:::.:.,:.-.:.:.:

. .

I

:

,:

. . ........

.......

.:

:.:.:.~:~:::::Mj::::j::.:.:.:.:.:.:.:

.:

.......................

....................................

:i

.:

:

.:::. j:

/ b F-J/.; :--~%+

. . . the &arch direction should be Head-to-Tail

Select the appropriate search direction for the reference line.

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu

Select the 5.

Mode popup menu, then select one of four modes by which the reference line will search for an edge:

1. Search for all edges along the length of the reference line.

2. Search only for the edges of the largest white object along the reference line. (This is not available with the gray scale gaging mode.)

3. Search only for the edges of the largest black object along the reference line.(This is not available with the gray scale gaging mode.)

4. Search orzly for the edges of the largest object along the reference line.

Your Action

Look at the 5.

Mode menu box in the

Define

Featlures popup menu.

Comments

The 5.

Mode menu box shows the currently selected mode for searching for edges along the reference line.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and

Windows

6-28

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menus and

Parameters

(continued)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the 5.

Mode menu box. When you pick the 5.

Mode menu box, the

Search Mode popup menu appears on the right side of the screen, as follows:

1 Offset: 1 .O

1 Active Feature: A I

Search Mode

-

1 Ref.Line 1: Enabled

Previous

Env.

Next

1

I

I jJ MaxB.Obj

I

L

0 Max Object

I

I

Camera A ’ Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

All Edges box in the

Search Mode popup menu has a shaded square (Cl). This indicates that

All Edges is the currently selected edge search mode.

These are the four edge-search modes in the

Search Mode popup menu:

1.

All Edges:

This search mode causes the reference line to search for all edges, all midpoints between edges, and the starting end of the reference line.

2. and

3. Max W. Object: or

Max B. Object:

These search modes cause the reference line to search for one edge and the midpoint of the largest white (or black) object along a reference line. These modes are valid only with the binary mode.

4. Max Object:

This search mode causes the reference line to search for one edge and the midpoint of the largest object between two consecutive edges along the reference line.

-

-.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-29

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menus and farameters (continued)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

The examples in the following figures show the effects of different combinations of search mode, binary or gray scale mode, and search direction.

In Example #1, the active feature searches the head

(“fixed”), the point between the first and last edge (“center”), and all edges and midpoints between adjacent edges.

“Fixed”

I

Search Mode:

“Center” Edges i ..: :

*Midpoint *Midpoint *bidpoints

:

*The small white squares in this figure enable showing the midpoint locations of the black objects. They are not “holes” in the workpiece.

In Example #2, as in example #l, the active feature searches for the taiE (“fixed”), the point between the first and last edge (“center”), and all edges and midpoints between adjacent edges.

I

Mode:

Example #2

Gray Scale I

Search Direction: Tail-to-Head I

All Edges I

Chapter 6 Reference Tools:

Lines and Windows

6-30

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

In Example #3, the active feature will search only for the edge at the head side of the largest black object and the midpoint between the two edges of that object.

I

Mode:

Example #3

Binarv

Search Direction: HeadIto-Tail I

Max. Black Object I

-

In Example #4, the active feature will search only for the edge at the head side of the largest white object and the midpoint between the two edges of that object.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-31

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

In Example #5, the active feature will search only for the edge at the tail side of the largest object (the largest white object in example #4) and the midpoint between the two edges of that object.

I

Mode:

Example #5

Grav Scale

Search Direction : Taillto-Head I

Max. Object

Your Action

Pick the edge-search mode that is appropriate for your application.

Comments

Using Offset Function

Use the

Offset function to accurately identify and assign to each reference line a specific point (“fixed,” “center,” edge, or midpoint) as the single reference “edge” for that line.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

‘Offset menu box The

Offset menu box shows the current location of the in the

Define Features

“active feature.“The location is stated as either a number popup menu. (0.0, 1.0,1.5, and so on) or a name (Fixed or Center).

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-32

Selecting Define Features Using Offset Function (continued)

Popup Menus and

Parameters (continued)

Your Action Comments

An offset name refers to a specific point on the reference line

(“Fixed”) or a specific position between the outside edges of the workpiece (“Center”).

“Fixed” refers to either the head or the tail of a reference line, according to the designated search direction. For the

Head-to-Tail search direction, the fixed point is at the head; for Tail-to-Head, it is at the tail.

“Center” refers to the center point between the first edge and the last edge on the reference line.

An offset number identifies either a specific edge or specific midpoint between adjacent edges. The number varies according to the designated search mode. Offset numbers for edges are designated 0.0, 1.0, 2.0, and so on. Offset numbers for midpoints are designated 0.5,1.5,2.5, and so on.

For the

All Edges search mode, the first offset number is always 1.0, and the last is x.0, where (x) is the total number of edges on the reference line.

For the other search modes, the first number is always 0.0, an edge, and the second number is always 0.5, a midpoint.

The example below shows Active Feature A located at offset

1.0, which is edge #l. Note that the highest offset number in the example is 6.0, which is the last edge.

-

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-33

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menus and

Paramleters (continued)

USing Offset function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Offset menu box as needed to position the active feature.

Comments

When you pick the

Offset menu box, the offset position advances according to the designated search direction. In the example above, it starts with Fixed and continues with

Center, 1.0,1.5,2.0, andsoon.

The positions of letters A or B on the reference line correspond to their currently selected offsets. Thus, in the preceding figure, A corresponds to offset 1.0, which is edge

#l.

When you pick

Offset once more after A (or B) reaches the last edge or midpoint, A (or B) returns to the starting point, which varies according to the designated search mode and search direction.

For the

All Edges search mode, the starting point is either the head or the tail of the reference line, according to the designated search direction, and the offset resets to “Fixed.”

For the other search modes, the starting point is the edge of the “object,” and the offset resets to 0.0.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-34

Using Learn Function

Pick the

Learn menu box in the

Ref. Line popup menu to command the CVIM system to “learn” the coordinate(s) of the currently selected edge on the X axis and/or Y axis.

Your Action

Pick the Learn menu box.

Look at the new X and Y coordinate values in the

Learn menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Learn menu box, the reference line

“learns” the coordinates of the reference edge on the X and Y axes and displays them in the box. Note that if you selected X

Only or Y

Only as the reference line type, the inactive line will show n/a, or “not applicable.”

The X and Y references are always stated in pixels from the left edge of the screen image for X, and from the top edge of the screen image for Y.

Thus, a reading of X.Ref = 114 indicates that the reference edge on the X-axis line is 114 pixels from the left edge of the screen image. A reading of Y .Ref = 25 indicates that the edge on the Y-axis line is 25 pixels from the top edge of the screen image. These pixel values reflect the image resolution parameter that you selected in Chapter 5, Camera and

Lighting Parameters.

The new coordinate values indicate the current location of the reference edge along the X and Y axis.

-

-.

Selecting Output/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the

Output/Reference popup menu, then select the parameters in that menu.

Your Action

Pick the

Output/Reference menu box in the

Ref.Line popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Output/Reference menu box, the

Output/

Reference popup menu appears above the menu, as follows:

Ref.Line popup

I

Define Ref.Line 0.0 1

I

Define Features 0.0

I

Learn:

) Reff;;l:

X.Ref =O

Y.Ref = n/a

,En;zed

I

/

+-.- Ref. Line

Popup Menu

Env. CameraA

., .,...... . . .

Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-35

Selecting Output/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Output Line Selection Popup Menu

Select the

Output Line Selection popup menu, if appropriate, then assign an output line to carry reference line “results” signals to your production equipment.

Your Action

Look at the (Output menu box in the

Output/Reference popup menu.

Pick the

(Output menu bon in the

Output/Reference popup menu.

Comments

The

Output menu box shows the currently selected output line number assigned to this reference line.

When you pick the

Output menu box, the

Output Line

Selection popup menu appears, as follows:

Out ut Line

Popup Menu

Output/Reference

I

0 5 Z/Results lo

6 2/Results lo

7 Not Used

Define Ref.Line

I ~

;silri~:~~~~~~~~~. a.0

., ,::::. gj

:..: . .:. : :.,:

Learn: X.Ref = 0

Y.Ref = n/a

Ref.Line 1: Enabled

Previous Next

-Ref. Line

Popup Menu

I

0 10 Not Used

ICI

11 Not Used

IO

12 Not Used

Pick the appropriate output line from the menu.

Env. Camera A :&#f I;if&:’ Ref. Win Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

No Output box in the

Output Line Selection menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that no output line is currently assigned to this reference line. Also note that you can pick only those output lines with a “Results” function shown in light type. All others are shown in black type, which indicates that you cannot pick them.

If appropriate, pick one of the available output lines from the

Output Line Selection menu.

I

I

I

I

I

I

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-36

Selecting Output/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Reference Popup Menu

Select the

Reference popup menu, if appropriate, then assign a reference tool to provide shift compensation to this reference line.

You can configure one reference line to receive shift compensation from another reference line (but not a reference window), with the following restrictions:

Reference line

#

1 cannot receive shift compensation from any reference tool.

Reference line #2 can receive shift compensation only from reference line # 1.

Reference line #3 can receive shift compensation from either reference line # 1 or reference line #2.

Use the following ste currently selected re P s to select a reference line for the erence line.

Your Action

Look at the Ref menu box in the Output/Reference popup menu.

Pick the Ref menu box in the Output/Reference popup menu.

Comments

The

Ref menu box shows the currently selected reference line number assigned to this reference line.

When you pick the

Ref menu box, the

Reference popup menu appears, as follows:

Output/Reference

-

-

10 Ref.Line 1 1

1 Define Ref.Line 0.0 1

Previous

Env.

Next

. . . .,. . . . . ,. : . . :,

.A.. . . ..:..

Gage Window Mist Exit

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-37

Selecting Owtput/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Reference Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate reference line from the menu.

Comments

Note that the

Fixed box in the

Reference menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that a reference tool is not currently assigned to this reference line. Also note that only the available reference tools are in light type. All others are shown in black type, which indicates that you cannot pick them.

If appropriate, pick one of the available reference lines from the

Reference menu.

6-38

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

Reference Windows

This section provides you with the details of using and configuring reference windows.

Under the Using Reference Windows heading, you will see simple example applications in which the CVIM system uses reference windows to provide shift compensation and rotation for a linear gage. The system then uses that gage to measure the diameter of a hole in a metal plate.

Under the Configuring Reference Windows heading, you will find out how to use the “user interface” - the light pen and the popup menus on the CVIM video monitor - to configure a reference window.

-

Using Reference Windows

The following pages describe how the CVIM system can use reference windows to detect and measure workpiece shift and/or rotation, and offset inspection tools by the amount of that shift and/or rotation. As is true of reference lines, the advantage of using reference windows is that workpieces need not be rigidly fixtured for the CVIM system to inspect them.

NOTE: Before using reference windows, be sure that you have configured the image resolution, light reference threshold, and trigger source, and have adjusted the camera focus and aperture.

Each of the six numbered reference windows (three per tool set) consists of three “active features.” And each active feature consists of a search window and a feature window.

A search window defines the specific urea of the image in which you want the CVIM system to search for feature that you specify.

A search window can be large enough to include almost all of the image area; however, as a practical matter, you are unlikely to need a search window of that size. As a rule, the search window should be only as large as it needs to be to cover the amount of workpiece shift and/or rotation that is acceptable for your application - since the larger the window size, the longer the processing time.

A feature window defines the specific part of the image that you want the CVIM system to search for within the search window.

The feature window size can be as small as 16-by-16 pixels, and as large as 64-by-64 pixels.

By using a single active feature, the CVIM system can compensate for workpiece shift along the horizontal and vertical axes. By using two or three active features, the system can compensate for workpiece shift and for rotation of up to f 15”.

_

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Wincfows

6-39

Using Reference Windows

(continued)

Shift-on/y Example

The following example uses a single “active feature” - that is, one search window and one feature window - to provide shift compensation only. Here are the assumptions for the example:

The “workpiece” is a flat, stamped-out metal plate with a hole in the middle.

The “feature” that the feature window will search for is a cross-shaped mark on the plate.

The reference window will provide shift compensation to a linear gage.

The linear gage will measure the diameter of the hole in the plate.

The position of each plate in a series of inspections will vary somewhat horizontally and vertically, but will not rotate.

The practical objective in this example is for the CVIM system to inspect each plate for a hole of the proper diameter, and to reject all plates with either no hole, or one that is too small or too large.

The functions of the reference window in this example are these:

Check whether the plate is shifted from the “original” or

“taught” position.

If a plate is shifted, shift the linear gage by the same amount and in the same direction.

Figure 6.5 shows how an image of the metal plate might appear on the video monitor.

Figure 6.5 also shows how the reference window is configured for this example. Both the search window and the feature window are centered over the feature. The reason is that the feature could be anywhere within the search window during a series of plate inspections.

Also, you would have set the feature window to a size just large enough to include the feature.

As the CVIM system inspects a series of plates, the feature window will find the feature on each plate as long as the feature appears somewhere within the search window.

If a particular plate is shifted, but the feature lies within the search window, the feature window will find the feature.

If the feature lies outside the search window, an inspection failure will occur, since the feature window will not be able to find the feature.

Chapter 6 Reference Took: Lines and Windows

6-40

Using Reference Windows

(continued)

Shift-only Examp/e (continued)

Figure 6.5 Single “Active Feature” Positioned Over

Feature on Plate

Feature

Windyw

“Feature“ on Plate

/

-

To summarize the main factors in the shift-only inspection example:

One “active feature” - that is, one search window and one feature window - detects shift along the X and Y axes, and provides shift compensation (but not rotation) to a linear

@UP-

The “feature” on the plate will always appear somewhere within the search window.

One linear gage will be used to measure the diameter of the hole in the plate.

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Using Reference Windows

(con timed)

6-4 1

Shift-only fxamp/e (continued)

Figure 6.6 shows how the linear gage might appear when positioned horizontally across the hole; however, the gage co&d be positioned vertically, or at some angle, across the hole.

Figure 6.6 Linear Gage Positioned Over Hole in Plate

-

Whatever the gage’s position across the hole, its length need only be sufficient to measure the maximum acceptable diameter. At that length, the gage could of course also detect the minimum acceptable diameter.

At the start of each inspection cycle, the feature window begins searching for the “feature” on the plate. It begins its search at the upper-left corner of the search window and proceeds left-to-right, top-to-bottom, toward the lower right corner, until it finds the feature.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-42

Using Reference Windows

(continued)

Shift-only Example (continued)

Figure 6.7 compares the position of the “original” plate (the one used during configuration) to the position of a shifted plate (one that could appear during an inspection). Note that the plate, in this case, is shifted up and to the left.

Figure 6.7 Shifted Plate Compared to Original Plate

-

I-

Feature Window

(New Position) 1

,Search Window

(Same Position) tion

Plate

-

Ga e Position’ iI !:i: $ $-;ii::.:

R ifted Plate .: I;i .:: ,;.j :I

. /

Shifted Plate

Position -.-.-.I.

. :

: :.

‘Linear Gage

Position on

< .: “Original”

Plate

“Oriqinal”

Plate,Fosition

JI .-.-.-.-.-.A

Note also that the “feature” on the shifted plate is still within the boundaries of the search window. Thus, the feature window was able to “find” the feature and supply shift compensation to the linear gage, as shown.

When the feature window finds the shifted plate’s feature, the CVIM system compares its position with the “original” feature position. The difference between the two feature positions determines the amount of horizontal and vertical shift compensation applied to the linear gage. After the gage is shifted to its new position, it measures the hole diameter.

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

Using Reference Windows

(con timed)

6-43

Shift-only Example (continued)

Look again at Figure 6.7. Notice that urithozlt shift compensation the linear gage would be below the shifted hole, missing it completely. The result, in that case, would be an inspection failure.

Rotation and Shift Example

Figure 6.8 compares the position of the “original” plate (the one used during configuration) to the position of a rotated and shifted plate (one that could appear during a CVIM inspection). Note that the rotated plate, in this case, is rotated counter-clockwise and is shifted up and to the left.

Two “active features” are required to detect plate rotation.

One feature on the plate in Figure 6.8 is the cross or “plus” figure ( + ) in the upper-left corner; the other feature is the lower-right corner of the plate itself. Both features are unique on the plate.

Figure 6.8 Rotated and Shifted Plate Compared to “Original”

Unrotated Plate

“Original”

,.+*I Plate Position

\

* c . -,

\ Rotated and

‘TShifted Plate

.

I i i i i i

I i i i i i.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-44

Using Reference Windows

(con timed)

Rotation and Shift Example (continued)

Figure 6.9 shows how the two “active features” in this example are configured to detect shift and rotation.

Each feature window is centered over the workpiece feature and is sized to include only the workpiece feature.

Each search window is centered over the feature window and is sized to include the maximum acceptable plate shift and rotation.

Fiuure 6.9 Two “Active Features” Positioned Over Features on Plate

-

First Feature

Window

/

I

First

Frture

Second Search

Second

Feature

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-45

Using Reference Windows

(continued)

Rotation and Shift Example (continued)

Figure 6.10 shows how the CVIM system uses the two active features to establish a basic reference angle for rotation compensation.

As the figure shows, the reference angle is the angle between the X-axis datum line and a datum line joining the centers of the features on the “original” unrotated plate.

NOTE: The two datum lines do not appear on the monitor screen. They are shown in the figure only for illustration.

Fiaure 6.10 Datum Lines and Reference Anqle for Rotation Compensation

X Axis

Datum

Line

-

Datum Line

Between

“Original”

, Features

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-46

Using

Reference Windows

(continued)

Rotation and Shift Example

(continued)

Figure 6.11 adds a rotated (and shifted) plate to Figure 6.10.

This shows the relationship between the various datum lines and reference angles.

During an inspection cycle, the CVIM system compares the reference angle with the rotation reference angle (the angle between the X axis and the datum line for the rotated plate).

If these two angles differ, the system calculates the rotation compensation angle, which is the difference between the two angles in degrees, then rotates the associated inspection tool(s) according to the rotation compensation angle.

Figure 6.11 Basis for Determining Rotation Compensation

Shifted

First Feature

- Window -1

Shifted/Rotated

Plate Position

/

“Original”

Plate Position

- i Rotation ; i Reference : i i i

Angle \/

I

I’

I

I

I

I

I

/

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

:

I

//

/

/

/

Basic

Reference

Angle

/

Shifted /

‘econd Feature

Window

- .-.-.-.-.

\

Datum Line

Between .-bh

“Original”

Features

Datum Line

Between

Shifted/Rotated

Features

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

6-47

Using Reference Windows

(continued)

Rotation and Shift Example (continued)

In Figure 6.11 the plate has rotated a few degrees counter- clockwise; thus, any associated inspection tool would also be rotated counter-clockwise the same number of degrees.

Figure 6.12 shows how CVIM uses the two “active features” to establish a midpoint for shift compensation.

As the figure shows, the midpoint is the halfway point on a line joining the centers of the two features on the “original” unshifted plate.

Note: The datum line does not appear on the video monitor screen. It is shown in the figure only for illustration.

Figure 6.12 Datum Line and Midpoint for Shift Compensation

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

6-48

Using Reference Windows

(continued)

Rotation and Shift Example (continued)

Figure 6.13 adds a shifted (and rotated) plate to Figure 6.12.

This shows the relationship between the two datum lines and their respective midpoints.

During an inspection, the CVIM system compares the

“original” midpoint position with the shifted midpoint position.

If these two positions differ, the system calculates the X- and

Y-coordinates of the shifted midpoint, then shifts the associated inspection tool(s) accordingly.

Figure 6.13 Basis for Determininq Shift Compensation

-

Midpoint Between

Shifted ,Features

Datum Line

Between Features

/ on Shifted Plate

.

Ll i.-.,

-\

Rotated/Shifted

Plate Position -

-.-.-. k- Datum Line

1 1

Between Features

. on “Oriqinal” Plate

I

I

I

\Y -

\ +-- “Original”

Plate Position

?!I

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Selecting Workpiece features

6-49

A reference window performs its function in a series of steps, as follows:

It finds a specific physical feature on a workpiece.

It determines the location (X- and Y-axis coordinates) of that feature.

It calculates the difference, if any, between that feature’s location and the location of the same feature on the

“original” workpiece.

It supplies any resulting shift an&or rotation compensation to all tools associated with the reference window.

Before you configure a reference window, you must select the specific physical feature(s) on the workpiece that you want the reference window to locate during an inspection cycle.

Here are some points to consider when you make that selection:

Minimize feature ambiguity: The workpiece feature should be as unique as possible within the search window in order to reduce the probability of the feature window finding the wrong feature. As shown in the preceding figures, corners on a workpiece are often useable as features.

Maximize feature contrast and crispness: The workpiece feature should have as much color contrast as possible between itself and its immediate background.

Similarly, the feature should be crisp, not fuzzy, relative to its background.

Maximize feature solidity: The workpiece feature should be as solid and connected as possible, with distinct characteristics. It should not be a disconnected collection of small pieces having an overall indistinct characteristic.

Minimize feature rotation sensitivity: The workpiece feature should be as insensitive as possible to rotation in order to reduce the probability of the feature window not recognizing the rotated feature.

For example, a perfect circle should be fairly insensitive to rotation, whereas a more complex figure, such as upper-case

‘W,” might be more easily missed if it is rotated.

Minimize feature window size: The CVIM system regards everything inside the feature window as the

“feature.” Thus, you should make the feature window only as large as it must be to include the workpiece feature you’ve selected and as little else as possible on or around the workpiece. Minimizing the feature window’s size reduces processing time.

The remaining pages of this chapter contain the procedures that you will use to configure a reference window.

6-50

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Configuring Reference

To configure the reference windows, you will pick the

Ref.

Windows Win menu box in the Main Configuration menu, then select the parameters and perform the functions in the

Ref. Win popup menu.

These are the main function and configuration categories in the

Ref. Win popup menu:

Reference window features: Selects and configures the search/feature window pairs (called “features”), sets the position and size of the search and feature windows, and sets the acceptance criteria for recognizing the searched-for feature(s) on the workpiece.

Output lines and reference tool: Selects the output line for reporting inspection “results,” and selects the reference tool from which to receive shift compensation.

Coordinates and angles: This function “learns” the X- and Y-axis coordinates of the center of a single feature window or the center point between the centers of multiple feature windows.

The centerpoint serves as a reference for measuring the angle between the positive X axis on the screen image and one of the feature windows.

Reference window number: This function selects the reference window number (1,2, or 3) to be configured.

Reference window enable/disable: This function enables or disables the currently selected reference window.

Configuring a reference window involves these basic steps:

Selecting the reference window number (1 to 3).

Selecting the feature(s) that you want the reference window(s) to find in the camera image.

Positioning and sizing the reference window(s) over the workpiece image.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-51

Selecting Ref.Win Popup

Your first step is to select the

Ref.Win popup menu.

Menu

Your Action Comments

Pick

Ref.Win in the Main When you pick the

Ref.Win, the

Ref. Win background color

Configuration menu. changes from brown to black, and the

Ref. Window popup menu appears above the Main Options list:

. Ref. Window

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line ‘$kf:.Wjh? Gage Window Mist Exit

The

Ref. Win popup menu shows the five configuration categories described earlier.

In addition to the popup menu, if the currently selected reference window is enabled, as shown above, the three feature windows will also appear on the screen.

Selecting and Enabling

Reference Window

Select the reference window number and enable the reference window.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Ref.Win menu box The

Ref .Win box indicates the currently selected reference in the

Ref.Window window number (1,2, or 3). It also indicates whether that popup menu. reference window is

Enabled or

Disabled.

Select the reference window To change the reference window number, pick the Next (or number.

Previous) menu box repeatedly until the correct number appears.

The

Next and

Previous functions work like this: When you pick the

Next box, the next higher reference window number appears: 1,2,3,. . .

1,2,3, and so on. When you pick the

Previous box, the next lower reference window number appears: 3,2,1, . . .3,2,1, and so on.

Look at the

Ref.Win

If

Disa bled appears, perform the next step. menu box again.

Pick the

Ref.Win

To enable the reference window, pick the

Ref.Win menu box. menu box. The status should now indicate

Enabled.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-52

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the

Define Features popup menu, then select the parameters and functions in that menu. Basically, these parameters and functions specify the feature to searched for and the area to be searched, and the degree to which the

“found” feature matches the “original” feature.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Define Features

When you pick the

Define Featuresmenu box, the

Define menu box in the

Ref. Features popup menu appears above the

Ref. Window popup

Window popup menu. menu. Initially, it appears as follows:

Save Feature

P&P Feature Win.

Feature Disp: Off

Find Feature: -1

Set

Score: 0

Active Feature: 1

0.0 l Define Features

Popup Menu

-

1 OutoutfReference

-

Ref. Window

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line :~&Wib!:

:::

Gage Window Mist Exit

Your Action

Look at the

Active Feature menu box in the

Define

Features popup menu.

Pick the

Active Feature menu box, if appropriate.

Selecting Active Feature

Each reference window has available three “active features,” or window pairs, each of which consists of a feature window and a search window. These active features are numbered 1,

2, and 3.

Generally, only one feature is needed to provide shift compensation. If rotation compensation is necessary, two or three features are needed.

Use the next steps to select any one of the three features.

Comments

The

Active Feature menu box indicates the “feature” (that is, 1,2, or 3) that is currently “active” for configuration purposes.

When you pick the

Active Feature menu box, the “active feature” will advance to the next higher number.

Select whichever feature number you want to configure at this time.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-53

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Using P&P Feature Win. function

Select the

P&P Feature Win. menu box, then position the feature window over the physical feature on the workpiece and set the window to the appropriate size.

(“P&P” means

“pick and place.“)

NOTE:

The feature window has a minimum size of 16 pixels by 16 pixels, and a maximum size of 64 by 64 pixels.

The following procedure shows you how to use the light pen to adjust the position and dimensions of a feature window.

Your Action

Pick the

P&P Feature Win. menu box in the

Define

Features popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

P&P Feature Win. menu box, a small square (0) will appear in the center of the currently selected feature window and in the center of each side of that window, as follows:

-

Aim the light pen at the center handle.

These squares are the “handles” that the light pen uses to manipulate the window on the monitor screen.

Aim the light pen at the center handle until the light pen

“sees” the handle. You may have to move the light pen around slightly.

When the light pen sees the handle, a larger “highlight” square will surround the handle, as follows: n

/

“Highlight”

Square

Cl n

Hold the pen steady in this position

- the appearance of the “highlight” square means that the light pen is now properly aimed.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

6-54

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(con timed)

Using P&P Feature Win. function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the handle. A small “X” will appear in the center of the window, along with a “spotlight,” which facilitates “dragging” the window.

-

X

Q

“Spotlight”

, Feature

Window

Workpiece

Feature

-

You can now “drag” the window across the monitor screen.When you move the pen, the entire window follows.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using P&P Feature Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Drag the feature window ouer the ” + ” workpiece feature.

Comments

6-55 l

,..............,......,.........*......4

.

. . t

.

. .

.

Feature Window

(New position)

I

Workpiece

Feature

-

Aim the light pen at the rightmost handle.

NOTE: Keep the tip of the pen within about one- half inch of the monitor screen.

When you have the window in position over the workpiece feature, press the pen against the monitor screen to “lock” the window at that position.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

P

1 q l-l

P

I

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-56

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using P&P Feature Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the handle.

Comments

Drag the right side of the Note that the left side remains anchored. window as shown.

Right Side

(New position)

1

Right Side

(Original position)

1

Workpiece

Feature

Lock the window’s right side in position.

Aim the light pen at the bottom handle.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

Pick the handle.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using P&P Feature Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Drag the bottom side UJ as shown.

Comments

Note that the top side remains anchored.

6-57

-

Lock the window’s bottom side in position.

If

necessary, use the vernier arrows to “fine-tune” the position or size of the window.

Press and hold the light pen tip against the window handle, window, or window side.

The feature window is now properly positioned over workpiece feature. the

You can change the window’s size or position more precisely by using the vernier arrows. The vernier arrows enable you to make these changes in small increments.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a window handle or placing the window or window side.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the monitor screen:

This:

Move left or right side left or right

VERNIER ARROWS

or this:

Move window up, down, left or right or this: t

5

4

4

Move top or bottom side up or down

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-58

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using P&P

Feature

Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick an arrow once to moue the window or window side one pixel in the arrow’s direction,

Pick and hold an arrow to change thzndow size or position continuously.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

Pick the

Save Feature menu box.

Comments

The up, down, right, or left arrow, will move the entire window or window side one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the window’s size or position will change slowly for the first five or six increments. It will then change at a more rapid rate.

When the window or side is properly positioned, pick the

“return” symbol (

+J) to release the vernier arrows and return to the standard pick-and-place mode.

This saves the contents (the workpiece feature) of the feature window.

When you pick the

Save Feature menu box, the search window will appear centered around the feature window, as follows:

I+--.

Feature I

Search

I- Wir >dow -

:.:::. . . .

: ::::y:..:.::: .:j

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

:,.. :: :y. ::‘;:zj, . . . . $: ;::j:; :’ : :..: :

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-59

Selecting Define Featu res Using P&P Feature Win. function (continued)

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action Comments

In addition, the following changes will occur in the

Define

Features popup menu:

The term

Save Feature will change to

Delete Feature.

The

P&P Feature Win. menu box will change to P&P Search

Win.

The three menu boxes,

Feature Disp, Find Feature, and

Score are enabled; that is, the type changes from light, indicating that you can now pick these boxes.

Set

black

to

At this point, the system is enabled for configuring the search window and for setting the feature-matching tolerence level (called “score”).

Using Feature Disp Function

The

Feature Disp function enables you to display the contents of the feature window on the monitor screen.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Feature Disp

The

Feature Disp menu box indicates the status of the menu box.

Feature Disp function, which will be either on or off.

Pick the

Feature Disp

If the

Feature Disp function is on and you want it off, or vice menu box, if appropriate. versa, pick the menu box. If you set the status to on, the feature window and its contents will appear at the right edge of the monitor screen.

Using P&P Search Win. function

Pick the

P&P Search Win. menu box, then position the search window around the feature window and set the search window to the appropriate size.

NOTE: The search window can be adjusted to include almost the entire screen image; however, it is unlikely that your application will require that size. If so, the processing time would be increased.

The procedure for adjusting the size and position of a search window are the same as for the feature window.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools:

Lines and Windows

6-60

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(con timed)

Using P&P Search Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Look at the search window.

If necessary, adjust the size and position of the search window.

Comments

As noted earlier, the search window centered itself around the feature window when you saved the feature window.

The search window should be just large enough to permit the feature window to find the feature with the maximum allowable shift and/or rotation appropriate for your application.

Use the same “pick and place” procedure that you used to set the feature window’s position and size.

Understanding Set Score Function

During an inspection cycle, the feature window searches within the search window for a workpiece feature that matches the stored workpiece feature -the one that you

“saved” in the CVIM system memory with the

Save Feature function.

The feature window conducts its search starting at the top- left corner of the search window and proceeding left-to-right and top-to-bottom. Along the way, it examines each area for a pattern of pixels that matches most closely the pixel pattern (that is, the workpiece feature) in the stored feature window.

As the feature window examines each new area, it accumulates a numerical score that indicates how much the pixel pattern in the present area differs from the pixel pattern in the stored feature window. The higher the accumulated score, the greater the difference or “error.”

If the accumulated score (“error”) equals or exceeds the value entered in the Set

Score menu box, the feature window will stop examining the present area and will move to the next area, where it will begin examining the pixel pattern and accumulating a new score.

If the feature window encounters an area in which the total accumulated score is lower than the value in the Set

Score menu box, it will then examine the next area to see if that area will yield an even lower score. If so, the feature window will continue further; if not, it will go back to the area with the best-that is, the lowest - score. In either case, since the feature window has located the workpiece feature, it stops the search.

If the feature window fails to find any area within the search window in which the accumulated score is lower than the Set

Score value, the entire reference window will fail.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-67

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Determining Set Score Value

In order to determine the appropriate score value(s) to enter into the Set

Score menu box(es>, you must perform a series of trial inspections, using several representative workpieces.

This will provide you with a base of “score” statistics from which you can derive the appropriate score value(s).

At this point, you should have several representative workpieces on hand for use in the trial inspection series.

Before beginning the trial inspections, be sure to stage your

“ideal” workpiece in front of the camera and perform all of the appropriate parameter settings and functions described in Chapters 3,4, and 5. Then, position the feature and search windows over the appropriate workpiece feature for each active feature (in each reference window) as described earlier in this chapter.

NOTE: In choosing workpiece features, it is very desireable to use those that are unique within a search window and have consistent appearance from workpiece to workpiece.

This allows using low score values. Features whose appearance varies slightly from workpiece to workpiece will require using higher score values. Although higher score values allow the CVIM system to locate varying features, the cost is a slight increase in processing time and a potential decrease in location accuracy.

Your first step in preparing for the trial inspections will be to enter a score of 0 (zero) in the Set

Score menu box. A score value of 0 has a special effect: During each inspection cycle, the feature window will search the entire search window for the best match.

Next, you will arrange your workpieces so that the CVIM system can inspect them. The inspection setup can be either a manual one, in which you place each new workpiece in position and press a trigger button, or an automatic one, in which you use the actual factory equipment or simulate it.

When the inspection setup is ready, you will set the CVIM system to the run mode (described in Chapter 10). This enables the CVIM system to perform the inspections. During each inspection cycle, the feature window searches the entire search window for the best match and reports the resulting score to the statistics tables.

During the inspection series, you should reposition (if necessary) some of the workpieces in order to create the maximum workpiece shift and/or rotation that you expect to occur in your application.

Finally, when the CVIM system has performed a sufficient number of inspections, you can end the run mode. The score results now stored in the statistics tables will be your basis for determining the score value(s) to enter into the

Set Score menu box(es).

Chapter 6 Reference Took: Lines and Windows

6-62

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Determining Set Score

Value (continued)

You can determine the appropriate score value to enter into a particular Set

Score menu box by examining the

Maximum score “reading” in the associated Inspection Statistics table

(you will see this table when you pick the

Set Score menu box). To this “reading” you will add a 10% margin. For example, if the

Maximum score reading were 40, you would add lo%, or 4, resulting in 44. This is the score value that you would enter into the

Set Score menu box.

The score value has consequences affecting the repeatability, reliability, and location accuracy of a feature window, as follows:

Repeatability -This indicates how consistently the feature window finds a feature in the search window. Repeatability is 100% if the feature window always finds a feature

(however, it may not always find the correct feature).

Generally, the higher the score value, the higher the probability that the feature window will find a particular workpiece feature every time. At the same time, however, the probability also increases that the feature window may find a spurious “feature.” For example, very high score values, such as 200, will enable the feature window to accept nearly anything in the search window as the “correct” workpiece feature.

Reliability - This indicates how well the feature window finds the correct workpiece feature. Reliability is 100% if the feature window finds only the correct feature (however, it may not always find that feature).

Generally, the lower the score value, the higher the probability that the feature window will find only the correct workpiece feature. At the same time, however, the probability also increases that the feature window may not find any feature. For example, very low score values, such as

5, may restrict the feature window to accepting only the correct workpiece feature, but it may not necessarily find that feature every time.

Location accuracy - This indicates how accurately the feature window locates the position of the workpiece feature on the X and Y axes.

Generally, the lower the score value, the higher the location accuracy, and vice versa. Reductions in accuracy are slight, however, and for most tool operations they will have no material effect.

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-63

Selecting Define Features functions and Parameters

(continued)

Determining Set Score Value (continued)

As you can see from the preceding discussion, you will need to consider certain trade-offs before setting the score value.

For example, if the workpiece feature you’ve selected yields a high

Maximum reading in the statistics tables, you may still be able to use that workpiece feature so long as the search window will never contain another object that the feature window can mistake for the correct feature.

Alternatively, you may be able to reduce the

Maximum score reading by positioning the feature window differently over the workpiece feature, or by using a workpiece feature with a simpler shape, such as a circle.

In all cases, you should try to find the combination of workpiece feature and feature window size and position that yields the lowest score possible within the constraints of your application.

The followin table summarizes the effects that the various score values E ave on the repeatability, reliability, and location accuracy factors.

Score

Value

Repeatability Reliability fc:$$i

0 l-30

30-50 so- 100 lOO+

Maximum

Fair

Good

Very Good

High

Maximum

High

Very Good

Good

Fair

Comments

Maximum

Excellent

Very good

Good

Fair

This score value causes feature window to search entire search window and report lowest score

(that is, best match).

Appearance of workpiece feature uniform on all workpieces, even when rotated. Feature window is least likely to find a spurious feature. Good when search window has objectssimilar to workpiece feature.

Appearance of workpiece feature varies slightly.

Feature window is more likely to find a spurious feature if search window contains objects similar to workpiece feature. OK if search window has no other objects that feature window can mistake for correct workpiece feature.

Appearance of workpiece feature varies significantly. Feature window is likely to find a spurious feature if search window contains other objects. OK if search window has no other objects.

Appearance of workpiece feature varies greatly.

Feature window is very likely to find a spurious feature if search window has other objects. May be OK if search window contains no other objects.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-64

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Determining Set Score Value (continued)

Use the following procedure to determine the appropriate score value for an active feature.

Your Action

Look at the

Set Score menu box in the

Define

Features menu.

Pick the

Set Score menu box in the

Define Features popup menu.

Comments

If the score value is not already 0 (zero), perform the next three steps to set the score value to 0. This is necessary before you begin the series of trial inspections.

When you pick the Set

Score menu box, the calculator pad and the

Inspection Statistics table appear, as follows:

Delete Feature

P&P Search Win.

1 Feature Disp: Off

..a

::..:.

-1

:.:.: q$ -T- 324

49

:.:.:.:.: y:$;: 28.267

::‘,

I 5.498

+ Inspection

Statistics Table

I

1 Active Feature: 1

Previous

I

I 7

Calculator Pad+

-Ref. Window

Popup Menu

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 .

+ - Oh x / = t

Clr

P

Enter

Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the current “score” setting (55) in the Set

Score menu box appears in the calculator display. Note also that the current statistics in the

Inspection Statistics table is from a previous operation that used “active feature” # 1.

Pick the 0 (zero) digit. When you pick the 0 digit, it will appear in the calculator display.

Pick the

Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the 0 will appear in the Set

Score menu box. The score value is now set to 0.

Repeat the preceeding steps for each active feature used in your application.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-65

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Determining

Set Score Value (continued) box in the Exit menu.

Look at the in the

Pick the

Pick the

Your Action

Prepare to run a series of

“trial” inspections.

Pick the Exit menu box in the

Main Config uration menu.

Pick the Runtime init. menu

Mode

Runtime

Runtime Display menu box in the menu box

Init.menu.

Exit menu.

Pick the Stat. Page 2 menu box in the Runtime

Pick the box in the

Goto Runmode box in the

Look at the statistics table.

Reposition your workpiece to couer all possible positions in your application.

When you have enough inspections, look at the

Max Reading scores in the Stat. Page 2 table.

Pick the

Display

Runtime

Runtime

Setup

Exit menu. menu menu. menu menu. menu box to stop the runmode.

Comments

Refer to Chapter 10, Runtime Operations for more details about the following steps.

When you pick the Exit menu box, the Exit popup menu will appear.

When you pick the Runtime Init. menu box, the Runtime Init. popup menu will appear.

If “Standard” appears, pick the menu box once to toggle it to

“Learn.” This activates the “learn” mode during the trial inspection series and ensures the accumulation of “score” data in the statistics tables.

When you pick the Runtime Display menu box, the Runtime

Display popup menu will appear.

The Stat. Page 2 menu box causes page two of the statistics tables to appear on the monitor screen when you activate the run mode. Page two displays “score” statistics for all enabled reference windows.

When you pick the Runtime menu box, the Runtime popup menu will appear.

When you pick the Goto Runmode menu box, the CVIM system will begin running inspections if you selected

Auto/Internal as the trigger source. If not, the system will await trigger inputs from whatever trigger source you selected.

As the inspections continue, the Stat. Page 2 table will display accumulated “score” data only for each “active feature” within each enabled reference window. No data will appear for any “feature” or window that is not enabled.

The purpose of doing this is to accumulate “score” data from the worst-case positions that can occur in your application.

The each

Max Reading worst-case scores for each of the “active features” in enabled scores in the reference window.

Stat. Page 2 table are the

These scores are the basis for the initial values that you will use in the Set Score menu box for each “active feature.”

The CVIM system will return to the configuration mode.

At this time, the final data appearing in the Stat. Page 2 table are recorded in the Inspection Statistics table for each

“active feature.” You saw an example of this table when you picked the Set Score menu box earlier.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-66

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Set Score Function

Pick the Set

Score menu box, then enter the adjusted

Maximum score “reading” as the score value.

Recall from an earlier discussion that the adjusted score value is the

Maximum score “reading”in the Inspection

Statistics table, plus a 10% margin.

Your Action

Return to the

Define Features popup menu.

Look at the

Active Feature selection number.

Pick the

Set Score menu box in the

Define Features popup menu.

Comments

Pick the

Ref.Win menu box to get the

Ref.Window popup menu, then pick the

Define Features menu box to get the

Define Features popup menu. This will restore the configuration situation existing before you performed the series of inspections.

Verify that the current “active feature” is one that you want to configure at this time ( #l, #2, or #3).

When you pick the Set

Score menu box, the calculator pad and

Inspection Statistics table appear, as follows:

Delete Feature

P&P Search Win.

1 Feature Disp: Off

I

Nominal

Samples

Maximum

Minimum

Mean

Std.Dev

-1

411

17

1

16.316

2.690

-Inspection

Statistics Table

-

1 Active Feature: 1

I

Output/Reference

Learn: x=0

8 = n/a

Y=O

0.0

Ref. Windo\Al

POPUD Men,

I

I

I

Env.

I

I

Camera A

, I

I j: j

Ref. Line ! s&:&/i

I?: Gage Window

,: :. : .: ..:

Mist Exit

Note that the calculator “display” still shows the zero “score” setting that you set previously. Note also that the

Inspection

Statistics table displays a Maximum

“reading” of 17. In this case, you would add 10% (rounded) to 17, which would yield an adjusted score value of 19.

I

Enter each digit ofyour adjusted score value.

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-67

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Using Set Score Function

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the Enter key.

Comments

When you pick the

Enter key, the new score value will appear in the Set

Score menu box.

NOTE: You should think of the score value that you just entered as its initial value. It is thus subject to change, as may be indicated when you run additional series of trial inspections.

Ultimately, the best score value is the lowest one that ensures the most efficient and reliable feature-search operation. The trade-off for using higher scores is a slight increase in processing time and a potential decrease in reliability and/or accuracy.

Repeat the Set

Score function for each “active feature” to be used in your application.

Using Find Feature

Function

The

Find Feature function causes the feature window of the current “active feature”

(1,2, or 3) to conduct one search operation, using the stored image, and to report the result in the

Find Feature menu box.

This function can be useful in troubleshooting your application, especially during the development stage.

For example, you could configure the CVIM system to halt on a reject. When a reject condition occurs, you could then analyze the image associated with the reject, determine the score that caused the reject, and possibly determine the cause of the excessive score.

Your Action

Set the

Set Score value to 0 (zero).

Look at the

Find Feature menu box.

Pick the

Find Feature menu box.

Comments

Setting the score to 0 enables the feature window to search the entire search window for the best match; that is, the lowest score value.

Initially, the score is -1. This is a “flag” indicating that the

Find Feature function has not been used since the current

“active feature” (1,2, or 3) was selected.

When you pick the

Find Feature menu box, the feature window searches the entire search window for the workpiece feature. As noted above, the camera does not acquire a new image - the last stored image is used.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

6-68

Selecting Define Features

Functions and Parameters

(continued)

Your Action

Using Find Feature Function (continued)

Comments

If the feature window fir& the workpiece feature before accumulating a score exceeding 200, it returns the accumulated score value in the

Find Feature menu box.

If the feature window cannot find any feature in the search window having an accumulated score below 200, a message appears on the monitor screen, as follows:

The feature cannot be located as currently configured.

Using Learn Function

Select the

Learn menu box to command the CVIM system to “learn” the X-Y coordinates of the “shift reference point” and the angle of the “rotation reference line.”

The shift reference point is always stated in pixels from the left side of the screen image for X, and from the top of the screen image for Y. Thus, X = 120 indicates that the shift reference point on the X-axis is 120 pixels from the left, and

Y = 75 indicates that the shift reference point is 75 pixels from the top.

The rotation reference line indicates the angle (6) in degrees between itself and the positive X axis on the screen image. It appears only when two or three feature windows are used.

The rotation reference line extends from the center point between the feature window centers (the shift reference point) and the center of one of the feature windows.

The following three figures show these shift reference points and rotation reference lines where one, two, or three feature windows are used.

When one active feature is used, the shift reference point is at the center of the feature window.

ONE ACTIVE FEATURE:

-Feature Window

Workpiece Feature

Shift Reference

Point

-

-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Using Learn Function

(continued)

6-69

When two active features are used, the shift reference point is halfway between the feature window centers. The rotation reference line extends from the shift reference point to the center of the lowest numbered feature window.

TWO ACTIVE FEATURES:

/

Rotation

Reference Line t

I

Shift Reference

Point

Feature

Window #2

Workpiece

Feature #2

I

/

1

When three active features are used, the shift reference point is at the center of the triangle formed by the centers of the three feature windows. The rotation reference line extends from the shift reference point to the center of the farthest feature window.

In the figure below, feature window #l is farthest from the shift reference point.

THREE ACTIVE FEATURES:

Feature #l /

/

Rotation

Reference Line

Shift Reference ’

Point

\

Window #l

Feature

Window #2

Workpiece

Feature #2

Workpiece

MFeature

I /Yq

f-- Feature

#3

I

I” ‘I Window #3

I

6-70

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

Using Learn Function

The angle is always measured from the positive X axis, as

(continued) follows:

Negative Rotation

Reference Line

(Approx. -135O)

\

J

Shift Reference

Point

-

Positive\Rotation

Reference Line

(Approx. + 1 50°)

Notice that the three o’clock position is O”, and the nine o’clock position is 180”. The maximum positive angle is

180.00”, and the maximum negative angle is -179.99”.

Pick the

Your Action

Learn menu box.

Look at the rtew data in the

Learn menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Learn menu box, the reference window

“learns” the 0 angle and the coordinates of the shift reference point, and it displays these figures in the menu box. Note that if you selected only one active feature, the angle line in the menu box will display 8 = n/a, or “not applicable.”

The new data indicate the current angle (8) between the screen image X axis and the rotation reference line, and the

X and Y coordinates of the shift reference point.

-

.-

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: 1 ines and Windows

6-71

Selecting Output/Reference

Select the

Output/Reference popup menu, then select the

Popup Menu and Parameters parameters in that menu.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Output/Reference menu box in the

Ref.Win

When you pick the

Reference popup menu. menu, as follows:

Output/Reference menu box, the popup menu appears above the

Ref.Win

Output/ popup

I

Ref.Win 1: Enabled

I

Ref. Window vopup Menu

Previous Next

Gage Window Env. Camera A Exit

Selecting Output Line Selection Popup Menu

Select the

Output Line Selection popup menu, if appropriate, then assign an output line to carry reference line “results” signals to your production equipment.

Your Action

Look at the

Output menu box in the

Output/Reference popup menu.

Comments

The

Output menu box shows the currently selected output line assigned to this reference window.

Chapter 6

Reference TOO/S: Lines and Wndows

6-72

Selecting Output/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Output Line Selection Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Output menu box When you pick the

Output menu box, the

Output Line in the

Output/Reference Selection popup menu appears, as follows: popup menu.

-

Output/Reference

Popup Menu

Ref: Fixed f

Out ut Line

Popup Menu

0

0

0

0 1 l/Results

[7 2 l/Results

3 l/Results

4 l/Results

5 Z/Results

0 6 Z/Results q

7 Not Used

0 8 Not Used

0 9 Not Used

I

Define Features

Learn: 6 = n/a x=0 Y=O

Ref.Win 1: Enabled

+Ref. Window

Popup Menu i

Previous

Env.

Next

Camera A Ref. Line :&$$i/ q

12 Not Used

0 13 Not Used

0 14 Not Used

Gage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

No Output box in the

Output Line Selection menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that no output line is currently assigned to this reference window. Also note that you can pick only those output lines with a “Results” function shown in light type. All others are shown in black type, which indicates that you cannot pick them.

Pick the appropriate output If appropriate, pick one of the available output lines from line from the menu. the

Output Line Selection menu.

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: lines and Windows

6-73

Selecting Output/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Reference Popup Menu

Select the

Reference popup menu, if appropriate, then assign a reference tool to provide shift compensation to this reference window.

You can configure one reference window to receive shift compensation from another reference line or window, with the following restrictions:

Reference window # 1 can receive shift compensation only from a reference line.

Reference window #2 can receive shift compensation from a reference line, or shift and rotation compensation from reference window #l only.

Reference window #3 can receive shift compensation from a reference line, or shift and rotation compensation from reference window #l or #2.

Use the following steps to select a reference line for the currently selected reference line.

Your Action

Look at the Ref menu box in the Output/Reference popup menu.

Pick the

Ref menu box in the

Output/Reference menu.

Comments

The

Ref menu box shows the currently selected reference tool assigned to this reference line.

When you pick the

Ref menu box, the popup menu appears, as follows:

Reference

Output/Reference

Pbpup,Menu lo

Define Features

10 Ref.Win

1

1 c] Ref.Win2

0 Ref.Win 3

Learn: x=0

8 = n/a

Y=O

1 Ref.Win 1: Enabled

Previous Next

Env.

Ref. Window vopup

Camera A Ref. Line ~k$$i&

Menu

Gage Window Mist Exit

Chapter 6 Reference Tools: Lines and Windows

6-74

Selecting Output/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Reference Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Note that the

Fixed box in the

Reference menu has a shaded square (Cl). This indicates that a reference tool is not currently assigned to this reference window. Also note that only the available reference tools are in light type. All others are shown in pick them.

black

type, which indicates that you cannot

Pick the appropriate reference If appropriate, pick one of the available reference tools from tool from the menu. the

Reference menu.

-

-

Chapter

7

inspection

Took: Gages

Chapter Objectives

The objectives of this chapter are to explain gages and show you how they can be used, and then show you the procedures for configuring them. The chapter begins with a series of questions and answers about gages.

A Few Questions and

Answers About Gages

This section introduces you to gages by asking a few questions about them that might occur to you, and answering those questions.

What is a gage?

A gage is a one-dimensional image-analysis tool that inspects only the specific part of the workpiece image that it crosses.

What do these gages actually look for?

Gages look for edges. An edge is a point on a gage where a specified change occurs in the color of the pixels that make up the image of the workpiece.

How does a gage look for edges?

A gage searches along its length for specific edges on a workpiece. It begins at either end of the gage and proceeds to the other end, evaluating each pixel along the way.

How does a gage detect an edge?

It detects an edge when it sees a specified change in the color of the pixels: from black to white, from white to black, or from one specified shade of gray to another.

What kind of information can a gage get from edges?

By finding just one edge, a gage can calculate position information - it can tell where an edge is on a workpiece.

By finding two or more edges, it can measure distances between the edges. Or, it can simply count pixels between the edges, or just count the edges themselves.

What shapes can a gage have?

A gage has one of two shapes: straight (a linear gage), or circular (a circular gage).

What are the size, position, and angle limits of these two gage shapes?

A linear gage can be be any length and can be positioned at any angular orientation anywhere within the usable portion of the monitor screen.

A circular gage can be either a complete circle or a portion of a circle (an arc), of any radius, and can be positioned anywhere within the usable portion of the monitor screen.

(Note that the usable portion of the monitor screen will be reduced when the light probe status is set to “same field.“)

Chapter 7 Inspection Toolss: Gages

7-2

A Few Questions and

Answers About Gages

(continued)

How many gages are there?

The CVIM system provides 32 gages for each of the two tool sets, for a total of 64. Each gage can be either linear or circular.

What functions can a gage perform?

A gage’s function during each CVIM inspection cycle is one of these:

-

Measuring distances and angles using a circular gage.

Gages

This section provides you with the details of using and configuring both linear and circular gages.

Under the Using Linear Gages heading, you will see simple example applications in which the CVIM system uses a linear gage to find the level of a liquid in a bottle.

Under the Using Circular Gages heading, you will see example applications in which the CVIM system uses circular gages to count and measure the teeth on a gear.

Under the Configuring Gages heading, you will find out how to use the “user interface” - the light pen and the popup menus on the video monitor screen- to configure a gage.

_

Using Linear Gages

The following pages describe how you can use linear gages to detect and measure parts of a workpiece.

Linear gages can be set to any length within the camera’s field of view, and can be rotated to any angle.

In the following examples of using a linear gage to find the level of a liquid in a glass bottle, here are the assumptions:

The “workpiece” is a clear glass bottle filled with an opaque liquid, such as hand lotion.

A vertically-positioned linear gage will be used to measure the liquid level.

Shift compensation will not be used. (For information on shift compensation, see Chapter 6, Reference Tools: Lines and Windows.)

The overall objective in these examples is for the CVIM system to inspect every bottle for a correct fill level, and to reject all bottles that are not correctly filled.

-

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Using Linear Gages

Example 1: Figure 7.1 shows how an image of a correctly

(continued) filled bottle might look on the screen of your video monitor.

Figure 7.1 Linear Gage Configured to Measure Head-to-Edge r-- *

Linear Gage

‘%

<

‘X’ Indicates Location of Edge That Linear

Gage Finds at Liquid

Surface

Headof

Gage

Linear Ga e

Distance

\

Surfa ce c

Liql uid

Tail of

Gage

7-3

Since both the liquid and the bottle cap are opaque, they appear black when lighted from behind. Under the same backlighting conditions, the neck (above the liquid level) is likely to appear as a light shade of gray.

Figure 7.1 shows also how a linear gage might appear when it is positioned vertically over the bottle’s neck. In this example, the gage needs to be just long enough to detect the liquid surface within previously set range limits.

The function of the linear gage in this example is to find the single edge that represents the surface of the liquid in the bottle, then calculate the distance from its “head” to that edge.

When the gage finds that edge, it determines whether or not the distance to that edge (that is, the liquid level) is within the previously set range limits. If so, the inspection “passes”; if not, the inspection “fails.”

7-4

Chapter 7 inspection Tools:

Gages

Using Linear Gages

(con timed)

NOTE: Using the linear gage this way requires that each bottle be in a fixed position along the vertical axis, since the gage cannot differentiate between vertical variations in the bottle’s position and variations in the liquid level.

Example 2: Another way to measure the liquid level is to configure the linear gage to find the distance between two edges: the top of the cap (fixed), and the liquid surface

(variable). This is shown in Figure 7.2.

Figure 7.2 Linear Gage Configured to Measure Edge-to-Edge

Distance

Linear Gage

\i

‘X’ IndicatesLocation of Edge That Linear

Gage Finds at Liquid

Surface , I

‘X’ Indicates Location of Reference Edge at i 1. ,/Top of Bottle Cap

&i

Linear Ga e

Distance

Sl irface of Liquid

-

In this example, the gage should be long enough to measure the liquid level from the cap and to accommodate a certain amount of up-and-down bottle shift. Unlike Example 1, the range limits in this example apply only to the distance between the two edges; that is, their relative positions along the gage, not their absolute positions.

When the gage finds the two edges, it determines whether or not the distance between them (that is, the liquid level) is within the previously set range limits. If so, the inspection

“passes; if not, the inspection “fails,”

Chapter

7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-5

Using Linear Gages

If a particular bottle shifts down, as shown in Figure 7.3, but

(continued) the cap and liquid surface (the two edges) still lie somewhere along the gage, the gage will find the two edges, and the distance between the edges will then be calculated. (The same would be true if the bottle shifted up, so long as the cap and liquid surface still lie somewhere along the gage.)

If, however, one of the two edges lies beyond either end of the gage, an inspection failure will occur, since the distance calculation cannot be made.

Figure 7.3 Linear Gage Measuring Liquid Level on Shifted Bottle

*Ii;

:I..

. .

.

Lmear Gage

Distance

Measured on

Original Bottle

Original Position of Liquid Surface

Original -

Bottle Position

Shifted Position of Liquid Surface

-

Same Distance

Measured on

Shifted Bottle

Shift

Direction

Shifted -

Bottle Position

7-6

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Using Circular Gages

The following pages describe how you can use circular gages to detect and measure parts of a workpiece that are arranged in an arc or circle.

Circular gages can be set to any radius or to any number of degrees of arc up to 360 , so long as they remain within the screen image.

In the following examples of using a circular gage to find the number of teeth on a gear, here are the assumptions:

-

A circular gage, arranged in a full circle, will be used to count the teeth.

Shift compensation will not be used. (For information about shift compensation, see Chapter 6, Reference Tools:

Lines and Windows.)

The overall objective in these examples is for the CVIM system to inspect every gear for the correct number of teeth, and to reject all gears that have broken or missing teeth.

Example 1: Figure 7.4 shows how an image of a gear might look on your video monitor. Since the gear is opaque, it will appear black when lighted from behind.

Figure 7.4 shows also how a circular gage might appear when it is centered over the gear. In this example, the gage needs to be just, large enough to cross all 16 teeth at a point, where it can easily detect the two edges on each tooth.

The function of the circular gage in this example is simply to find the 32 edges that represent the 16 teeth. Note that the gear in Figure 7.4 would fail the inspection, since one of the teeth is missing, and material between two other teeth was not removed.

When the gage finds the edges, the CVIM system determines whether or not the number of edges (the number of teeth times two) is correct. If the number is 32, the inspection

“passes”; if not, the inspection “fails.”

NOTE: The circular gage in this example requires that each gear be in the same position during inspection. If the workpiece shifts more than the slightest amount, the result could be a failed inspection. (In a real application, if you expect, workpiece shift, you will probably need the shift compensation provided by one of the reference tools. See

Chapter 6, Reference Tools: Lines and Windows.)

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Using Circular Gages

(continued)

Fiqure 7.4 Circular Case Confiqured to Count Edqes or Pixels iroken or

Missina Tooth

/

Each Tooth Has

Two Edges and

(n) Pixels

7-7

360-Degree

Circu3r Gage

Partial

Tooth -

16-Tooth

Gear -

Material Not

Removed

.a.... x::::::

“‘.:.:.:-:.:;

Between Two

Teeth

Example 2: Another way to check for all 16 teeth is to have a circular gage count the black pixels (which come from the teeth) along its circumference. The idea here is that if all 16 teeth are present, the circular gage will detect a specific number of black pixels, plus or minus some small tolerance.

In this example, if a tooth is missing, the black pixel count would be below the previously set lower range limit. If material were present between two teeth, the black pixel count would be above the upper range limit. In either case, the inspection would fail.

Note that if a tooth is missing and material is present between two teeth, as shown in Figure 7.4, the inspection may puss, especially if the range limits are too “loose.” Thus using a circular gage this way should probably be limited to a situation in which only one or the other condition is likely to occur.

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-8

Using Circular Gages

Example 3: In this inspection example, a series of circular

(continued) gages will measure the width of each tooth. This inspection will detect any gears with flaws that may pass the inspection in Example 1 or 2.

In this example, you would configure 16 circular gages, one for each tooth. Figure 7.5 shows five of these gages.

Note that circular gage #l would find no edges. Gages #2 and #3 would each find only one edge. Gage #4 would find two edges, but the width would be below the lower range limit. The teeth would fail the inspections of all of these gages.

Only the gage #5, the one over the normal tooth, would find two edges and a normal width. To pass inspection of this gage, the tooth width would have to be between the upper and lower range limits.

Figure 7.5 Circular Gages Configured to Measure Width of a Tooth

-

Broken or

Cir 3....:,:&

.:.:.~:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:’

7.Y .

.

.

.A....

.

.

.I

. i... .

:.:.:.-:.:.:.x+

.:.:.:.:.:.:,<,;

;;f$gg

::::::::::::~:::::)i:~:~:i:~~~~~::::::::.:.:.:.:.:,..

~:~:::i:Xf:::j::.:jaj::::::::::a8:g::~~~ lilLi~~~~~~~lsl:iEw’

:i.:::::wj::::j:::::::.::::i:::.:~,

.i

.A.

/Circular Gage #2

Between Two

Teeth

Circular Gage #3

16-Tooth

Gear

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-9

Configuring Gages

In configuring gages you will pick the configuration categories in the Gage popup menu, which appears when you pick Gage from the Main Configuration menu.

These are the main function and configuration categories in the Gage popup menu:

Gage definition: Sets the gage position and length; selects the gage shape, operation, and gaging mode (binary or gray scale); and defines all edges.

Gage features: Selects the specific edges (“features”) to be used for each gage.

Select range limits, output lines, reference tool:

Selects the operating range limits that determine a “pass” or

“fail” result; selects the output line for reporting inspection results; selects a reference tool from which to receive shift compensation.

Learn gage measurements: This function “learns” the distance between edges, the number of edges, the number of pixels, or the number of objects, whichever gage operation you have selected.

Select gage number: This function selects the gage number (1 to 32).

Enable/disable gage: This function enables or disables the currently selected gage.

Configuring a gage involves these basic steps:

Selecting the gage number (1 to 32).

Selecting either a binary or gray scale image in which to search for edges.

Selecting the gage operation: count black pixels, count edges, make linear measurement, and so on.

Positioning and sizing the gage(s) over the workpiece image, and identifying the edges.

The following pages show you how to perform all of the steps that configure gages. To save time, you should perform these steps in the order given.

7-10

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Selecting Gage P;z,ut,

Your first step is to select the Gage popup menu.

Your Action Comments

Pick Gage in the Main When you pick the Gage menu box, the Gage popup menu

Configuration menu. appears above the Main Configuration menu, as follows:

-

““‘“:I+ Gage

Popup Menu

Gage 1: Enabled

Previous Next

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gz& Window Mist Exit

The Gage popup menu shows the six configuration categories described earlier.

In addition to the Gage popup menu, if the currently selected gage is enabled, as shown above, it will appear somewhere on - the monitor screen.

Selecting and Enabling Gage

Select the gage number and enable the gage.

Your Action

Look at the Gage menu box in the Gage popup menu.

Comments

The Gage menu box indicates the currently selected gage number (1 to 32). It also indicates whether that gage isenabled or disabled.

Select the gage number. To change the gage number, pick the

Next

(or

Previous) menu box repeatedly until the correct number appears.

Look at the Gage menu box again.

Pick the

Gage menu box.

The

Next and

Previous functions work like this: When you pick the

Next box, the next higher gage number appears: 1,2,

3

. .32,1,2,3, and so on. When you pick the

Previous box, the next lower gage number appears: 3,2,1,32 . . .3,2,1, and so on.

If the gage status is

Disabled, perform the next step.

When you pick the

Gage menu box, the status will changeto

Enabled.

(To disable the gage again, pick the box again.)

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools:

Gages

Selecting Define Gage

Select the

Define Gage popup menu, then select the

Popup Menu and parameters in that menu.

Parameters

Your Action Comments

Pick the Define Gage

When you pick the

Define Gage menu box, the

Define menu box in the

Gage Gage popup menu appears above the Gage popup menu, popup menu. as follows:

7-11

Define Gage

Popup Menu

Define Edges 0.0

Define Features

Range/Reference

Learn: Nominal =

0.000 Pixels

0.0 moo t Gage

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win iGage : Window Mist Exit

Selecting Gage Shape

Pick the

Shape menu box to select either a linear or a circular gage, whichever is appropriate for your application.

Your choice of gage shape depends on the shape of the workpiece at the point where you want the gage to inspect it.

Your Action

Look at the in

Shape menu box the

Define Gage popup menu.

Pick the

Shape menu box, if appropriate, to select

Linear or Circular.

Comments

The

Shape menu box shows whether the currently selected gage is

Linear or Circular.

If the shape indicated is the one you want, skip the next step.

If necessary, pick the

Shape menu box to toggle to the other gage shape. A gage of the selected shape will appear somewhere on the monitor screen. (To change back to the previous shape, pick the box again.)

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-12

Selecting Define Gage Selecting Operation Popup Menu

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Select the

Op menu box, then select one of eight operations for a linear gage, or ten operations for a circular gage, as follows:

1. Count the number of Lvhite pixels along the length of the

SW*

2. Count the number of black pixels along the length of the gage-

3. Count the number of white objects along the length of the w w

4.

Count the number of black objects along the length of the mF*

5. Count the number of edges along the length of the gage.

6. Measure the linear distance between two specific edges

(“features”) on a linear or circular gage. Measurements are stated in inches, centimeters, or pixels, according to how you configured the

Units menu in Chapter 4,0 eruting

Environment (under

Env. in the Main Con lguration menu).

7. Report the X coordinate Eocution of the active feature. The location is stated in pixels, inches, or centimeters, according to how you configured the

Units menu in Chapter 4,

Operating Environment (under

Env. in the Main

Configuration menu).

8. Report the Y coordinate locution of the active feature. The location is stated in pixels, inches, or centimeters, according to how you configured the

Units menu in Chapter 4,

Operating Environment (under

Env. in the Main

Configuration menu).

9. Measure the ungZe between the implied center of a circular gage and two specific edges on the gage.

10. Measure the angle between a line drawn through two specific edges on a circular gage and the X axis of the screen image.

Your choice of gage operation depends on whichever gage operation is appropriate for your application.

NOTE: The first four operations are not available when the gaging mode is set to

Gray Scale.

The last two operations are not available when the gage shape is set to

Linear.

Your Action Comments

Look at the Op menu box in the

Define Gage

The

Op menu box indicates the currently selected gage operation. If this is the gage operation you want, skip gage popup menu. operation selection and continue instead with gaging mode selection.

,-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-73

Selecting Define Gage Selecting Operation Popup Menu (continued)

Popup

Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Op menu box. When you pick the

Op menu box, the

Operation popup menu will appear, as follows:

Define Gage

Popup Menu

1

Shape: Linear

Gaging Mode

:

Qp;. Ljifjir +&@

Pick & Place

Define Edqes moo

:;.

.:;tLJ

..a

0 #White Pixels

0 #Black Pixels q

Obj’s

0 #Black Obj’s

0 #Edges

: :

-Operation

Popup Menu

Previous

Env.

Next

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win !G-a&

. .

Window Mist Exit

Note that the

Linear Gaging box in the

Operation popup menu has a shaded square (a). This indicates that

Linear

Gaging is the currently selected gage operation.

Pick the appropriate If you pick a different gage operation menu box, a message gage operation from the will appear above the

Operation menu, as follows:

Operation popup menu.

WARNING: Selectin result in the a new tool operation will nomina ? , range, and statistical values being set to zero. Reselect to confirm.

This message asks you to verify that you really want to change the tool operation. If so, pick the same gage operation menu box again.

Pick the same gage operation When you pick the same menu box again, the new selection menu box again. will be highlighted in the

Operation popup menu and will appear in the

Op menu box.

7-14

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Selecting Define

Gage

Selecting Gaging Mode Popup Menus

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Select the

Gaging Mode menu box, then select the gaging mode

(Binary or Gray Scale).

NOTE: Selecting

Gray Scale enab2es selecting the sub pixel functions; selecting

Binary disables selecting the sub pixel functions.

The

Binary gaging mode changes pixels in the screen image to two states, white and black. The only pixels changed are those that directly surround the gage in a box called the

“area of interest.” The CVIM system examines only these pixels when processing a gage

The binary gaging mode is most appropriate when the workpiece has a sharp black-and-white contrast with its background, such as when it is backlighted. This mode is also appropriate when maximum precision is not needed for linear measurements.

The

Gray Scale gaging mode does not affect the pixels surrounding the gage -they remain in their original state, in which they can have any one of 64 shades of gray.

The gray scale gaging mode is most appropriate when the workpiece has less contrast with its background, such as when it is frontlighted. This gaging mode is appropriate because features on the workpiece may appear in the screen image as varying shades of gray, and the binary gaging mode may not enable you to identify a stable edge location on these features.

The gray scale gaging mode is also appropriate when you need greater precision in linear measurements, especially when used with the

Sub Pixel function.

As noted earlier, the

Sub Pixel function is available on2y with the gray scale gaging mode. It enables a gage to detect an edge when that edge does not lie on a pixel boundary. The sub pixel function interpolates gray scale values along the edge to find a more accurate location for that edge within a pixel.

Two advantages of using the sub pixel function are:

1. The gage measurement is more accurate, since the accuracy is no longer limited by the size of a pixel.

2. The gage measurement is more repeatable, since the edge is not likely to “dither” back and forth between two pixels.

The disadvantage is a small increase in computation time.

-

.-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-15

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Gaging Mode Popup Menus (continued)

The Sub

Pixel function enables you to widen. a gage from one pixel to three or five pixels. The extra width enables a gage to analyze a small “neighborhood” of pixels on each side and thereby reduce the effects of an uneven or “noisy” edge.

The function averages gray scale values along each side of a gage. When the gage encounters an edge, it can then find a more accurate location for that edge. The function is particularly useful when a gage crosses an edge at right angles and the edge is uneven or serrated.

The disadvantage is an increase in computation time.

Use the following steps to select the gaging mode and associated functions.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Gaging Mode menu When you pick the

Gaging Mode menu box, two menus box in the

Define Gage appear alongside the first two popup menus, as follows: popup menu.

Define Gage

Popup Menu

I

Shape: Linear

1

I

\

J

Gaging Mode

Popup Menus

I

Pick & Place

0 1 Pixel

0 3 Pixels

[7 5 Pixels

I

I

1 Range/Reference

Learn: Nominal =

0.000 Pixels

0.0 1

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Window Mist Exit

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-16

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Gaging Mode Popup Menus (continued)

Your Action

Pi& Binary OF Gray Scale from the

Gaging Mode menu.

Ifyoupicked pick 1 from the

Pixel

Gray Scale,

OF Disabled

Sub Pixel menu.

Pick the 3 Pixels OF 5 Pixels if that is appropriate for your application.

Comments

Note that the

Gray Scale and

Disabled boxes in the gaging mode popup menus each have a shaded square (0). This indicates the current gaging mode configuration for the currently selected gage.

Your choice of a

Binary or

Gray Scale gaging mode depends, in part, upon the type and direction of lighting you are using to illuminate your workpiece.

Your choice of

1 Pixel or

Disabled depends upon whether your gage application is performing measurements and requires maximum accuracy. If so, pick 1 Pixel.to enable the

Sub Pixel function using a one-pixel-wide gage.

If your gage application is performing measurements, and one or both edges that the gage uses is rough or serrated, pick

3 Pixels or

5 Pixels.

Try

3 Pixels first. If that doesn’t work well enough, pick

5 Pixels.

Using

Pick & Place Function

Select the

Pick & Place menu box, then position the gage over the workpiece and set the gage’s size and orientation.

The following procedure has examples that show you how to use the light pen to manipulate a linear gage. A subsequent example shows how to manipulate a circuZar gage.

Each example includes these basic steps:

Positioning a gage over the part of the workpiece that you want the gage to inspect.

Setting the gage to the appropriate length, size, and orientation.

The example in the next several steps configures a linear gage vertically over a rectanglular workpiece, starting with the horizontal linear gage below. (The same steps apply regardless of the gage’s initial position.)

-

-

,-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools:

Gages

7- 17

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Pick & Place menu box in the

Define Gage popup menu.

Use the following steps to position the linear gage and set its length.

Comments

When you pick the

Pick

&

Place line, a small square (0) will appear in the center and at each end of the gage:

.-

.*

- -

Aim the light pen at the center handle.

These squares are the “handles” that the light pen uses to manipulate the gage.

Aim the light pen at the center handle until the light pen

“sees” the handle. You may have to move the light pen around slightly.

When the light pen sees the handle, a larger “highlight” square will surround the handle, as follows:

Pick the handle.

Drag the gage to the center of the workpiece.

Hold the pen steady in this position -the appearance of the highlight square means that the light pen is now properly aimed at the handle.

You can now “drag” the gage across the screen. When you move the pen, the entire gage will follow.

.._

. . .._

. . . . . .

. . . . .

;~~~~~~‘~.‘~~~~~.~~.~~~~~~~~~.~~~j~~~~’~~~’~~~~~‘~~~~“~~.~~”~~..‘~.~..,~;

‘._.’

. .z .

.

.

.

. . .

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-18

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

Aim the light pen at the rightmost handle.

Comments

NOTE: Keep the tip of the pen within about one-half inch of the screen.

When you have the gage centered over the workpiece, press the pen against the screen to “lock” the gage at that position.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

-

Pick the handle.

Drag the right end of the gage above the workpiece.

Lock the gage end in position above the workpiece.

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and k%rJmeters (continued)

Your Action Comments

Aim the light pen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. leftmost handle.

7-19

Pick the handle.

Drag the left end of the gage below the workpiece.

Lock the gage end in position below the workpiece. l l

.

.

.

.

.

IL

.

.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-20

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Pick & Place function (continued)

Your Action

If necessary, use the vernier arrows to “fine-tune” the position of the gage or gage end.

Comments

You can position the gage or gage end more precisely by using the vernier arrows. These arrows enable you to move the gage or gage end in increments of one pixel.

Press and hold the light pen tip again-he gage handle, gage, or gage end.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a gage handle or placing a gage or gage end.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the screen:

VERNIER ARROWS

-

-

Move ga

8 e, or

%KneFfiA,u~~ ri$ht

Pick an arrow once to moue the gage orgage end one pixel in the arrow’s direction.

Pick and hold an arrow to move the gage or gage end continuously.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

Pick the up, down, right, or left arrow, as appropriate, to move the gage or gage end one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the gage or gage end will move slowly for the first five or six pixels. It will then accelerate to a more rapid rate of movement.

When the gage or gage end is properly positioned, pick the

“return” symbol (4 1 to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

At this point, you will have completed adjusting the gage’s position and length so that it intersects the upper and lower edges on the workpiece.

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-27

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

If you selected the circular gage shape, you will need to know how the

Pick

&

Place symbols are used to manipulate a circular gage. Starting with the following circular gage . . .

X

<I-

. . . note that the letter X always appears at the implied center of the circle, regardless of the number of degrees in the circular gage:

When you pick the

Pick

&

Place menu box, “handles” (0) will appear as follows:

Less Than

180”

More Than

180”

7-22

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools:

Gages

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place function

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Note that there are four

(continued) handles, as follows:

One handle is at the head of the gage.

One handle is at the tail of the gage.

One handle is at the midpoint of the gage.

For gages of less than 180”, a “center” handle is at the midpoint of a chord joining the head and tail.

For gages of more than 180”, a “center” handle is over the X at the implied center of the gage.

When you selected

Pick

&

Place

(after selecting the circular gage shape), the

Mode popup menu appeared on the screen as follows:

1 Shape: Circular

Gaging Mode 0.0

I

1 Define Edges

Mode

Popup Menu

I

Gage 1: Enabled

I

Previous Next

Env.

0 Fixed Ends

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win :G?g+: Window Mist Exit

Note that the

Fixed Center box in the

Mode popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that

Fixed Center is the currently selected pick-and-place mode for the midpoint handle.

The

Mode menu determines the operation of the midpoint handle on the circular gage.

Fixed Center causes the center “X” to remain fixed when you move the midpoint handle. As you move the handle toward the center X, the radius of the gage decreases. As you move the handle away from the X, the radius increases. The number of degrees in the circular gage remains constant in both cases.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-23

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Para fne ters (con timed)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Fixed Ends causes the two ends of the circular gage to remain fixed when you move the midpoint handle. As you move the handle toward the center X, the number of degrees in the circular gage decreases. As you move the handle away from the X, the number of degrees in the circular gage increases.

The general procedure for moving and sizing circular gages is the same as for linear gages. The main difference is that with a circular gage, you set both the degrees of arc (up to

360 degrees) and the length of the radius.

In the following pick-and-place procedure, the “workpiece” is a speedometer. The procedure shows how you could configure a circular gage to measure the position of a speedometer pointer, starting with the following circular gage:

X

The idea is to determine whether the pointer is acceptably close to “60” while the speedometer is operating on a test fixture.

Your Action

Pi& the Fixed Center node for the midpoint handle.

Aim the light pen at the

“center” handle.

Comments

Aim the light pen at the “center” handle until the light pen

“sees” the handle. You may have to move the light pen around slightly.

When the light pen sees the handle, a larger “highlight” square will surround the handle, as follows:

X /‘Center” handle

Hold the pen steady in this position-the appearance of the “highlight” square means that the light pen is now properly aimed.

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-24

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Your Action

Pick the “center” handle.

Drag the gage so that the center “X” lies ouer the pointerpivot, as shown.

Comments

You can now “drag” the entire gage around on the screen.

When you move the pen, the gage follows.

NOTE: Keep the tip of the light pen within about one- half inch of the screen.

When you have the gage in position over the workpiece, press the pen against the screen to “lock” the gage at that position.

Aim the lightpen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. midpoint handle.

X

Midpoint handle

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-25

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Your Action Comments

Drag the gage to the position Initially, the gage should intersect the “0” and

“120” index shown in the figure. marks as shown in the figure.

Lock the gage in position as shown in the figure.

Aim the light pen at the leftmost handle.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

X

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-26

Selecting

Define Gage

Using

Pick

&

Place

Function

(continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Comments Your Action

Pick the handle.

Drag the leftmost end of the gage until it crosses the pointer as shown.

Lock the gage end in position as shown in the figure.

Aim the lightpen at the rightmost handle.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

X q

-

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Comments Your Action

Pick the handle.

Drag the rightmost end of the gage to the position shown.

7-27

Lock the gage end in position as shown in the figure.

The circular gage is now positioned to detect edges at the “0” index mark and the speedometer pointer.

The preceding steps made use of the

Fixed Center mode to manipulate the midpoint handle. In this case, you expanded the radius while maintaining the center position.

Use the following steps to familiarize yourself with the midpoint handle using the

Fixed Ends mode.

Pick the

Fixed Ends menu box in the

Mode menu.

Pick the “help” icon. The “help” icon looks like this:

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-28

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Your Action Comments

When you pick the “help” icon, the message box will appear in the upper-left corner of the monitor screen:

Head Location: x = 369,

Tail Location: x=376, y = 126 y= 75

Origin: x = 399, y=102 Radius:49

Aim the lightpen at the midpoint handle.

The numbers indicate the circular gage’s current position and size: the X- and Y-axis coordinates of the gage’s head, tail, and center (“origin”), and the gage’s radius in pixels (as measured along the X axis).

These numbers may be useful to you in setting the gage’s radius when you use the midpoint handle.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

X

Pick the midpoint handle.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Comments Your Action

Drag the gage’s midpoint downward, as shown.

7-29

Note how the gage’s position and size have changed.

Note also that the midpoint handle can move

only

in a direction that is

perpendicular

to a line drawn through the two gage ends, as shown below. This is true regardless of the orientation of the ends.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-30

Selecting Define Gage Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Comments Your Action

Drag the gage’s midpoint upward as shown.

-

When you are finished, lock the gage in place.

.

.

.

.

.

‘.

‘.

‘.

‘.

‘_

. .

I.

. .

. . .

‘..

‘._

. . . .

. ..___

.

,.-,..

.

..i

‘...I

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

__... ‘.

. ..’

_:.

:

_’

,’

,.’

,.’

-

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-3 1

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Pick & Place Function (continued)

Your Action

If necessary, use the vernier arrows to “fine-tune” the position or size of the gage.

Press and hold the light pen tip against the gage handle, gage, or gage end.

Comments

You can change the gage’s size or position more precisely by using the vernier arrows. The vernier arrows enable you to make these changes in small increments.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a gage handle or placing the gage or gage end.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the screen:

VERNIER ARROWS

Move entire age up, down, le t, or right

1 1

Move gage end

CW or CCW.

Increase or decrease gage arc and radius.

Pick an arrow once to move the entire gage one pixel in the arrow’s direction.

If you picked the “center” handle,

The up, down, right,, or left arrow, will move the entire gage one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Pick an arrow once to move the gage end CW or CCW.

Pick an arrow once to change the gage radius and arc.

Pick and hold an arrow to change the gage size or position continuously.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows. or, if you picked a gage-end handle,

The right arrow will move the gage end clockwise (CW); the left arrow will move the gage end counterclockwise (CCW). or, if you picked the “midpoint” handle,

The right arrow will increase the number of degrees in the arc; the left arrow will decrease the arc. At, the same time, the radius length will change.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the gage’s size or position will change slowly for the first five or six increments. It will then change at a more rapid rate.

When the gage or gage end is properly positioned, pick the

“return” symbol (4) to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-32

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges function: Binary Gaging Mode

Pick the

Define Edges menu box, then perform the threshold adjustments in order to determine the edge(s) that the gage will be using to measure the workpiece.

If you selected the

Gray Scale gaging mode, go to the section called Using Define Edges Function: Gray Scale Gaging

Mode.

Use the following steps for setting the threshold if you selected the

Binary gaging mode.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Define Edges menu box in the

Define Gage

If you have selected the the

Define Edges

Binary gaging mode, when you pick menu box, the

Filter popup menu and popup menu. slide bar appear on the monitor screen, as follows:

-

4

Shape: Linear

Gaging Mode

Op: Linear Gaging 0.0

Pick & Place 0.0

~Defin~Edges .: : ;: &j

4 Define Gage

Popup Menu

Define Features

Filter __,

Popup Menu

Range/Reference

Learn: Nominal =

0.000 Pixels

Gage 1: Enabled

Previous Next

3 Pixels

Env.

I I

-

1 Camera A 1 Ref. Line

I

Ref. Win

;.

::

Window

I

Mist

I

I

Exit

I

Slide

Bar’

4’

F

-

H

I

T

H

R

E

S

H

0

L

D

L ul

. r:’

Also on the monitor screen, a small “X” will appear along the gage wherever it “sees” an edge. As shown above, the gage sees two edges on the circular workpiece.

If no X’s appear, or if too many X’s appear, you will need to adjust the threshold cursors and possibly set some value of white or black pixel filtering.

-

-

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools:

Gages

7-33

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Gaging Mode

(continued)

Your Action

Look at the threshold cursors on each side of the slide bar.

Pick &cursor.

Drag the left cursor to its topmostposition.

Pick and drag the right cursor to its bottommost position.

Pick the &cursor again and drag it downward.

Comments

The cursors on each side of the slide bar are the principal means by which you will define “edges” (that is, transitions) that occur along the gage. The gage lies entirely within a box called the “area of interest.” This box contains the binarized image. All parts of the image outside the box remain in gray scale form.

The cursors’ positions along the slide bar represent image brightness values from 1 to 63, with 63 at the top and 1 at the bottom.

Think of the left cursor this way: Any part of the binary image area having a higher brightness value (that is, lighter) than the value indicated by the cursor’s current setting will appear black in the binary image. For example, if the cursor is set to a brightness value of 45, then all parts of the binary image having brightness values higher than 45 will appear black.

Think of the right cursor this way: Any part of the binary image area havin a lower brightness value (that is, darker) than the value in icated by the cursor’s current setting will appear black in the binary image. For example, if the cursor is set to a brightness value of 27, then all parts of the binary image having brightness values lower than 27 will appear black.

Thus, all parts of the binary image having a brightness value between the current settings of the two cursors will appear white. In the examples above, all parts of the binary image having brightness values from 27 to 45 will appear white; all other parts will appear black.

Aim the light pen at the cursor. When you see a red box around the cursor, pick the cursor. This causes the cursor to turn yellow, indicating that you can now “drag” the cursor up or down.

This initializes the left cursor to the “63” brightness value.

This initializes the right cursor to the “1” brightness value.

Drag the left cursor downward until those parts of the binary image that you want to be white start to turn black.

Then, drag the cursor up slightly until those same areas just change to white again.

As you drag the cursor up and down, an X will appear along the gage wherever an edge (binary transition) is detected.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-34

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Gaging Mode

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the right cursor again and drag it upward.

Alternately pick and drag each cursor until a stable X appears at each required edge.

Look at the

Filter menu.

Pick the

White or

Black menu box in the

Filter popup menu.

Comments

Drag the right cursor upward until those parts of the binary image that you want to be black just turn black.

As you drag the cursor up and down, an X will appear along the gage wherever an edge (binary transition) is detected.

Your objective is to produce a stable X at each edge that the gage must “see” in your application. Other X’s may also appear along the gage; however, you can configure the system to recognize only the X’s at the required edges.

Try various positions of the two cursors to produce the most stable X’s.

Trial and observation is the correct procedure for setting the binary threshold.

If white or black “noise” in the image prevents you from gettin stable X’s at the desired edges, try using white or black altering.

In the

Filter menu, the filled-in square (0) shows the currently selected filter level. This determines the number of consecutive black or white “noise” pixels that will be removed (filtered) before the gage looks for the edges.

Black or

White determines which color of pixel should be considered “noise.”

The filter, in effect, masks out the “noise” pixels so that they don’t create false edges.

For example, if the filter menu is set to White and 3

Pixels, and the gage encounters three (or fewer) consecutive white pixels in a stream of black pixels, these white pixels are removed (filtered out), and no edge is detected.

If, on the other hand, the gage encounters four (or more) consecutive white pixels, an edge is detected (actually, two edges will be detected - a leading edge and a trailing edge - if the gage crosses through the string of white pixels).

Your objective is to set the filter to a level that removes enough visual “noise” from the binary image to prevent the gage from detecting false edges.

This menu box “toggles” between

White and

Black when you pick it repeatedly. Select

White to filter out small white noise, or select

Black to filter out small black noise.

Chapter 7 hspection Tools: Gages

7-35

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Binary Gaging Mode

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate filter value from the

Filter menu.

Comments

If your application does not need filtering, pick 0

Pixels.

Otherwise, try various values of filtering to get the cleanest binary image and stable X’s at the required edges.

As is the case in setting the binary threshold, trial and observation is appropriate here. You may want to try several filter settings to see which one is best for your particular application.

Using Define Edges Function: Gray Scale Gaging Mode

Use the following steps for setting the threshold/scale if you selected the gray scale gaging mode.

Pick the

Define Edges menu box in the

Define Gage

If you have selected the pick the

Define Edges

Gray Scale gaging mode, when you menu box, the slide bar appears popup menu. on the monitor screen, as follows:

Third Edge

Linear Gage

Shaoe: Linear

Range/Reference 0.0

I

Learn: Nominal = I

Previous

Env.

Next

:.:. :.

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win ~@g$: Window

-

Mist

4

‘Fourth Edge

.::

CD

Left

Cursor

/

Slide

Bar’

T

H

0

L

H

R

E

S

D

I

S

C

A

L

5

Right/

Cursor b

-

Exit

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-36

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Gray Scale Gaging Mode

(con timed)

Your Action

Look at the cursors on each side of the slide bar.

Pick the leftcursor.

Drag the left cursor to its bottommost position.

Pick and drag the right cursor to its bottommost position.

Pick the right cursor again and drag it upward.

Comments

Also on the monitor screen, an “X” will appear along the gage wherever it “sees” an edge. As shown above, the gage sees four edges on the circular workpiece.

If no X’s appear, or if too many X’s appear, you will need to adjust the threshold/scale cursors.

The cursors on each side of the slide bar are the principal means by which you will define the gray scale image in which the “edges” (that is, the transitions) occur along the

@%e-

The left cursor represents the current setting of the “gradient threshold.” This setting determines the minimum change in brightness value that must occur, within the number ofpixels indicated by the scale factor, before the CVIM system can

“detect” an edge.

When the left cursor is at its lowest position, it selects a gradient threshold value of 0.00. This indicates that any change in brightness value will cause the system to detect an edge. When the cursor is at its highest position, it selects a gradient threshold value of 63.00. This indicates that the system will detect an edge only when the change in brightness value is 63.

The right cursor represents the current setting of the “scale factor.“This setting determines the number of consecutive pixels that the CVIM system examines to determine whether or not an edge (transition) exists. Note that the larger values of scale factor increase processing time.

When the right cursor is at its lowest position, it selects the smallest scale factor (2); and when the cursor is at its highest position, it selects the largest scale factor (41).

Aim the light pen at the cursor. When you see a red box around the cursor, pick the cursor. This causes the cursor to turn yellow, indicating that you can now “drag” the cursor up and down.

This initializes the left cursor to the “0.00” gradient threshold.

This initializes the right cursor to the “2” scale factor.

At this point, many X’s (“edges”) may appear along the gage.

Drag the cursor upward until the X’s at the desired edges are in good, stable locations. Many edges may still be present along the gage.

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-37

Selecting Define Gage

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Define Edges Function: Gray Scale Gaging Mode

(con timed)

Your Action

Pick the left cursor again anti! drag it upward.

Alternately pick and drag each cursor until stable X’s appears at the required edges.

Comments

Drag the cursor upward until you remove as many of the unwanted X’s as possible without losing the X’s at the required edges of your workpiece.

Your objective is to produce stable X’s at the required edges, which are the edges that the gage must “see” in your application. Other X’s may persist along the gage -you may not be able to eliminate of all extraneous X’s. If you are using the linear gaging, wedge angle, or chord angle gaging operations, you can configure the system to recognize only the X’s at the two required edges.

Using trial and observation, try various positions of the two cursors to produce the most stable X’s at the required edges.

-

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the

Define Features popup menu, then select the parameters in that menu. Basically, these parameters enable you to specify which edges (or midpoints) are to be used for the gage measurements and the direction of the search for these edges.

NOTE: This popup menu is active only for the linear gaging, wedge angle, and chord angle operations.

Your Action

Pick the

Define Features menu box in the

Gage popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Define Features menu box, the

Define

Features popup menu appears above the Gage popup menu, as follows:

I

Offset: 1 .O

I

[Active Feature: A

I

Define Gage 0.0

: :,: ,:: jj: :: ; .): ; i . . ::. :

:.fJefin* F&$&.tsgis ; -&f

Range/Reference 0.0

Learn: Nominal =

0.000 Pixels t

Gage 1: Enabled

Previous Next

Env.

Gage

Popup Menu

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win .6&: Window Mist Exit

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-38

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(con timed)

Notice also the letters A and B somewhere on the gage.

Initially, A will appear at the edge nearest the head of the gage, and B will appear at the edge nearest the tail of the gage. Or, if the gage sees no edges, A will be at the head and

B will be at the tail of the gage.

In all cases, A identifies the edge (or midpoint) location for

“active feature” A, and B identifies the edge (or midpoint) location for “active feature” B. The gage performs its measurement operation from A to

B.

The next several pages contain the procedures for configuring an active feature, namely:

Selecting either A or B as the active feature to be configured at this time. You must configure A and B separately.

Selecting a search direction for the each active feature. You can select the same or different directions for A and B.

Selecting a search mode for each active feature. The search mode determines which edges A and B will examine during the edge search operation. You can select the same or different modes for A and B.

Selecting the appropriate “offset” for each active feature - the edge (or midpoint) location for A and B.

-

Selecting Active Feature

This function selects either A or B as the current active feature. Each must be configured separately.

Your Action

Look at the

Active Feature menu box in the

Define

Features popup menu.

Pick the

Active Feature menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Active Feature menu box indicates the active feature

(A or B) that is currently selected for configuration.

When you pick the

Active Feature box, the “active feature” will toggle to the other letter. Thus, A will change to B, or vice versa.

Selecting Search Direction

Select the direction in which active feature A (or B) will search for the specified edges.

Your Action

Look at the

Dir menu box in the

Define Features popup menu.

Pick the

Dir menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Dir menu box shows the currently selected direction that active feature A (or B) will use to search for edges. The direction can be either

Head to Tail or

Tail to Head.

When you pick the

Dir menu box, the search direction toggles to the opposite direction. Thus,

Head to

Tail will change to

Tail to Head, or vice versa.

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-39

Selecting Define Features Selecting Search Direction (continued)

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

‘four Action Comments

NOTE: The best search direction is the one in which the active feature is the least likely to encounter a false edge, as follows:

If thfse are to be the measurement edges. . .

. . . the search direction should be Head-to-Tail

Select the appropriate search direction for the current active feature.

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu

Select the 5.

Mode popup menu, then select one of four modes by which active feature A (or B) will search for edges:

1. Search for all edges along the length of the gage.

2. Search only for the edges of the largest white object along the gage. (This is not available with the gray scale gaging mode.)

3. Search onl?, for the edGes of the largest black object along thidyr.(Thls 1s not available with the gray scale gaging

4. Search onZy for the edges of the largest object along the gage -

Your Action

Look at the S. Mode menu box in the Define Features popup menu.

Comments

The S.

Mode menu box shows the currently selected mode for searching for edges along the gage.

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-40

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the 5.

Mode

When you pick the S.

Mode menu box, the

Search Mode menu box. popup menu will appear on the right side of the screen, as follows:

Offset: 1 .O

Define Gage l Define Features

Popup Menu

Search Mode

Popup Menu

I

-

Learn: Nominal =

0.000 Pixels t Gage

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win ~&q& Window Mist Exit

Note that the

All Edges box in the

Search Mode popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that

All Edges is the currently selected edge search mode.

These are the four edge-search modes in the

Search Mode popup menu:

1.

All Edges:

This search mode causes the active feature to search for all edges, all midpoints between edges, and the starting end of the gage.

2. and 3.

Max VV. Object: or

Max B. Object:

These search modes cause the active feature to search for one edge and the midpoint between edges of the largest white (or black) object along a gage. These modes are valid only with the binary gaging mode.

4. Max Object:

This search mode causes the active feature to search for one edge and the midpoint of the largest object between two consecutive edges along the gage.

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-4 1

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(con timed)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

The examples in the following figures show the effects of different combinations of search mode, binary or gray scale mode, and search direction.

In Example #l, the active feature searches the head

(“fixed”), the point between the first and last edge (“center”), and all edges and midpoints between adjacent edges.

Example #l

Mode: Binary

Search Direction: Head-to-Tail

Search Mode: All Edges

*Midpoi int ;: I:,‘.‘;::: *Midpoint

. . .

: : j ‘,.

. ..” : . .

*The small white squares in this figure enable showing the midpoint locations of the black objects. They are not “holes” in the workpiece.

In Example #2, as in example #l, the active feature searches for the tail (“fixed”), the point between the first and last edge (“center”), and all edges and midpoints between adjacent edges.

I Example #2

Grav Scale I

Search Direction: TailIto-Head I

All Edges

I

Chapter 7 Inspection

Tools:

Gages

7-42

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

In Example #3, the active feature will search only for the edge at the head side of the largest black object and the midpoint between the two edges of that object.

Mode:

Example #3

Binary

Search Direction: Head-to-Tail

Search Mode: Max. Black Object

. . j;

In Example #4, the active feature will search only for the edge at the heud side of the largest white object and the midpoint between the two edges of that object.

Example #4

Mode: Binary

Search Direction: Head-to-Tail

Search Mode: Max. White Object

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(con timed)

Selecting 5. Mode Popup Menu (continued)

In Example #5, the active feature will search only for the edge at the tail side of the largest object (the largest white object in example #4) and the midpoint between the two edges of that object.

Example #5 I

Mode:

Search Direction: Taillto-Head I

Search Mode:

Gray Scale I

Max. Object I

7-43

-

Pick the edge-search mode that is appropriate for your application.

Using Offset Function

Use the

Offset function to accurately identify and assign two specific edges (or midpoints) as the references for performing the linear or angular measurement.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Offset menu box The

Offset menu box shows the current location of the in the

Define Features

“active feature” as a number whose value indicates how far popup menu. the active feature is “offset” from its startingpoint at the head (or tail) of the gage.

An offset name refers to a specific point on the gage (“Fixed”) or a specific position between the outside edges of the workpiece (“Center”).

“Fixed” refers to either the head or the tail of a gage, according to the designated search direction. For the Head- to-Tail search direction, the fixed point is at the head; for

Tail-to-Head, it is at the tail.

“Center” refers to the center point between the first edge and the last edge on the gage.

An offset number identifies either a specific edge or specific midpoint between adjacent edges. The number varies

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-44

Selecting Define Features

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Using

Offset

Function

(continued)

Your Action Comments according to the designated search mode. Offset numbers for edges are designated 0.0, 1.0,2.0, and so on. Offset numbers for midpoints are designated 0.5,1.5,2.5, and so on.

For the

All Edges search mode, the first offset number is always 1.0, and the last is x.0, where (x) is the total number of edges on the gage.

For the other search modes, the first number is always 0.0, an edge, and the second number is always 0.5, a midpoint.

The example below shows Active Feature A located at offset

1.0, which is edge #l. Note that the highest offset number in the example is 6.0, which is the last edge.

I Offset Numbers:

Gray Scale

Search Direction (A): Head-to-Tail

All Edges Search Mode (A):

-

Pick the Offset menu box When you pick the

Offset menu box, the offset position as needed to position the advances according to the designated search direction. In the active feature. example above, it starts with Fixed and continues with

Center, 1.0,1.5,2.0, and so on.

The positions of letters A or B on the gage correspond to their currently selected offsets. Thus, in the preceding figure, A corresponds to offset 1.0, which is edge #l.

When you pick

Offset once more after A (or B) reaches the last edge or midpoint, A (or B) returns to the starting point, which varies according to the designated search mode and search direction.

For the

All Edges search mode, the starting point is either the head or the tail of the reference line, according to the designated search direction, and the offset resets to “Fixed.”

For the other search modes, the starting point is the edge of the “object,” and the offset resets to 0.0.

-

Using Learn

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools:

Gages

Function

7-45

Pick the

Learn menu box in the

Gage popup menu to command the CVIM system to “learn” the current count or measurement for the currently selected gage.

Pick the

Your Action

Learn menu box.

Look at ithe new value in the

Learn menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Learn menu box, the gage “learns” the current count or measurement. The result appears in the

Learn menu box.

For counting pixels, objects, or edges, the result is a number such as 100,58,7, and so on. For linear and angular measurements, the result is a number such as 0.123,4.665, or 15.321.

The new result indicates the current count or measurement for this gage.

-

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the

Range/Reference popup menu, then select the parameters in that menu.

Your Action

Pick the

Range/Reference menu box in the

Gage popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Range/Reference menu box, the

Range/

Reference popup menu appears above the Gage popup menu, as follows:

1 Define Gage t Gage

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win ‘$k$‘i Window Mist Exit

Chapter 7

Inspection Tools: Gages

7-46

Selecting Range/Reference Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued) Range Limits - The term range limit, as it applies to a gage, refers to the upper and lower tolerance limits for a gage measurement or counting operation.

In general, range limits specify the upper and lower boundaries of acceptable inspection “results” values. Thus, the “result” value could be a pixel count, object count, or other value from the gage inspection operation.

The CVIM system provides two sets of range limits:

Warning range limits, and fault range limits. Warning range limits always lie at or within fault range limits.

The two sets of range limits have this relationship:

LF<=LW<=REFERENCE<=UWc=UF

The

REFERENCE

value could be the “nominal”value a

Learn operation, or a “mean”value from a trial inspection series. For example, if the inches,

REFERENCE

from value were 1.50

The inches.

LW

value (lower warning limit) could be set to 1.48

The inches.

UW

value (upper warning limit) could be set to 1.52

LF

value (lower fault limit) could be set to 1.46 inches. a The

UF

value (upper fault limit) could be set to 1.54 inches.

If an inspection result value goes outside either warning limit, the CVIM system will generate a warning signal. If the value goes outside both a warning limit and a fault limit, the CVIM system will generate both a warning signal and a fault signal.

In a practical application, the warning range limits can be used to indicate a deteriorating condition, such as a cutting tool starting to wear out, and the fault limits can be used to indicate a “hard” failure, such as a broken cutting tool.

Output Lines -The term output lines refers to the 14 discrete output lines assigned to carry various signals to your production equipment. Of these signals, the “results” signals indicate whether or not any of the warning and/or fault range limits have been exceeded.

Here are a couple of examples of using the warning and fault range limits and their corresponding output lines:

Example

1: If the dimensions of stamped-out parts change as the die wears, and one of the dimensions drifts outside the specified warning limit, the CVIM system will issue a signal to the “results” output line that you specified for the gage’s warning signal. The inspection processing would then continue.

-

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-47

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Mew and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range f.imits and Output Lines (continued)

The warning signal could be used to inform operations personnel that the die needs to be replaced soon, but not necessarily right away. They could then plan to replace the die at a convenient time, such as a shift change, rather than being forced to shut down during a shift.

Example 2: If a stamping die breaks, the dimensions of the stamped-out parts could change abruptly outside both the warning limit and the fault limit. In this case, the CVIM system will issue both a warning signal and a fault signal to the specified “results” output lines, and the inspection processing would then stop.

The fault signal could be used to inform operations personnel that the tool needs to be replaced right away.

NOTE: Two procedures are available for determining the appropriate range limits for your application: The shorter procedure is to use the

Learn function described earlier. The longer procedure is to run a series of inspections on a representative sample of workpieces in order to accumulate a statistical basis for setting the range limits.

The following steps describe the shorter procedure using the

Learn function:

Your Action

Position a ‘),erfect” workpiece in the screen image.

Perform a

Learn function, as described earlier.

Look at the result in the

Learn menu box.

Position a minimum-tolerance workpiece-&. the screen image.

Perform a second

Learn function.

Comments

The “perfect” workpiece should be one on which the dimension or other characteristic that the gage is to measure or count is in the middle of the tolerance range; that is, + 0.

Before you perform the “learn” function, be sure the gage is properly positioned over the workpiece in the screen image and the edges are properly defined.

Pick the

Learn menu box to perform the

Learn function.

The new result is the current count or measurement for this “perfect” workpiece.

Record the result value.

The “minimum-tolerance” workpiece should be one on which the workpiece dimension or other characteristic is at the low end of the tolerance range. This the dimension or characteristic below which the workpiece is unacceptable.

Pick the

Learn menu box to perform the

Learn function again, and record the result value.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-48

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Your Action

Position a maximum-tolerance workpiece in the screen image.

Perform a third Learn function.

Comments

The “maximum-tolerance” workpiece should be one on which the workpiece dimension or other characteristic is at the high end of the tolerance range. This the dimension or characteristic above which the workpiece is unacceptable.

Pick the Learn menu box to perform the Learn function again, and record the result value.

The three result values are the ones you will use to determine the fault range limits. Continue now with the procedure for configuring the range limits.

The following steps describe the longer procedure using a series of inspections:

Prepare to run a series of

Pick the

Your Action

“trial” inspections.

Main Configuration menu.

Pick the box in the

Look at the in the

Exit menu box in the

Runtime init.

Mode

Runtime

Exit menu menu. menu box

Initmenu.

Pick the Runtime Display menu box in the Exit menu.

Pick the Stat. Page

1 menu box in the Runtime

Display menu.

Comments

Refer to Chapter 10, Runtime Operations for more details about the following steps.

For these trial inspection series, you should have on hand a sufficiently large quantity of representative workpieces. You can either place them in front of the camera manually and use a manual trigger, or use some type of automatic positioning and triggering mechanism that simulates the actual factory-floor situation.

When you pick the Exit menu box, the Exit popup menu will appear.

When you pick the Runtime Init. menu box, the Runtime Init. popup menu will appear.

If the word “Standard” appears, pick the box once to toggle to

“Learn .” This activates the “learn” mode during the trial inspection series and ensures the accumulation of gage

“results” data in the statistics tables.

When you pick the Runtime Display menu box, the Runtime

Display popup menu will appear.

The Stat. Page 1 menu box causes page one of the statistics tables to appear on the monitor screen when you activate the run mode. Page one displays “results” statistics for all ena bled gages.

-

-

-

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-49

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(con timed)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Pick

Your Action

Pick the Runtime menu the box box in the

Exit menu.

Goto Runmode in the

Runtime menu menu.

Look the statistics table.

When you have enough inspections, look at the four statistics columns in the’Stat.

Page 1 table.

Pick th.e to stop the runmode.

Pick th.e

Gage menu box.

Select the gage number.

Pick the

Setup menu box

Range/Reference menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Runtime menu box, the

Runtime popup menu will appear.

When you pick the

Goto Runmode menu box, the CVIM system will begin running inspections if you selected

Auto/Internal as the trigger source. If not, the system will await trigger inputs from whatever trigger source you selected.

As the inspections continue, the Stat.

Page 1 table will display accumulated “results” data only for each enabled gage. No data will appear for a gage that is not enabled.

These columns show the mean, standard deviation, minimum reading, and maximum reading statistics for the inspection series.

These statistics are your basis for configuring the range limit values for the currently selected gage,

Picking the

Setup menu box stops the run mode and returns the CVIM system to the configuration mode.

At this time, the final data appearing in the

Stat. Page 1 table are recorded in the

Inspection Statistics table for the currently selected gage. You will see this when you pick the

Range/Outputs menu box in the

Range/Reference popup menu.

This restores the Gage popup menu.

This restores the gage number whose range limits you want to set.

This restores the

Range/Reference popup menu.

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-50

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(con timed)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Use the following steps to set range limits and assign output lines.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Range/Outputs menu

When you pick the

Range/Outputs menu box, two tables will box in. the Range/Outputs popup menu. appear on the screen, as follows:

2

Inspection

Statistics Table

-

:#;n$e$&e&e ;.i.;.:igc~

Learn: Nominal =

111 B.Pixels

- Gage

Popup Menu i Gage 1: Enabled

Previous Next

Env.

I

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win $&g~ Window Mist Exit

The

Range/Outputs setup table is the one you will use to set the range limits and assign the output lines. The numbers appearing in it now are the limits and lines set previously.

Note that each box in the table has the three dots (O-J, which indicates that you will need to pick each box, one at a time, in order to set its value.

The Inspection Statistics table shows the statistical accumulation of inspection “results” data if you performed a series of inspections with the CVIM system running in the

“learn” mode. These numbers can help you choose the best values for the range limits.

-

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-51

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu <and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range f imits and Output Lines (continued)

The next several steps show you how to enter values for the range limits.

NOTE: The order in which these steps are presented may not be the appropriate order in all cases. If not, a blinking message will appear in the calculator display that says:

VALUE OUT OF RANGE.

For example, thismessage will appear if you attempt to change the upper warning range limit to a value below the lower warning range limit.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

-upper box under This is the warning range upper

(“High”) limit. When you

WARNING RANGE. pick this box, the calculator pad appears on the screen, as follows:

-

Inspection

Statktics Table

Define Features

Learn: Nominal =

111 B.Pixels

Gage 1: Enabled

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win ,.@&e. Window Mist Exit

Pick each digit of the upper As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator warning limit value. “display.“Thus, for a value of 50, pick “5,” then pick “0.”

Pick the

Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the upper box under

WARNING RANGE.

--

WARNING RANGE.

This is the warning range lower

(“Low”) limit.

Pick each digit of the lower

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator warning limit value. “display.”

Chapter

7 Inspection

Tools:

Gages

7-52

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Enter key.

Pick the upper box under

FAULT RANGE.

Pick each digit of the upper fault limit value.

Pick the

Enter key.

Comments

When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the middle box under

WARNING RANGE.

This is the fault range upper

(“High”) limit.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the upper box under

FAULT RANGE.

This is the fault range lower

(“Low”) limit. Pick the middle box under

FAULT RANGE.

Pick each digit of the lower fault limit value.

Pick the

Enter key.

Pick the lower box under

WARNING RANGE.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the middle box under

FAULT RANGE.

When you pick this box, a variation of the

Output

Assignment popup menu appears on the screen, as follows:

0

0

2 l/Results

3 l/Results

0 4 l/Results i-J 5 Z/Results

Range/Reference

Popup Menu t- Gage

Popup Menu q

8 Not Used

0 9 Not Used

[7 10 Not Used

0 11 Not Used 1

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win /‘&$&I’~ Window Mist Exit

Chapter 7 Inspection Tools: Gages

7-53

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu (and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range limits and Output fines (continued)

Your Action

Pick the output line number for the

WARNING RANGE.

Comments

This is the

Output Line Selection popup menu. It shows the output line functions that you assigned to the

Output

Assignment popup menu in Chapter 4, Operating

Environment.

NOTE: This menu shows that only the output lines that you designated in Chapter 4 as ”

1 /Resu Its” are available to this gage if it is in tool set

#l (“Z/Results” if the gage is in tool set

#2). These appear in light type, and all others appear in

black

type (meaning that you cannot pick them).

Note also that the

No Output box in the

Output Line

Selection popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that no output line is currently assigned to carry

WARNING RANGE signals for this gage.

If you prepared an Output Line Planning Sheet in Appendix

A, refer to it for the output line assignments for this gage.

From the

Output Line Selection popup menu, pick one of the available output lines boxes labeled ’

1 /Resu Its”.

When you pick the appropriate box, the shaded square will shift to it.

In addition, the output line number appears in the lower box under

WARNING RANGE.

--

FAULT RANGE.

Pick the output line number for the

FAULT RANGE.

From the Output

Line Selection popup menu, pick one of the available output lines boxes labeled

“1 /Resu Its”.

When you pick the appropriate box, the shaded square will shift to it.

In addition, the output line number appears in the lower box under

FAULT RANGE.

Chapter 7 inspection Tools: Gages

7-54

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Reference Popup Menu

Select the

Reference popup menu, if appropriate, then assign a reference tool to provide shift and/or rotation compensation to the currently selected gage.

You can configure CVIM so that one of the six reference tools provides shift compensation to a gage. During an inspection, if the reference tool detects shift and/or rotation in the workpiece, it shifts and/or rotates the gage a corresponding amount and direction.

Use the following steps to select a reference tool for the currently selected gage.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Ref menu box The

Ref menu box shows the currently selected reference in. the

Range/Reference tool assigned to this gage. popup menu.

Pick the

Ref menu box. When you pick the

Ref menu box, the

Reference popup menu appears, as follows: t::::::

&&L& ;i .i; p.

Range/Reference

Popuy Menu

I

10 Ref.Line 1

-

I

Define Gage 0.0

10 Ref.Win 1

I

10 Ref.Win 2

Env.

4

..:

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Qage Window Mist Exit

Note that the

Fixed box in the

Reference menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that a reference tool is not currently assigned to this gage. Also note that only the available reference tools are in light type. All others are shown in them.

black

type, which indicates that you cannot pick

Pick the appropriate reference If appropriate, pick one of the available reference tools from tool from the menu. the

Reference menu.

Chapter

8

inspection Tools: Windows

Chapter Objectives

The objectives of this chapter are to explain windows and show you how they can be used, and then show you the procedures for configuring them. The chapter begins with a series of questions and answers about windows.

A few Questions

and

AnsweGm’.sit;;

This part of the chapter introduces you to windows by asking a few questions about them that might occur to you, and then answering those questions.

What is a window?

A window is a two-dimensional image analysis tool whose size and shape can be adjusted to inspect a specific part of the workpiece image.

What does a window actually look for?

A window looks at all of the pixels -points of variable light intensity - within its boundaries. It can look for specific numbers of black or white pixels, specific numbers of objects formed of black or white pixels, and so on.

How does a window look for pixels?

A window scans the area within its boundaries, left-to-right, top-to-bottom, evaluating every pixel along the way.

What kind of information can these pixels provide?

If a cluster of black or white pixels represents a particular feature (such as a hole) on a workpiece, counting those pixels can indicate the relative area of that feature.

Similarly, counting separate clusters of black or white pixels can indicate the number of features or objects within the window’s boundaries.

By measuring the gray-scale light level of all pixels within its boundaries, the window can determine their average luminance.

By recording the gray-scale image of a particular feature on a workpiece, a window can later search for this same feature on other workpieces.

What shapes can a window have?

A window has one of three shapes: rectangular, elliptical, or polygonal.

What are the position, size, and other limits of these windows?

A window can be be any length or width, and can be positioned anywhere, so long as it remains within the useable portion of the video monitor screen.

Chapter 8 hspection TOO/S: Windows

8-2

A Few Questions and

Answers About

Windows

(continued)

How many windows are available?

The CVIM system provides 24 windows for each of the two tool sets, for a total of 48. Each window can be rectangular, elliptical, or polygonal.

What functions can a window perform?

A window’s function during each inspection cycle is one of these:

Count the number of black or white pixels within the window.

Count the number of black or white objects within the window.

Compare a specific workpiece feature with a “template” of that feature taken from an ideal workpiece and stored in the

CVIM system’s memory.

Calculate the average luminence, or light intensity, of a part of a workpiece.

-

Windows

This part of the chapter provides you with the details of using and configuring windows of all shapes.

Under the Using Rectanglar Windows, Using Eliptical

Windows, Using Masks with Windows, and Using Polygonal

Windows headings, you will see simple application examples of the three window shapes.

Under the Configuring Windows heading, you will find out how to use the “user interface” - the light pen and the popup menus on the video monitor screen - to configure windows for inspection tasks.

-

Using Rectangular Windows

This section describes how you can use rectanguzar windows to inspect a workpiece or parts of a workpiece. (Note that the term “rectangular” includes square windows.)

The following examples use rectangular windows to determine whether holes have been punched in a metal plate. The assumptions are as follows:

Count black pixels, which represent the opaque metal in the plate.

Count the white pixels that represent just the holes in the plate.

Count the white objects that represent just the holes in - the plate.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-3

Using Rectangular Windows

(continued)

Shift and rotation compensation will not be used. (For information on shift compensation, see Chapter 6, Reference

Tools: Lines and Windows.)

The objective of these inspection examples is for the

CVIM system to inspect every plate for the correct area or number of holes and reiect all glates with incorrect area or number of holes. ” s

Example 1: Figure 8.1 shows how the image of the metal plate might look on your video monitor screen.

Figure 8.1 Screen Image of Metal Plate

Holes in Plate

Metal Plate

\

Since the metal plate is qpaque, it appears black when lighted from behind. The holes in the plate appear white, and so does the area around the plate.

The window’s function in this example is simply to count the black pixels within its boundaries.

By counting black pixels, the window is, in effect, measuring the area of the metal plate. Thus, if any hole is either missing or incompletely punched, the area of the plate - the number of black pixels - will be greater than expected. If there are too many holes, or if any hole is much too large, the area will be smaller than expected.

In each case, the CVIM system will issue a “pass/fail” signal that you can use to control your production equipment. For example, you could have the production equipment send the defective part, to a reject bin.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-4

Using Rectangular Windows

(continued)

Figure 8.2 shows how a rectangular window might appear when it is positioned around the metal plate. Note that the window needs to be just large enough to enclose the plate.

This allows for a small amount of plate shift along the X and

Y axes of the image on the monitor screen.

Figure 8.2 Rectangular Window Around Metal Plate

-

Metal Plate

Note that in this example shift and rotation compensation are not used. Thus, each plate must be in a nearly fixed position within the window. The plate cannot be allowed to shift or rotate so that part of it lies outside the window.

During an inspection operation, the window counts the black pixels. If the black pixel count is within range limits (that you specify), the plate “passes” inspection; if not, the plate

“fails” inspection.

Example 2: Another way of using a rectangular window is to position it inside the plate so that the CVIM system can count the white pixels in the four holes, as shown in Figure

8.3. In effect, the window in this case would measure the sum of the areas of the four holes.

During an inspection operation, the window counts the white pixels. If the white pixel count is within range limits (that you specify), the plate “passes” inspection; if not, the plate

“fails” inspection.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-5

Using Rectangular Windows

(con tin ued)

Thus, if any hole is either missing or incompletely punched, the sum of the hole areas - the total number of white pixels - will be smaller than expected. If there are too many holes, or if any hole is too large, the sum will be greater than expected.

In each case, the CVIM system will issue a “pass/fail” signal that you can use to control your production equipment. -

Figure 8.3 Rectangular

Window Positioned Around Holes in Metal Plate

Rectangular

Window

Meta)

Plate

Example

3: Another way of using the rectangular window in Figure 8.3 is to have the CVIM system count the number

of

white objects - the four holes.

Thus, if any hole is missing, or if there are too many holes, the

CVIM

system will issue a “pass/fail” signal.

Using Elliptical Windows

This section describes how you can use elliptical windows to inspect a workpiece or parts of a workpiece. (Note that the term “elliptical” includes circular windows.)

Example 1:

This example uses circular windows to determine whether the two holes in a metal plate are the correct size. The assumptions are these:

The metal plate is backlighted; thus, the plate will appear black and the holes white on the monitor screen.

Chapter 8 inspection Tools:

Windows

8-6

Using Elliptical Windows

(con timed)

The CVIM system will use two circular windows to count the white pixels from the holes.

Shift and rotation compensation will not be used. (For information on shift compensation, see Chapter 6, Reference

Tools: Lines and Windows.)

The objective for the CVIM system in this example are to inspect each hole for the correct area.

The CVIM system will reject all plates with missing holes or holes having an incorrect area.

Figure 8.4 shows the image of a plate with two punched holes, each of which has a circular window around it (the circular window is shown as a thin white circle).

Figure 8.4 Circular Windows Around Holes in Metal Plate

Circular Window

Around Hole

Metal Plate

-

Circular Window

Around Hole

The windows’ function in this example is simply to count the white pixels within their boundaries.

By counting white pixels, the windows are, in effect, measuring the area of the holes. Thus, if a hole is missing, incompletely punched, or undersize, the area of the hole- the number of white pixels - will be smaller than expected. If the hole is too large, the area will be greater than expected.

In each case, the CVIM system will issue a “pass/fail” signal.

Chapter 8

Inspection

Tools: Windows

Using E/Lip tical Windows

(continued)

Example 2: This example uses circular windows to determine whether an O-ring is present or missing, or is improperly installed, on the inside wall of a cylinder. The assumptions are these:

8-7

The CVIM system will use one circular window to count the black pixels from the O-ring.

Shift and rotation compensation will not be used. (For information on shift compensation, see Chapter 6, Reference

Tools: Lines and Windows.)

The objective for the CVIM system in this example is to inspect every cylinder for the presence of a properly installed O-ring.

The CVIM system will issue a “pass/fail” signal for all cylinders with missing or improperly installed O-rings.

Figure 8.5 shows how the open end of the cylinder might look on your monitor screen. It would most likely appear gray when lighted from above. The inside of the cylinder might appear as darker shades of gray because of shadows.

Fiaure 8.5 Lookina into Or>en End of Cvlinder With and Without O-Rim

-

The O-ring is installed in a groove on the inside wall of the cylinder, and it is easily visible when viewed from the open end.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-8

Using Elliptical Windows

(continued)

Figure 8.6 shows how a circular window might appear when it is positioned over the end of the cylinder. In this example,the window’s diameter needs to be just large enough to enclose the O-ring. This allows for a small amount of cylinder shift along its X and Y axes of the image on the monitor screen.

Figure 8.6 Circular Window Positioned Over End of Cylinder

Circular

Window

I

Area of

Interest

/\

Circular

Window

-

-

The window is shown as a white circle inside a black square.

The black square is called the “area of interest”; however, the circle is the only part of the image that the window will evaluate.

The function of the window in this example is simply to count the black pixels in the O-ring. When the O-ring is present, the black pixel count might be 1000 to 1500; when the O-ring is missing, the pixel count will be 0.

If an O-ring were not properly seated in the groove, the window would probably detect that because it might see too many black pixels.

In any case, the CVIM system will issue a “pass/fail” signal whenever the black pixel count is beyond the specified range limits.

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-9

Using Masks With Windows

Within each inspection window, a second window is available that you can configure to cover unwanted or unneeded parts of the workpiece image. This second window is called a “mask.”

In some window applications, only a small part of the image within the inspection window may be needed. In other applications, some part of the image within the inspection window may need “masking” because visual “noise” in it interferes with the inspection of a particular workpiece feature.

During an inspection operation, the window ignores the image area within the mask. It processes only the area outside the mask, but inside the window’s boundaries.

Example: Refer to the elliptical window example in Figure

8.7. This exam le is similar to the one in Figure 8.6 except that it uses bot f: a window and a mask.

Figure 8.7 Cilrcular Window with Mask Positioned Over End of Cylinder

Circular

M?sk

Area of

Interest

Ma\sk

Circular

-

O-Ring i< Groove on

Inside Cylinder Wall

In this example, the mask and the window are both circular and are arranged concentrically over the cylinder and O- ring. The practical value in using this mask is that it can remove visual “noise” or clutter that may interfere with the inspection; however, a mask will increase processing time.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-10

Using Polygonal Windows

This section describes how you can use polygonal windows to inspect a workpiece or parts of a workpiece.

The main advantage of using a polygonal window is that you can tailor it to fit an odd-shaped workpiece or part of a workpiece. In either case, the polygonal window can exclude areas that may interfere with the inspection process.

Here are the capabilities and limitations of polygonal windows:

-

Example:

This example uses a polygonal window to inspect three screws on a workpiece. The six-sided, L-shaped window will look only at the area including the three screws. It thus avoids the “clutter” on the workpiece.

Figure 8.8 Polygonal Window Around Screws in Workpiece

Six-Sided, L-Shaped

Polygonal Window

Around Screws

Workpiece

\

-

The polygonal window’s function could be to count objects

(the screws) or count black pixels (the total area of the screws). Regardless of which inspection method is used, if a screw is missing, either the object count will be short or the area will be too small.

In each case, the CVIM system will issue a “pass/fail” signal.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-11

Con fi!g uring Wind0 ws

In configuring windows you will select the configuration categories in the

Window popup menu, which appears when you pick

Window from the Main Configuration menu.

These are the main configuration categories in the

Window popup menu:

Window definition: Sets the window position and shape, and selects the window’s inspection function (the window

“operation”). l

Select range limits, output lines, reference tool:

Selects the operating range limits that determine a “pass” or

“fail” result; selects the output line for reporting inspection results; selects a reference tool from which the window can receive shift compensation.

Learn window measurements: This function “learns” the current window measurement ualue, which varies according to the type of window operation selected.

Select window number: This function selects the window number (1 to 24).

Enable/disable window: This function enables or disables the currently selected window.

Configuring a window involves these basic steps:

Selecting the window shape: rectangular, elliptical, or polygonal.

Selecting the window operation: count pixels, count objects, determine the average luminance, or perform a template match.

Positioning and sizing the window(s) over the workpiece image.

The following pages show you how to perform all of the steps that configure windows. To save time, you should perform these steps in the order given.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-72

Selecting Window

Popup Menu

Your first step is to select the

Window popup menu.

Your Action Comments

Pick

Window in the Main When you pick the

Window menu box, the

Window popup

Configuration menu. menu appears above the Main Configuration menu, as follows:

Define Window 0.0 I

1 Window 1: Enabled

Previous Next

Env.

1

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage $&$$:

:

Mist Exit

The

Window popup menu shows the five configuration categories described earlier.

In addition to the

Window popup menu, if the currently selected window is enabled, as shown above, it will appear somewhere on the monitor screen.

Selecting and Er~,;bl~+/;

Select the window number and enable the window.

Your Action

Look at the

Window menu box in the

Window popup menu.

Select the window number.

Look at the

Window menu box again.

Pick the

Window menu box.

Comments

The

Window menu box indicates the currently selected window number (1 to 24). The menu box indicates whether that window is

Enabled or

Disabled.

To change the window number, pick the

Next

(or

Previous) menu box repeatedly until the correct number appears.

The

Next and

Previous functions work like this: When you pick the

Next box, the next higher window number appears:

1,2,3,. . . 24,1,2,3, and so on. When you pick the

Previous box, the next lower window number appears: 3,2,1,24,. . .3,

2,1, and so on.

If

Disabled, appears, perform the next step.

To enable the window, pick the

Window menu box. The box should now indicate

Enabled.

-

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

Selecting Define Window

Select the

Define Window popup menu, then select the

Popup Menu and parameters in that menu.

Parameters

Your Action Comments

Pick the Define Window menu box in the

Window

When you pick the

Window popup menu. menu, as follows:

Define Window menu box, the popup menu appears above the

Window

Define popup

8-73

Op: #White Pixels 000

.

P&P Mask Win.

Threshold/Filter

Define Window

Popup Menu

I

Range/Reference 0.0 I

Env.

I 1

. . ..:. ,, :,

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage $$:@b&~ Mist Exit

Selecting Window Shape

Pick the

Shape menu box to select a rectangular, eZZipticaZ, polygonal window, whichever is appropriate for your application.

Your choice of window shape depends on the shape of the workpiece or workpiece part that you want the window to inspect. Note that the rectangular window is the most efficient.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Shape menu The

Shape menu box shows whether the currently selected box in the

Define Gage window is

Rectangular, Elliptical, or

Polygonal. popup menu.

Chapter 8 Inspection Took: Windows

8-14

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Window Shape (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Shape menu box, When you pick the menu box, the

Window Shape popup if appropriate, to select menu will appear alongside the

Define Window menu. the

Window Shape popup menu.

-

.

Threshold/Filter g&$ t&j&jo~ .‘f. -, j :jiJ

.

I q

I

Define Window

Popup Menu

I

I

Range/Reference ..a

I

Window Shape

Popup Menu

Window 1: Enabled

Previous Next

Env.

1

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage ~kin$$# ’ Mist Exit

Note that the

Rectangle box in the

Window Shape popup menu has a shaded square (~7). This indicates that the window is currently configured as a rectangle.

Pick the appropriate shape When you pick a different window shape menu box, the new from the

Window Shape selection will be highlighted in the

Window Shape popup menu box. menu and will appear in the

Shape menu box.

Also, the new window shape will appear on the monitor screen.

-

.-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-15

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win.

Function

Pick the P&P Process Win. menu box, then position the window over the workpiece and set the window’s dimensions.

(“P&P” means “pick and place.“)

The following procedure is based on an example that shows you how to manipulate a rectangular (or elliptical) window with the light pen. A subsequent example shows how to manipulate a polygonal window and increase or decrease the number of sides.

Each example includes these basic steps:

The example in the next several steps configures a rectangular window over a rectanglular workpiece, starting with the small square window below. (You can use the same steps to configure an elliptical window.)

.-

Your Action

Pick the P&P Process Win. menu b’ox in the Define

Window popup menu.

Use the following steps to position the window and set its length.

Comments

When you pick the P&P Process Win. menu box, a small square (0) will appear in the center of the currently selected window and in the center of each side of that window, as follows: n I

Aim the lightpen at the center handle.

I

These squares are the “handles” that the light pen uses to manipulate the window on the monitor screen.

Aim the light pen at the center handle until the light pen

“sees” the handle. You may have to move the light pen around slightly.

When the light pen sees the handle, a larger “highlight” square will surround the handle, as follows: n u 1 cl

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-16

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the handle.

Drag the window to the center of the workpiece.

Comments

Hold the pen steady in this position

- the appearance of the highlight square means that the light pen is now properly aimed.

You can now “drag” the window across the monitor screen.

When you move the pen, the entire window follows.

:

..I..

: :.

..r:

:

.

.:. .:. .

. .

-,::

. . . . . .

‘.““I

:..:

.I.

::.

.(.: l

.:

?-

-.

.

.

.

. .

.

. .

. L

Rectangular

Wokpiece

I

-

-

Aim the lightpen at the rightmost handle.

NOTE: Keep the tip of the pen within about one-half inch of the monitor screen.

When you have the window in position over the workpiece, press the pen against the monitor screen to “lock” the window at that position.

Continue when the highlight square appears. r-l u

I

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the handle.

Drag the right side until it is just outside the workpiece.

Comments

Note that the left side remains anchored.

8-17

Lock the window’s right side in position.

Aim the light pen at the topmost handle.

Continue when the hightlight square appears.

Pick the handle.

Drag the top side until it is Note that the bottom side remains anchored. just above the workpiece.

Lock the window’s top side in position.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-78

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Repeat this process for the Drag the left side and bottom sides until the window looks

ZeJj and bottom sides. like this:

Window surrounds workpiece

-

At this point, you have adjusted the window’s position and size so that, during an inspection, it will be able to inspect the entire workpiece.

To manipulate a polygon window and increase or decrease the number of sides on a polygonal window, continue with the following procedures.

If you select apolygon window shape, the Mode popup menu will appear in the lower-right corner of the monitor screen when you pick the P&P Process Win. menu box:

Env. Camera A

Note that the Move Vertex box in the Mode popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that the that the menu is - currently configured for moving the polygon and its vertices.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-19

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function

(continued)

These are the three configuration modes in the

Mode popup menu:

The

Move Vertex menu box enables you to move the polygon and its vertices anywhere on the screen. When you pick the

P&P Process Win. menu box, the CVIM system automatically

“picks” the

Move Vertex menu box.

The

Add Vertex menu box enables you to add vertices to the current polygon. The effect is to add sides to the polygon. The maximum number of sides is sixteen.

The

Delete Vertex menu box enables you to subract vertices from the current polygon. The effect is to subtract sides from the polygon. The minimum number of sides is three.

The following steps use a simple example - a four-sided polygon in the shape of a diamond-to show the effect of using the

Move Vertex functions.

Initially, the handles are located at the four vertices and center of the polygon:

Your Action

Aim the light pen at the center handle.

Comments

Continue when the highlight square appears.

- Pick the handle.

Chapter 8 inspection Tools: Windows

8-20

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function (continued)

Your Action

Drag the entire polygon to the left, as shown.

Comments

. . . . . . .

:

. . .

: .-.:

:‘. *

‘.

.,

.I.

:

:

:

_’

__..:

. . i.!:.

. . .

._

.

:

.

._._..

. . . . i:-::

,...._

. . . . .

‘.

‘.

‘.

‘.

‘.

._

‘......’

:.

.Y

.:

._

. .

‘.

:

_’

.’

_’

:

:

‘.

‘.

:

.’

‘.

‘:,

_’

: A_:

I

Aim the light pen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. rightmost vertex handle.

Pick the vertex handle.

Drag the rightmost vertex to the right, as shown.

-

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Paranlleters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win.

Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Aim th.e lightpen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. topmost vertex handle.

8-2 1

Pick the vertex

handle.

Drag the topmost vertex down and to the right, as shown.

The polygon now has two enclosed areas. As noted earlier, you can move a vertex anywhere on the screen. This includes moving it across an adjacent or opposite side of the polygon.

Chapter 8 inspection Tools: Windows

8-22

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

The following steps use a simple example - a four-sided polygon in the shape of a rectangle -to show the effect of using the

Add Vertex and

Delete Vertex functions.

Initially, the handles are located at the vertices and center of the polygon:

-

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Add Vertex

When you pick the

Add Vertex menu box, the menu box menu box. becomes shaded. The handles on the polygon shift from the vertices to the center of the sides, and the center handle disappears, as follows:

-

U

[

I

1

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage $?i~d$$i Mist Exit

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

Selecting Define Window

P’opup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Aim the light pen at the Continue when the highlight square appears. leftmost handle.

8-23

Dl

Pick the handle.

Drag the new vertex to the The rest of the polygon will remain anchored. left, as shown.

+-----fSpotlight”

Cl

Lock the vertex in position.

The vertex will follow the light pen wherever you move it.

Note that the previous left side has become two sides -the polygon now has five sides - and a new handle appears in the center of each of these two sides.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-24

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

You can repeat the

Add Vertex

“pick and place” function until the polygon has 16 sides.

To exit the Add Vertex

When you pick the

Add Vertex menu box, the shading is function, pick the

Add removed, and all handles (except the center handle) return

Vertex menu box again. to the polygon vertices.

Pick the

Delete Vertex

When you pick the

Delete Vertex menu box, the menu box menu box. becomes shaded. Handles remain at the vertices, but the center handle disappears, as follows:

-

Env. Camera A

Aim the light pen at the leftmost uertex.

Continue when the highlight square appears.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-25

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu

and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. Function

(continued)

Your Action

Pick the handle.

Comments

When you pick the handle, the two leftmost sides become one again, as follows:

E r

L c1

E

I

You can repeat the

Delete Vertex

“pick and place” function until the polygon has only three sides.

If necessary, arrows position or use the vernier to “fine-tune” the size of the window.

Press and hold the light pen tip against the wmdow handle, window,, or window side.

You can change the window’s size or position more precisely by using the vernier arrows. The vernier arrows enable you to make these changes in small increments.

You can access the vernier arrows while either picking a window handle or placing the window or window side.

Hold the light pen tip in for about one second. The vernier arrows will then appear in the lower-right corner of the monitor screen:

VERNIER ARROWS

Move top or bottom side up or down.

Move vertex or entire window up, down, left, or right

Move left or right side left or right.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-26

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using P&P Process Win. function (continued)

Your Action

Pick an arrow once to move the window or window side one gtxel in the arrow’s direction.’

Pick and hold an change thxndow arrow to size or position continuously.

Pick the “return” symbol to release the vernier arrows.

Comments

The up, down, right, or left arrow, will move the entire window or window side (vertex for polygons) one pixel in the direction indicated by the arrow.

When you pick and hold an arrow, the window’s size or position will change slowly for the first five or six increments. It will then change at a more rapid rate.

When the window’s size and/or position are correct, pick the

“return” symbol ( +J) to release the vernier arrows and return to the pick-and-place mode.

Selecting Window Mask Popup Menu

If a mask is appropriate for your application, select a rectangular or elliptical mask. Otherwise, select

NO Mask if no mask is needed for your application.

Your choice of mask shape depends on the shape of the workpiece image area that you want masked.

NOTE: Here are a few things about masks to keep in mind:

You can use any mask shape with any window shape except a polygon.

You cannot use a mask when using a window for template matching.

You can position a mask anywhere in relation to its associated window, even totally outside the window. (The mask, in this case, would not be able to mask anything.)

You can make the mask large enough to include the window. (The window, in this case, would be completely masked.)

-

-

Your Action

Look at the

Mask menu box in the

Define Window popup menu.

Comments

The

Mask menu box shows whether a mask is currently selected, and, if so, whether that mask is a

Rectangle or

Ellipse.

If the current shape is not the one you want, continue with the next steps.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-27

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Window Mask Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Mask menu box, When you pick the Mask menu box, the Window Mask if appropriate. popup menu will appear, as follows:

I

Shape: Rectangle 0.0

I

Op: #White Pixels 000

P&P Process Win.

I

P&P Mask Win. 0.0

I

10 Ellipse

I

Threshold/Filter

-

Define Window

Popup Menu

Window Mask

-Popup Menu

1 Range/Reference 0.0 1

I

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Exit

Note that the No Mask box in the Window Mask popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that no mask is currently selected for this window.

Pick the appropriate If you pick a different Window Mask menu box, it will mask shape from the appear as in the Mask menu box. In addition, the new mask

Wilndow Mask menu. shape (or no mask) will appear on the monitor screen.

Using

P&P Mask Win. function

Pick the P&P Mask Win. menu box, then position the mask within the window as is appropriate for your application and set the mask’s dimensions.

Refer to Using P&P Process Win. Function for instructions on positioning and sizing the mask window. The procedure for manipulating mask windows is identical to the procedure for manipulating process windows.

Chapter 8 Inspection Took: Windows

8-28

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Selecting Window Operation Popup Menu

Pick the

Op menu box, then select one of six operations for an elliptical or polygonal window, or seven operations for a rectangular window, as follows:

1. Count the number of ulhitepixels inside the window.

2. Count the number of black pixels inside the window (see the NOTE, below).

3. Count the number of white objects inside the window.

4. Count the number of black objects inside the window.

5. Locate the edge gradient between black and white areas within the window, identify the gradient with thin band of white pixels, and count the number of white pixels in the gradient “band.”

6. Measure the average luminance of all pixels inside the window.

7. Perform a “template” match by comparing a designated area on the workpiece (the “template”) with the same area on all workpieces to be inspected. Note that this operation can be used only with a rectangular window with no musk.

Your choice of window operation depends on which one is appropriate for your application.

NOTE: Windows that are tied to reference windows can rotate. The total number of pixels contained in a rotated window can be slightly greater than or less than the total number of pixels in the original unrotated window. You will need to account for this condition when you set the

“pass/fail” limits.

The CVIM system performs the white pixel count operation by counting the number of white pixels within the window in its present orientation. The value reported for the black pixel count operation is equal to the total number of pixels in the original unrotated window minus the number of white pixels counted within the window in its present orientation.

This slight change in window size is normally insignificant; however, for some applications, such as inspecting a white area for small black defects, it may be desireable to invert the image within the window, using the threshold cursors, then select the

#White Pixels window operation. Another alternative is to use the

#Black Objects window operation instead of the

#Black Pixels operation.

Your Action Comments

Look at the Op menu box in the

Define Window

The

Op indicates the currently selected window operation.

If that is not the operation you want, continue with the next popup menu. steps and select a different operation.

-

-

Chapter 8 hspection Tools: Windows

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Window Operation Popup Menu

(continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Op menu box. When you pick the

Op menu box, the

Window Operation popup menu should appear, as follows:

Define Window

Popup,Menu

8-29

Mask: No Mask 0.0

I

0 #White Obj’s

0 Gradient

0 Luminance

Threshold/Filter 0.0

1 Range/Reference 0.0 1

. .

Previous

Env.

Next

I

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage !@$I&$& Mist Exit

Pick the appropriate window operation from the

Window Operation menu.

Note that the

#White Pixels box in the

Window Operation popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that the window is currently configured to count the number of white pixels within its boundaries.

If you pick a different window operation menu box, a message will appear above the

Window Operation menu, as follows:

WARNING: Selectin a new tool operation will values being set to zero. Reselect to confirm.

The purpose of this message is to ask you to verify that you really want to change the tool operation. If so, pick the same menu box again.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-30

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring #0 bj’s Operations

Ifyou selected either the

#White Obj’s or the

#Black Obj’s menu box in the

Window Operation popup menu, continue with the following steps. Otherwise, skip this section.

An “object” is any group of joined pixels: black pixels on a white background, or white pixels on a black background.

The #0 bj’s operation enables a window to search for and count either black objects or white objects whose size lies within a specified range.

If a black object contains white pixels within its perimeter, the white pixels can either be counted as black pixels or they can be ignored. The same is true of a white object with black pixels inside its perimeter.

All objects, in order to be counted, must have a size (pixel count) that lies within a specified pixel range, or “tolerance,” which is based on the pixel count of a “target” object.

NOTE: To ensure correct counting, black objects must not touch the window boundary.

In the following steps, assume that you have already selected the

#Black Obj s operation. Use these steps to specify the target object and set the object-size range limits for your object-counting application.

-

Your Action

Pick the

Define Target menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Define Target menu box, the

Define

Target popup menu will appear, as follows:

I

+ White to Area

I

- Tolerance: 0

Define Window i++e q&t

. . i i &j

-

Define Target

Menu Box

Range/Reference 0.0

I I

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage ~!&&SV,~ Mist Exit

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-3 1

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring #Obj’s Operations (continued)

Your Action Comments

Earlier, when you picked the

#White Obj’s or

#Black Obj’s menu box, the

Window popup menu acquired a “new”menu box-the

Define Target menu box. This selects the

Define

Target popup menu, which you will use to define the “target” object and set the parameters for the objects to be counted.

Pi& the

‘Pick’ Target

When you pick the

‘Pick’ Target menu box, a green outline menu box. will appear around one of the objects within the window, as follows:

Outline

+ White to Area

4

08.0 a.80

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage i@itidfB& Mist Exit

Look at the outlined object. If the outlined object is not the one that you want to use as the “target” object, perform the next two steps.

Aim the light pen at the Aim the light pen at the whichever object you have selected appropriate “target” object. as the “target” object. When the light pen “sees” the new object, a red outline will appear around that object.

Pick the new

“target” object. When you pick the new target object, a green outline will replace the red outline around it, and the green outline around the previous target object will disappear.

Note that the top box indicates the “area” of the target object:

Selected Target Area

= 483. This is the number of black pixels in the target object.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-32

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring #Obj’s Operations (continued)

Your Action Comments

Look at the menu box just This menu box will display either

+ White to Area or above the

‘Pick’ Target box.

-White from Area, according to how it was last configured.

(If you had selected the

#White

Obj’s.operation, the menu box would display either

+ Black to Area or

- Black from

Area.)

If you select

+ White to Area, the window will add any white pixels within an objects’s boundary and will consider an object to be solid black. Thus, an object’s size will consist of all of the pixels within its boundary.

If you select-White from Area, the window will subtract the white pixels from the total number of pixels within an object’s boundary. Thus, an object’s area will consist of all of the pixels within its boundary minus the white pixels.

The same process applies when you select the

#White Obj’s operation.

If this function is not currently set the way you want it, perform the next step. Otherwise, skip the next step.

If appropriate, pick the

Area” menu box.

When you pick the “. . . Area”menu box, the toggles to the opposite status. Thus, current status

+ White to Area will change to-white from Area, or vice versa.

Pick the

+ Tolerance:

When you pick the

+ Tolerance: menu box, the “calculator menu box. pad” will appear on the monitor screen, as follows:

-

Calculator

Pad

Learn: Nominal =

0 B.Objects

Env.

..:

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage $&&&~i. Mist

Exit

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-33

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring #Obj’s Operations (continued)

Your Action Comments

The

+ Tolerance value is the upper limit of the object’s area, in pixels.

As the calculator “display” indicates, the current value of

+ Tolerance is 10000. This is the default value for

+ Tolerance.

The

+ Tolerance menu box enables you to select the upper limit of the tolerance range within which the area of the objects can deviate from area of the “target” object and still be counted.

If the target object has an area of 483 black pixels, as shown in the preceding figure, you could set the

+ Tolerance to, say, 525. The window will then count objects having an area no more than 525 black pixels.

Pick each digit of the new As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

” + ” tolerance limits. “display.“Thus, for a value of 525, pick “5,” pick “2,” then pick “5” again.

Pick the

Enter key. The new value will appear in the

+ Tolerance menu box.

Pick the-Tolerance: menu box.

The “calculator pad” will remain in its present position.

The

-Tolerance value is the lower limit of the object’s area, in pixels.

As the calculator “display” indicates, the current value of

- Tolerance is 0. This is the default value for

-Tolerance.

The

-Tolerance menu box enables you to select the lower limit of the tolerance range within which the area of the objects can deviate from area of the “target” object and still be counted.

Again, if the target object has an area of 483 black pixels, as shown in the preceding figure, you could set the

- Tolerance to, say, 450. The window will then count objects having an area no less than 450 black pixels.

Pick each digit of the new As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“-” tolerance limits. “display.” Thus, for a value of 450, pick “4,” pick “5,” then pick “0 .”

Pick the

Enter key. The new value will appear in the

- Tolerance menu box.

You have now set the upper and lower range limits for the size of objects to be counted.

Skip the next steps and proceed to the section called

Selecting

Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters to configure the range limits, output lines, and reference tools, as appropriate for your application.

Chapter 8 Inspection Took: Windows

8-34

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameter5 (continued)

Using Threshold/Filter Function (Pixel and Object Counts)

Select the

PixeVObj Filter popup menu and threshold- adjusting slide bar, then use a combination of filter selections and threshold settings to obtain the best binary image of the desired feature(s) within the window.

NOTE: The

Threshold/Filter function applies only to these four window operations:

#White Pixels, #Black Pixels,

#White Obj’s, and

#Black Obj’s.

Your Action

Pick the Threshold/Filter menu box in the

Define

Window popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Threshold/Filter menu box, the

PixeVObj

Filter menu and slide bar appear on the monitor screen, as follows:

--

-

Op: #White Pixels l

Define Window

Popup Menu

I P&P Process Win.

P&P Mask Win.

Pixel/Obj Filter

Popup, Menu

Slide

Bar-

Range/Reference

Learn: Nominal =

0 W. Pixels

Window 1: Enabled

Previous Next

0.0

0.0

+-

Env.

2. Identity

3. Identity

Window

Popup Menu 4. Identity

5. Identity

6. Identity

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage ~,~i.&&$ ; Mist

Right/

Cursor b

- Exit

Look at the threshold cursors The cursors on each side of the slide bar are the means on each side of the slide bar. by which you will set the initial contrast between the workpiece feature(s) to be inspected and the adjacent image area.

Think of the slide bar as being a scale with 1 at the bottom and 63 at the top, where 1 represents black, 63 represents white, and all numbers in between represent shades of gray betureen black and white.

T

H

R

E

5

H

0

L

D

5

L

4

H

I

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Threshold/Filter Function (PixeI and Object Counts)

(continued)

8-35

Your Action

Pick the L&cursor.

Drag the left cursor to its topmost position.

Pick and drag the right cursor to its bottommost position.

Comments

Think of the left cursor this way: Any part of the image within the window that is lighter than the current cursor setting will appear black in the window. Thus, if the cursor is set to 45 and some part of the image area is 46 or higher, that part will appear black in the window.

Think of the right cursor this way: Any part of the image within the window that is darker than the current cursor setting will appear black in the window. Thus, if the cursor is set to 25 and some part of the image area is 24 or lower, that part will appear black in the window.

Any part of the image within the window that is neither lighter than the left cursor setting, nor darker than the right cursor setting, will appear white in the window. Thus, if the left cursor is set to 45 and the right cursor is set to 25, any part of the image area within the window between those two gray values will appear white in the window.

NOTE: The left cursor cannot be moved lower than the right cursor, and the right cursor cannot be moved higher than the left cursor.

To pick the cursor, aim the light pen at it. When you see a red box around the cursor, press the light pen tip against the monitor screen for a moment. This causes the cursor to turn yellow, indicating that you can now “drag” the cursor up and down.

This initializes the left cursor’s position to 63.

Check wheth.er the feature to be inspected should appear black or white

Pick and drag the right cursor upward.

This initializes the right cursor’s position to 1.

With the two cursors positioned this way, the image area within the window should now appear all white.

If the feature to be inspected should appear black against a white background, adjust the right cursor first. On the other hand, if the feature to be inspected should appear white, adjust the left cursor first.

Drag the right cursor upward until the feature to be inspected turns black and has the proper dimensions and overall appearance.

or,

Pick the left cursor again and drag it downward.

Drag the left cursor downward until the feature to be inspected turns white and has the proper dimensions and overall appearance

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-36

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using PixeI/Obj Filter Menu

If the feature that you’ve defined with the cursor(s) has the proper shape, but has “noise” in it (that is, white specks in a black feature, or black specks in a white feature), you should select the

Pixel/Obj Filter table and use the filter function to try to remove these specks.

The filter function provides two filtering tools:

The

+ White/- Black tool, which replaces a layer of black pixels with white pixels.

The

-White/ + Black tool, which replaces a layer of white pixels with black pixels.

Identity signifies no filtering.

Here’s how you can use the filter function:

Example: Assume that the feature to be inspected is white and has black “noise” in it. Assume further that you have set three successive filter table boxes (#l, 2, and

3) to + White/-

Black.

In doing so, the white pixels in the feature expanded and the black pixels contracted - the smallest ones (that is, the “noise”) disappearing altogether.

This procedure eliminated the black noise, but, at the same time, it expanded the size of the white feature. To restore the white feature to its original size, you must set the next three filter table boxes (#4,5, and 6) to

-White/ + Black.

This will restore the white feature, minus the black noise, to its original size.

For your own application, you can experiment with various combinations of filter tools to “clean up” the feature image.

-

Your Action

Look at the PixeVObj Filter table.

Reset each filter table box to read Identity, ifnecessary.

Recheck the feature shape.

Check for white noise in a a black feature.

Check for black noise in a a white feature.

Comments

Do all six boxes read

Identity?

(Note that if you configured the window to count objects, box #6 will be “locked” in the -

White/ + Black state.)

If any box does not presently read

Identity, pick that box successively until it does. (When you pick a box successively, it will read

+ White/- Black, -White/ + Black, and

Identity.)

When all boxes read

Identity, you may have to adjust the cursors slightly to re-optimize the feature shape. If the feature shape is again acceptable, but still has “noise” in it, continue with the following steps.

If the noise consists of white specks in a black feature, use

-White/ + Black first, then

+ White/- Black.

If the noise consists of black specks in a white feature, use

+ White/- Black first,, then

-White/ + Black.

Your objective is to either eliminate “noise” in the binary image or reduce it to an acceptable level.

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-37

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring Gradient Operations

If you selected the

Gradient menu box in the

Window

Operation popup menu, continue with the following steps.

Otherwise, skip this section.

When a window (rectangle, ellipse, or polygon) is configured for the

Gradient operation, it can locate an edge or gradient between dark and light areas inside the window. It displays the edge or gradient image as a thin band of white pixels and counts the number of white pixels in that image.

The following illustration shows how this looks on the monitor screen.

Black object on white background:

I- Window

- Black Object

___ White

Background

White object on black background:

- Window

Window, object, and background after setting gradient:

Gradient Image

“band” of white pixels

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-38

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and.

Parameters (continued)

Configuring Gradient Operations (continued)

A shows a black object against a white background, and B shows a white object against a black background.

(Note that the objects and backgrounds will appear as shown in A and B only when one of the other window operations, such as

#Black Pixels, is selected. When the

Gradient window operation is selected, a window cannot display objects and backgrounds as shown.)

C shows the gradient image - the band of white pixels surrounding the object - after the gradient threshold is properly adjusted. The objects in A and B will both appear this way following the gradient threshold adjustment.

Thegradient threshold is a value, from 1 to 63, representing the difference in the gray scale values of adjacent pairs of pixels within the window. The higher the number, thegreater thegray scale difference that is required for the CVIM system to consider a pixeE pair to be a gradient.

Each point in the window where the difference in the gray scale value of adjacent pairs of pixels is greater than the threshold setting is identified as a gradient. The window sets the pixels white at all of these points.

Conversely, each point where the difference in the gray scale value of adjacent pairs of pixels is less than the threshold setting is not identified as a gradient. The window sets the pixels b2ack at all of these points.

You can selectively turn on or turn off specific components of the gradient image, and you can also select one of two widths for the gradient image.

The following illustration shows how A in the preceding illustration would appear with some components of the gradient image turned off.

Black object on white background:

The overall inspection function of the

Gradient window operation is to look for specified edgegradients on or around an object and, if found, count the white pixels in the resulting gradient image.

.-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-39

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Threshold/Filter Function (Gradient)

Select the

Gradient popup menu and gradient threshold- adjusting slide bar. Use the slide bar to set the gradient threshold for the best gradient image. Use the menu to select the width of the gradient image and the sides of the object on which the image is to appear.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Threshold/Filter menu box in the Define

When you pick the

Threshold/Filter menu box, the

Gradient popup menu and gradient threshold slide bar will appear, as

Window popup menu. ~oi=loWs: -

-

Shape: Rectangle

P&P Mask Win.

0.0

I

Slide

Bar-

Define Window

-Popup Menu

Gradient

Popup Menu

I

Range/Reference 0.0

I

Width: 1

G

R

A

D

I

E

N

T

S

Ii

0

L

D

T

Ii

R

E

Cursor

Env.

I

Down: On

I

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage

-

Exit

Note that the

Width value is

” 1.”

This selects the narrower of the two gradient image widths. Width value “2” can be used where appropriate to enhance gradient sharpness or increase the white pixel count.

Note also that the

Right, Left, Up, and

Down boxes are all set to

“On.”

This turns on all four parts of the gradient image.

Chapter 8 inspection Tools: Windows

8-40

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Threshold/Filter Function (Gradient)

(continued)

Your Action

Look at the Gradient popup menu.

Comments

The

Gradient menu enables you to selectively turn on or off each of the four components of the gradient image. The menu also enables setting the image to one of two widths.

Picking the

“Off” menu boxes toggles them to

“On.”

Pick each menu box that reads

“Off .”

Look at the threshold cursor next to the slide bar.

The cursor is the means by which you will set the gradient threshold. The slide bar represents a scale with 1 at the bottom and 63 at the top.

Pick the cursor. To pick the cursor, aim the light pen at it. When you see a red box around the cursor, press the light pen tip against the monitor screen briefly. This causes the cursor to turn yellow, indicating that you can now “drag” the cursor up and down.

Drag the cursor to its bottommost position.

This initializes the cursor’s threshold value to 1.

Slowly, drag the cursor upward.

As you drag the cursor, watch for the gradient image in the window.

Stop the cursor when the If you drag the cursor too far upward, the entire image gradient image is correct within the window will turn black. If this occurs, drag the for your application. cursor down again.

This completes the configuration of the

Gradient window operation, unless your application requires turning off some components of the gradient image. If so, continue with the following steps; if not, skip to the section called Selecting

Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters.

Using Gradient Menu

The lower four menu boxes of the

Gradient menu select the on or off state of the four components of the gradient image.

-.

I

Down: On

I

The terms

Right, Left, Up, and

Down in the menu boxes refer to the direction that each component of the gradient image faces. The four terms also refer to the search direction that the window uses to locate each component.

Chapter 8 inspection Tools: Windows

8-4 1

Selecting Define Window

Popup

Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Using Gradient Menu (continued)

Since the search direction is always from dark to light, the following relationship exists between the search direction and the four components of the gradient image:

The

Up search direction relates to the top-facing component of the gradient image.

(I The

Down search direction relates to the bottom-facing component of the gradient image.

The

Left search direction relates to the left-facing component of the gradient image.

@The

Right search direction relates to the right-facing component of the gradient image.

Each component of the gradient image consists of one or more parts, according to the shape of the object.

In the following illustration, a multi-sided dark object (with a light hole) identifies the search direction for each side and the several parts of each gradient image component:

,’

;

*Seairch Directions:

-

“Down”

-“UP” ::

-

“Rig ht’f.--f-’

*The search direction is always from a dark area to a light area. t

Window

The illustration shows that each gradient image component around (and inside) the object consists of several parts. Thus, there are four right-facing (“Right”) parts, four top-facing

(Wp”) parts, three left-facing (“Left”) parts, and three bottom-facing (“Down”) parts.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-42

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Using Gradient Menu (continued)

As an example, if you toggle all four menu boxes to

“On

,” all four components of the gradient image will turn on, as shown in A below.

If you toggle the

“Right” menu box to “On” and all other menu boxes to

“Off,” only the four parts of the right-facing component of the gradient image will turn on, as shown in B.

-

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-43

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters

(continued)

Using Gradient Menu (continued)

Your Action

Look at the Gradient pOpUp menu again.

Toggle the search direction menu boxes as required

Comments

Each search direction box is either

“On” or

Toggle each search direction box to either

“Off.”

“On” whichever is appropriate for your application. or

“Off,”

Toggle the

Width menu box to “1” or “2,” as required for your application.

The

"1" width is narrower than the “2” width.

This completes the configuration for the Gradient window operation.

Configuring Template Match Operations

If you selected the

Template Match menu box in the

Window

Operation popup menu, continue with the following steps.

Otherwise, skip this section and continue with the section called Selecting

Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters.

The

Template Match operation enables the window to compare a specified feature on each inspected workpiece with a stored reference image (the “template”) of that same feature.

Note that the

Template Match operation can be used only with a rectangular window without a mask.

During an inspection operation, the window examines each pixel in the worFzpiece image and compares it with the same pixel in the stored template. If the pixel’s value - ranging from 0 (darkest) to 63 (brightest) - lies within the pixel tolerance limits that you specified, that pixel “passes.”

When it has examined all pixels in the workpiece image, the window reports its “results” as a percentage of failed pixels.

For example, if the window size were 100 pixels by 60 pixels, and 600 pixels had values lying outside the specified pixel tolerance limits, the window would report a result of

600/6000 x 100% = 10% failed pixels.

NOTE: Before continuing, be sure that you have already positioned the window over the template feature on the reference workpiece.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-44

Selecting Define Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring Template Match Operations (continued)

Use the following steps to store the template and set the pixel tolerance limit.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Define Template

Earlier, when you picked the

Template Match menu box, the menu box.

Window popup menu acquired a “new” menu box - the

Define Template menu box. This menu box selects the popup menu, which you will use to store the template and define the pixel tolerance limits.

When you pick the

Define Template menu box, the

Define

Template popup menu will appear, as follows:

-.

Define Window 0.0

Pick the Save Template

Look at the menu box.

Tern~~p&DXs~

Look at the

Pixel Tol menu box.

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage ~$&&I&&~~, Mist Exit

When you pick the

Save Template menu box, the template image in the window is stored in CVIM system memory, and the word

Delete replaces the word

Save in the menu box.

(To delete the stored template, pick the menu box again. The stored template will be deleted from memory, and the word

Save will replace the word Delete.)

The

Template Disp menu box indicates whether of not the stored template image will appear on the monitor screen. If

On appears, the template image will appear in the upper right corner of the screen. If

Off appears, the template image will not appear on the screen. Pick the menu box to select the opposite status. Pick again to revert to the previous status.

The

Pixel Tol menu box indicates the currently selected pixel tolerance limit. For exam

R le, if 5 appears, it means that the gray scale value of eat pixel in the workpiece image must be within f 5 of the corresponding pixel in the stored image (the template). Thus, if a pixel in the template has a gray scale value of 23, the corresponding pixel in the workpiece image must have a value of 23 & 5 (18 to 28).

-

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-45

Selecting IDefine Window

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Configuring Template Match Operations (continued)

Your Action Comments

Note that increasing the pixel tolerance value will decrease the processing time.

Pick the

Pixel Tol menu box.

When you pick the

Pixel Tol menu box, the calculator pad will appear on the monitor screen, as follows:

Define Template r-1 JPOPUP Men&

-

1 Define Window

::$&i:k.~Tem:pfa&

0.0 1 I II

Range/Reference *mm

Learn:

I::_

1

1: Enabled

(Previous

Env.

Nominal =

0 % Error

1 Next

I

I

1

I

I

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage :@i@jw: Mist Exit

Pick each digit of the new As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator pixel tolerance limits. “display.” Thus, for a value of 12, pick “1,” then pick “2.”

Pick the

Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the

Pixel Tol menu box.

When you finish entering the pixel tolerance value, proceed to the section called Selecting

Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters to configure the range limits, output lines, and reference tools, as appropriate for your application.

The range limits for a template-matching window are based on the window’s inspection “results,” which reflect the percentage of pixels that failed to match the corresponding pixels in the template.

The question of what is an acceptable

P ercentage of failed pixels depends on the requirements o your specific application. To help you determine these requirements, you can use the

Learn function and/or run a series of trial inspections. The Selecting

Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters section will show you how.

8-46

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

Using Learn Function

Pick the

Learn menu box in the

Window popup menu to command the CVIM system to “learn” one of the following values:

-

The percent of pixels that failed to match those in a stored template.

Pick the

Your Action

Learn menu box.

Look at the new value in the

Learn menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Learn menu box, the window “learns” the value according to the operation that you selected for this window.

For example, if you selected the

#Black Pixels window operation, the window will “learn” the number of black pixels that it sees within the window’s boundary.

The new value appears in the

Learn menu box.

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

Select the

Range/Reference parameters in that menu. popup menu, then select the

Your Action

Pick the

Range/Reference menu box in the

Window popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Range/Reference menu box, the

Range/

Reference popup menu appears above the

Window popup menu, as follows:

Define Window 0.0

Env.

.

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage &‘&@&$: Mist Exit

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-47

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines

Range Limits -The term range Zimit, as it applies to a window, refers to the upper and lower tolerance limits for the selected window operation.

In general, range limits specify the upper and lower boundaries of acceptable inspection “results” values. Thus, the “result” value could be a pixel count, object count, or other value from the window inspection operation.

The CVIM system provides two sets of range limits:

Warning range limits, and fault range limits. Warning range limits always lie within fault range limits or be equal to them.

The two sets of range limits have this relationship:

LF< =LW< =REFERENCE< =UW< =UF

The REFERENCE value could be the “nominal”value from a Learn operation, or a “mean” value from a trial inspection series. For example, if the REFERENCE value were 1500 pixels,

The LW value (lower warning limit) could be set to 1480 pixels. a The UW value (upper warning limit) could be set to 1520 pixels. a The UF value (upper fault limit) could be set to 1540 pixels.

If an inspection result value goes outside either warning limit, the CVIM system will generate a warning signal. If the value goes outside both a warning limit and a fault limit, the CVIM system will generate both a warning signal and a fault signal.

In a practical application, the warning range limits can be used to indicate a deteriorating condition, such as a cutting tool starting to wear out, and the fault limits can be used to indicate a “hard” failure, such as a broken cutting tool.

Output Lines-The term output lines refers to the 14 discrete output lines assigned to carry various signals to your production equipment. Of these signals, the “results” and master range signals indicate whether or not any of the warning and/or fault range limits have been exceeded.

Here are a couple of examples of using the warning and fault range limits and their corresponding output lines:

Example 1: If the size of stamped-out hole in a metal plate changes as the die wears, and drifts outside the specified warning limit, the CVIM system will issue a signal to the

“results” output line that you specified for the window’s warning signal. The inspection processing will then continue.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-48

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output fines (continued)

The warning signal could be used to inform operations personnel that the die needs to be replaced soon, but not necessarily right away. They could then plan to replace the die at a convenient time, such as a shift change, rather than being forced to shut down during a shift.

Example 2: If a stamping die breaks, the size of the stamped-out hole could change abruptly outside both the warning limit and the fault limit. In this case, the CVIM system will issue both a warning signal and a fault signal to the specified “results” output lines, and the inspection processing would then stop.

The fault signal could be used to inform operations personnel that the tool needs to be replaced right away.

Two procedures are available for determining the appropriate range limits for your application: The shorter procedure is to use the

Learn function described earlier. The longer procedure is to run a series of inspections on a representative sample of workpieces in order to accumulate a statistical basis for setting the range limits.

The following steps describe the shorter procedure using the

Learn function:

Your Action

Position a “perfect” workpiece in the monitor screen.

Comments

The “perfect” workpiece should be one on which the workpiece dimension or other characteristic that the window is to inspect is in the middle of the tolerance range; that is,

+_O.

Before you perform the “learn” function, be sure the window is properly positioned over the workpiece in the monitor screen and the threshold (if applicable) is correctly set.

Perform a

Learn function, as described earlier.

Record the value shown in the menu box.

Position a minimum-tolerance workpiece in the screen.

Perform a second

Learn function and record the value.

This value is the count or measurement for the “perfect” workpiece.

The “minimum-tolerance” workpiece should be one on which the workpiece dimension or other characteristic is at the low end of the tolerance range. This is the dimension or characteristic below which the workpiece is unacceptable.

This value is the count or measurement for the “minimum- tolerance” workpiece.

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-49

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Assigning Range limits and Output Lines (continued)

Your Action

Position a maximum- tolerance workpiece in the screen.

Perform a third Learn function and record the value.

Comments

The “maximum-tolerance” workpiece should be one on which the workpiece dimension or other characteristic is at the high end of the tolerance range. This is the dimension or characteristic above which the workpiece is unacceptable.

This value is the count or measurement for the “maximum- tolerance” workpiece.

You can use these three values to determine the appropriate fault and warning range limits for this window.

The following steps describe the longer procedure using a trial series of inspections:

Prepare to run a series of “trail” inspections.

Pick the Exit menu box in the

Main Configuration menu.

Pick the Runtime Init. menu box in the Exit menu.

Look at the

Mode menu box in the Runtime

Init.menu.

Pick the

Your Action

Runtime Display menu box in the Exit

Display menu.

Pick the Stat. Page 1 menu box in the Runtime menu.

Comments

Refer to Chapter 10, Runtime Operations for more details about the following steps.

For these trial inspection series, you should have on hand a sufficiently large quantity of representative workpieces.

If you cannot use the actual factory-floor setting to perform these trial inspections, you can manually position each workpiece in front of the camera and use a manual trigger, or use some type of automatic positioning and triggering mechanism that approximates the factory-floor situation.

When you pick the Exit menu box, the Exit popup menu will appear.

When you pick the Runtime Init. menu box, the Runtime Init. popup menu will appear.

If

“Standard” appears, pick the box once to toggle to

“Learn.” This activates the “learn” mode during the trial inspection series and ensures the accumulation of “results” data for this window in the statistics tables.

When you pick the Runtime Display menu box, the Runtime

Display popup menu will appear.

The Stat. Page 1 menu box causes page one of the statistics tables to appear on the monitor screen when you activate the run mode. Page one displays “results” statistics for all enabled windows.

Chapter 8 inspection Tools: Windows

8-50

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Assigning Range limits and Output Lines (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Runtime menu box in the

Exit menu.

Pick the

Goto Runmode menu box in the

Runtime menu.

Look the statistics table.

When you have enough inspections, look at the four statistics columns in the Stat.

Page 1 table.

Pick the

Pick the

to stop the runmode.

Window menu box.

Select the window number.

Pick the

Setup menu box

Range/Reference menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Runtime menu box, the

Runtime popup menu will appear.

When you pick the

Goto Runmode menu box, the CVIM system will begin running inspections if you selected

Auto/Internal as the trigger source. If not, the system will await trigger inputs from whatever trigger source you selected.

As the inspections continue, the Stat.

Page 1 table will display accumulated “results” data only for each enabled window. No data will appear for a window that is not enabled.

These columns show the mean, standard deviation, minimum reading, and maximum reading statistics for the inspection series.

These statistics are your basis for configuring the range limit values for the currently selected window.

Picking the

Setup menu box stops the run mode and returns the CVIM system to the configuration mode.

At this time, the final data appearing in the Stat.

Page 1 table are recorded in the

Inspection Statistics table for the currently selected window. You will see this when you pick the

Range/Outputs menu box in the

Range/Outputs popup menu.

This restores the

Window popup menu.

This restores the window number whose range limits you want to set.

This restores the

Range/Reference popup menu.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-5 7

Selecting Range/Reference

Popop Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued) y;zthe following steps to set range limits and assign output i .

Your Action

Pick the

Range/Outputs menu box in the

Range/Reference popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Range/Outputs menu box, two tables will appear on the monitor screen, as follows:

1784

506

1787

1764

1776.146

6.579

None 000 None 0.0

2

Inspection

Statistics Table

Define Window 0.0

1784 W. Pixels

+-- Window

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A

. : ::

Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage ~~$‘k$i$&~$’ Mist Exit

The

Range/Outputs table is the one you will use to set the range limits and assign the output lines. The numbers appearing in it now are the limits and lines set previously.

Note that each box in the table has the three dots (o-j, which indicates that you will need to pick each box, one at a time, in order to set its value.

The Inspection Statistics table shows the statistical accumulation of inspection “results” data if you performed a series of inspections with the CVIM system running in the

“learn” mode. These numbers can help you choose the best values for the range limits.

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-52

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and

Parameters (continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

The next several steps show you how to enter values for the range limits.

NOTE: The order in which these steps are presented may not be the appropriate order in all cases. If not, a blinking message will appear in the calculator display that says:

VALUE OUT OF RANGE.

For example, this message will appear if you attempt to change the upper warning range limit to a value below the lower warning range limit.

Your Action Comments

Pick the upper box under This is the warning range upper

(“High”) limit. When you

WARNING RANGE. pick this box, the calculator pad appears on the monitor screen, as follows:

-

:: .: :.jj

::;: 3.:

.:

.:

:i ;,

.,jj

,. :

:::..:,.

:

:

. .

: i,. .:’

:j.

: : .:..

.::

:

!,

.: .”

::

:.

:.

Define Window

Learn: Nominal =

1784

W. Pixels

0.0

\

Range/Reference

Popup Menu

+.-- Window

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage $‘$$&J& Mist Exit

Pick each digit of the upper warning limit value.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.” Thus, for a value of 69, pick “6,” then pick “9.”

Pick the

Enter key. When you pick the

Enter key, the new value will appear in the upper box under

WARNING RANGE.

Pick the middle box under This is the warning range lower

(“Low”) limit.

WARNING RANGE.

Pick each digit of the lower warning limit value.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-53

-

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range limits and Output Lines (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Enter key.

Pick the upper box under

FAULT RANGE.

Pick each digit of the upper fault limit value.

Pzck the

Enter key.

Comments

When you pick the

Enter

key, the new value will appear in the middle box under

WARNING RANGE.

This is the fault range upper

(“High”)

limit.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter

key, the new value will appear in the upper box under

FAULT RANGE.

This is the fault range lower

(“Low”)

limit.

FAULT RANGE.

Pick each (digit of the lower

,fault limit value.

P1:ck the

Enter key.

Pick the lower box under

WARNING RANGE.

As you pick each digit, it will appear in the calculator

“display.”

When you pick the

Enter

key, the new value will appear in the middle box under

FAU LT RANG E.

When you pick this box, a variation of the

Output

Assignment

popup menu appears on the monitor screen, as follows:

0

0

4 l/Results

5 Z/Results

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage W&&& Mist Exit

Chapter

8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-54

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Assigning Range Limits and Output Lines (continued)

Your Action

Pick the output line number for the

WARNING RANGE.

Comments

This is the

Output Line Selection popup menu. It shows the output, line functions that you assigned to the

Output

Assignment popup menu in Chapter 4, Operating

Environment.

NOTE: This menu shows that only the output lines that you designated in Chapter 4 as ”

1 /Resu Its” are available to this window if it is in tool set # 1

(“Z/Resu Its” if the window is in tool set, #2). These appear in light type, and all others appear in

black

type (meaning that you cannot pick them).

Note also that the

No Output box in the

Output Line

Selection popup menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that no output line is currently assigned to carry

WARNING RANGE signals for this window.

If you prepared an Output Line Planning Sheet in Appendix

A, refer to it for the output line assignments for this window.

From the

Output Line Selection popup menu, pick one of the available output lines boxes labeled

“l/Results”.

When you pick the appropriate box, the shaded square will shift to it.

In addition, the output line number appears in the lower box under

WARNING RANGE.

Pick the lower box under

FAULT RANGE.

Pick the output line number for the

FAULT RANGE.

From the

Output Line Selection popup menu, pick one of the available output lines boxes labeled ”

1 /Resu Its”.

When you pick the appropriate box, the shaded square will shift to it.

In addition, the output line number appears in the lower box under

FAULT RANGE.

-

-

-

Chapter 8 Inspection Tools: Windows

8-55

Selecting Range/Reference

Popup Menu and Parameters

(continued)

Selecting Reference Popup Menu

Select the

Reference popup menu, if appropriate, then assign a reference tool to provide shift and/or rotation compensation to the currently selected window.

You can configure CVIM so that-one of the six reference tools provides shift compensation to a window. During an inspection, if the reference tool detects shift and/or rotation in the workpiece, it shifts and/or rotates the window a corresponding amount and direction.

Use the following steps to select a reference tool for the currently selected window.

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Ref menu box The

Ref menu box shows the currently selected reference in the

Range/Reference tool assigned to this window. popup menu.

Pick the

Ref menu box. When you pick the

Ref menu box, the

Reference popup menu appears, as follows:

Range/Reference

-

L

I

Define Window orno

10 Ref.Win 1

) q

0 Ref.Win 3

I

Pick the appropriate reference toor! from the menu.

I

Window 1: Enabled

I

Previous Next

+--.-- Window

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage : Exit

Note that the

Fixed box in the

Reference menu has a shaded square (0). This indicates that a reference tool is not currently assigned to available reference tools are in light type. All others are shown in them.

black

this window.

Also

note that only the type, which indicates that you cannot pick

If appropriate, pick one of the available reference tools from the

Reference menu.

,-

Chapter

9

Configuration Aids and Storage

Functions

Chapter Objectives

This chapter shows you how to use the configuration aids and the configuration storage and retrieval functions in the

M isc popup menu. This menu appears when you pick the

M isc menu box in the Main Configuration menu.

COnfi uration

Akk and

S&age: Overview

The following functions enable you to store and retrieve configurations and help you adjust the stored configurations to changes that may occur in workpiece position.

Archive:

The CVIM system can store and retrieve configurations and screen images using either its internal non-volatile memory or a plug-in, credit card-sized, battery- backed random access memory (RAM card).

Separately, the CVIM system can also send (upload) configurations to computer or PLC equipment, and then receive (dowrzloczd) those same configurations later, during runtime operations. Since these functions involve data communications, they are described in the CVI-M

Communications Manual, Catalog No. 5370-ND002.

Snapshot:

This function provides a convenient way to acquire a single camera image or display the test pattern.

Analysis:

This function calculates the elapsed time that the system requires to perform an inspection operation for one or more analysis tools. l

Registration:

This function provides a convenient way of re-registering inspection tools to a workpiece when the workpiece position has been moved from its original location in the camera image.

All of these functions are in the M isc popup menu, which you can access after picking the Mix menu box in the Main

Configuration menu.

Using

Configuration Ai& and Storage Functions

This section shows you the details of selecting and using the configuration aids and storage functions.

You will pick the Mist menu box in the Main Configuration menu, which will display the M isc popup menu. You can then select a configuration aid or storage function from one of the menu boxes in the M isc popup menu.

The menu boxes correspond to the four functions listed in the overview.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-2

Selecting Mist Popup Menu

Your first step is to select the

M isc popup menu.

Your Action Comments

Pick

Mis’c in the Main When you pick the

Mist menu box, the

Mist popup menu

Configuration menu. appears above the Main Configuration menu, as follows:

Archival ..a

-

Env.

Camera A

Ref. Line Ref. Win

Gage

Window

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu

Select the

Archival popup menu, then select the appropriate configuration storage or retrieval function.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Archival menu box When you pick the

Archival menu box, the

Archival popup in the

Mist popup menu. menu appears above the

Mist popup menu, as follows:

I

Set Archive Names 0.0

Load Default

Config

-

Load From Card

Format Card

I

Show Card Status

0.0

I

Archival

Popup Menu 1

Snapshot 0.0

Analysis

+- Mist

Popup Menu

I

Registration

Env.

Camera A

Ref. Line

Ref. Win Gage Window ii$ic::’

-

-

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage functions

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu

(continued)

9-3

From the top down, these are the functions in the

Archival popup menu:

Set Archive Names:

When you pick this function, you can give a name to the current configuration and screen image.

The name can contain up to 16 characters consisting of any mix of alphanumeric, punctuation, and other characters.

Load Default Config:

When you pick this function, the default configuration overwrites the current configuration.

Load Config. (Int):

When you pick this function, the previously stored configuration is retrieved from the non- volatile, random access memory (EEPROM) in the CVIM module.

Save

Config. (Int):

When you pick this function, the current configuration is stored in the EEPROM.

Load From Card:

When you pick this function, the previously stored configuration or image data is retrieved from a RAM card, which can be inserted in the

Archive

Memory slot on the CVIM module front panel.

Save to Card:

When you pick this function, the current configuration or image is stored in the RAM card.

Delete From Card:

When you pick this function, you can delete any of the stored configuration(s) and/or image(s) from the RAM card.

Format Card:

When you pick this function, the RAM card is reformatted for storing either configuration or image data.

Previous data is overwritten by the default values.

Convert:

This function is accessible only when you insert a

RAM card containing configurations or images from an earlier CVIM revisions. When you pick this function, the earlier configurations or images are converted to the current

CVIM revisions.

Replace Battery:

When you pick this function, the RAM card receives power from the CVIM module, thereby enabling you to replace the battery without losing data.

Show Card Status:

When you pick this function, a message appears on the monitor screen showing the RAM card status.

In the next several steps, select the storage or retrieval function or the card-formatting function from the

Archival popup menu.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-4

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu (continued)

Using Set Archive Names function

Use this function to name the current configuration and/or current screen image. You can choose any name consisting of up to 16 alphnumeric, punctuation, and miscellaneous printable characters, including the “space” character.

Your Action

Pick the

Set Archive Names menu box, i,f appropriate.

Comments

When you pick the

Set Archive Names menu box, the

Format

Card popup menu will appear alongside the

Archival popup menu, as follows:

-

Image:

Pick the

Coinfig or

Image menu box, as appropriate, to assign a new name.

The

Set Archive Names popup menu is shown as it appears when no names have been assigned.

When you pick the

Config or

Image menu box, a “typewriter keyboard” will appear on the screen, as follows:

The space above the keyboard is shown as it appears when no names have been assigned. If a name had been assigned, it would appear after

Current name.

When you enter a new name, it will appear after

New name.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-5

Selecting Archival Popop

Menu (continued)

Your Action

Using Set Archive Names Function (continued)

Comments

The keyboard has five function keys:

1. The backspace key (+-) erases the last character entered and moves the cursor (A) left one space.

2. The

Esc

(“escape”) key returns to the

Set Archive Names popup menu without changing the current name, if any.

3. The shift keys ( t J ) cause several of the keyboard characters to change between “upper case” and “lower case” characters. The alphabet characters, however, remain in upper case form.

The preceding keyboard illustration shows the “lower case” character set, while the following illustration shows the

“upper case” character set.

I

I! p~#~$~%~-~&~*~

QWERTYUI

A S

(111

-

OP{}Ret

+ c- Cl

D F G H J K L : u 1

I

1~

4.

The

Cl (“clear”) key sets the

New name line to all blanks.

5. The

Ret

(“return”) key enters the new name into the appropriate menu box in the

Set Archive Names popup menu.

Pick each character of the As you pick the characters, they will appear after

New new name. name.

Pick the

Ret key to enter the new name.

When you pick the follows.

Ret key, the new name will appear in the appropriate menu box in the

Set Archive Names menu, as

I Config:

1 Image:

Speedometer Cal. I

Speedometer Dial I

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-6

Selecting Archival Popup Using Save Config. (Int) Function

Menu (continued)

Use this function to store the current configuration (located in the CVIM system RAM) in the CVIM module’s EEPROM.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Save Config. (Int)

When you pick the

Save Config. (Int) menu box, the CVIM appropriate. system will store the current configuration in the EEPROM.

The following message appears in the message box at the upper-left part of the screen:

-

Saving Configuration

This indicates that configuration storage is under way.

After a moment, the following message appears in the message box:

Configuration Saved

This indicates that configuration storage is finished.

Using Load Config. (Int) Function

Use this function to load the configuration stored in the

CVIM module’s EEPROM into the CVIM system RAM.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Load Config. (Int)

When you pick the

Load Config. (Int) menu box, the menu box, if appropriate. following message appears in the message box:

WARNING: Loading a new configuration will destro the current confi uration. Reselect to con irm and begin loa % .

This message is intended to inhibit overwriting the current configuration unintentionally. If you are certain that you are ready to load the stored configuration, continue.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and

Storage

Functions

9-7

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu (continued)

Using Load Config. (Int) Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the

Lolad Config. (Int) menu box again, if appropriate.

Comments

When you pick the

Load Config. (Int) menu box again, the

CVIM system will retrieve the configuration stored in the

EEPROM. This configuration will overwrite the current configuration.

The following message appears in the message box: loading Configuration

This message indicates that configuration loading is under way.

After a moment, the following message appears in the message box:

Configuration Loaded

This message indicates that configuration loading is finished.

Using Load Default Config function

Use this function to load the default configuration, which is stored in the CVIM module’s ROM.

Your Action

Pick the

Load Default Config menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

When you pick the

Load Default Config menu box, the following message appears in the message box:

WARNING: Loading a new configuration will destro the current confi uration. Reselect

3

This message is intended to inhibit overwriting the current configuration unintentionall . If you are certain that you are

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-8

Selecting Archival Popup Using Load Default Config function (continued)

MeIn u (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Load Default Config

When you pick the

Load Default Config menu box again, the menu box again, if appropriate. default configuration will begin loading. The default configuration will overwrite the current configuration.

The following message appears in the message box:

-

Loading Configuration

This message indicates that the default configuration loading is under way.

After a moment, the following message will appear in the message box:

Configuration Loading

This message indicates that the default configuration loading is finished.

-

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-9

_-

Selecting .ArchivaI Popup

Menu

(continued)

Preparing RAM Card

If you need to format a RAM card, store configuration or camera image data on a RAM card, or retrieve configuration or image data from a RAM card, use the following steps:

‘Your Action Comments

Moue the Write Protect switch Use the OFF position only when formatting the RAM card to OFF. or storing configuration or image data.

The write protect switch is located on the back edge of the

RAM card, as shown below:

-

Use a ball point pen or similar instrument to move the write protect switch. When the switch is in the OFF position, you can format the card an&or store configuration or image data.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-10

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu

(continued)

Preparing RAM Card (continued)

Your Action

Insert the RAM card into the

Archive Memory slot on the

CVIM module.

Comments

Insert the end with the metal strip facing right (the arrow on the card label should also be facing right.)

CVIM

Module

-

Pick the

Show Card Status menu box.

When you pick the

Show Card Status menu box, the following message will appear in the message box:

Format:

MEMORY CARD STATUS

Cfgllmg Data Write Protect: Off

Size: 64K Battery: OK Error: None

Verify that th’e battery is OK and the Write Protect switch is set to OFF.

Note that the memory size could be different than the one shown.

NOTE: If the message indicates that the battery is low, you must replace the battery before continuing.

If the battery is OK, skip the next two steps.

If the battery is low, obtain a new battery, then use the next two steps to replace the battery.

-

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu (continued)

Preparing RAM Card (continued)

‘Your Action

With the RAM card inserted in the card slot, pick the

Replace Battery menu box.

Comments

When you pick the

Replace Battery menu box, the following message will appear in the message box on the monitor screen:

The memory card battery may now be replaced.

Depress the lightpen once this has been done.

9-11

Repr!ace the battery.

NOTE: The RAM card is now receiving power from the

CVIM module and must remain in the slot. The will ensure retention of the contents while you replace the battery.

Replace the battery using the tool and instructions included with the new battery. When you finish, press the light pen tip. The message will disappear.

‘Your Action

Pick the

Format Card menu box.

Using Format Card Function

Use this function to format the RAM card for storing either configuration data or image data.

Comments

When you pick the

Format Card menu box, the

Format Card popup menu appears alongside the

Archival popup menu, as follows:

:: I:: ‘: .’ j ;:.x ‘: ,; :::: :;:I : ‘:‘;.: .: : j j’::. :: j ; .,,; :

$!##a:&‘@;

,: ,:::,:.: :: .,: :.. .. :.. .::,.: .:.:..

,;.;:I ;::. jf ? i:;:i i

: : :.:..; :.

Cfghng Data

Pick the

Config./lmg menu box.

When you pick either menu box, the following message appears in the message box:

Formatting Memory Card

After a moment, the following message appears in the message box:

Format Complete

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage functions

9-12

Selecting Archival Popup Using Format Card function (continued)

Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Note that the

Memory Active

LED on the CVIM front panel blinks for a few seconds, then goes out. When the LED goes out, the formatting is finished.

Using Save to Card Function

Use this function to store either the current configuration or the current screen image in the battery-backed RAM card.

Your Action Comments

Pick th.e Save to Card

When you pick the

Save to Card menu box, the

Directory menu box, if appropriate. popup menu appears, as follows:

The

Directory popup menu is shown as it appears when the

RAM card contains no configurations or screen images.

Pick the

Colnfig. or Image

Picking the

Config. menu box stores the current menu box, whichever is configuration; picking the

Image menu box stores the appropriate. current screen image.

When you pick the appropriate menu box, the system will store the configuration or image in the RAM card. One of the following messages will appear in the message box:

Saving Configuration

Saving Image

These messages indicate that configuration or image storage is under way.

NOTE: Do not remove the RAM card yet.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-13

Selecting Archival Popup

Menu

(continued)

Your Action

Using Save to Card

Function

(continued)

Comments

After a moment, one of the following messages will appear in the message box:

Configuration Saved

Image Saved

These messages indicate that the configuration or image storage is finished, and you can now safely remove the RAM card.

Using Load From Card

Function

Use this function to load either a system configuration or a screen image from the RAM card.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Load From Card

When you pick the

Load From Card menu box, the

Directory menu box, if appropriate. popup menu can appear in one of several forms, according to what, if anything, is stored in the RAM card. The following illustration shows some examples when a 64K-byte RAM card is in use:

Speedometer Dial : Image

: Config

: Config Speedometer Cal. : Config

When a 512K-byte RAM card is in use, as many as 16 configurations or 8 camera images could appear under the

Directory menu box.

If the

Directory menu box appears by itself, the RAM card contains neither a configuration nor an image.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage

Functions

9-14

Selecting Archival Popup Using Load From Card Function (continued)

Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the apprqpriate

Config

OF

When you pick the appropriate menu box, the system will

Image menu box. load the configuration or image data from the RAM card.

One of the following messages will appear in the message box:

Loading Configuration or

-

These messages indicate that configuration or image loading is under way.

After a moment, one of the following messages will appear in the message box:

Configuration Loaded

These messages indicate that the configuration or image loading is finished. You can now remove the RAM card.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-75

Selecting ljnapshot Popup

Select the

Snapshot popup menu, then select the appropriate

Menu image display function.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Snapshot menu box

When you pick the

Snapshot menu box, the

Snapshot popup in the

Mlisc popup menu. menu appears above the

Mist popup menu, as follows:

-

Archival a.0

. . . . . . . : .:... . . :: ; :

:jiie~~~~:i:~~:.i:;i;li~. i:.~:‘i;.:‘i::ip.:.i~~;i.ji

Analysis

‘..’ ..I +----- Mist

..a Popup Menu

Registration 0.0

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window

From the top down, these are the functions in the

Snapshot popup menu:

Acquire Image:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system acquires a single camera image.

Display Test Image:

When you pick this function, the

CVIM system generates and displays the same test image that appears on powerup, but without the “banner”message.

Using Acquire Image Function

Select this function to acquire a single image from the currently selected camera (that is! camera A or B, whichever appears in the Camera menu box in the Main Configuration menu).

NOTE: The “Setup” trigger source must be enabled. Refer to the trigger source description in Chapter 4, Operating

Environment.

Your Action

Pick the

Acquire Image menu box, if appropriate.

Comments the

Acquire Image menu box, the CVIM system wlu acquire a single camera image. Each time you pick this menu box, a “new” image will appear on the screen.

Using Display Test Image function

Select this function to display the special test pattern image.

This function can be useful to familiarize yourself with the operations of the various tools.

NOTE: The test pattern image will overwrite the currently displayed camera image.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-16

Selecting Snapshot Popup

Mlenu (continued)

Using Display Test Image Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Displlay Test Image

When you pick the

Display Test Image menu box, the CVIM menu box, if appropriate. system will generate a special image consisting of gray scale bars in the upper half of the image and two binary figures in the lower half.

Note that this is the same image that appears on the screen after powerup.

-

Sekcting Analysis

Select the

Analysis popup menu, then select the analysis

Popup Menu functions.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Analysis menu box When you pick the

Analysis menu box, the

Analysis popup in the Miscpopup menu. menu appears above the

M isc popup menu, as follows:

Tool Display

Archival

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window $&!’ Exit

From the top down, these are the functions in the

Analysis popup menu:

Continuous S&A:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system performs the

Snap & Analyze function continuously.

Snap & Analyze:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system takes a “snapshot” and displays the processing time for the specified tool(s).

Analyze Image:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system displays the processing time for the specified tools using the current stored image.

_

-

-

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-17

Selecting Analysis

Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Tool Display:

When you pick this function, a popup menu appears that enables you specify the particular tool(s) whose processing time you want displayed.

Note that the

Analysis menu “header” displays the following information:

(Tool) Process and

Time

=

(t)ms:

This indicates the processing time (t) in milliseconds for the specified tool(s).

Your Action

Pick the Tool Display menu box, if appropriate.

Using Tool Display Function

Use this function to specify the particular tool(s) whose processing time you want the CVIM system to display.

Comments

When you pick the

Tool Display menu box, the

Tool Display popup menu will appear, as follows:

I

Snap &Analyze

Analyze Image

~

.~~~~~::~~~~l~~~

. . .A.

I

I

0 No Tools

10 Ref. Lines

I

0 Ref. Windows

I

I

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window I$[$iij Exit

Note that the

All Tools box is darkened, indicating that the currently selected tool display mode is

All Tools.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-18

Selecting Analysis

Popup Menu (continued)

Using Tool Display Function (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the appropriate

Tool

When you pick a Tool Display menu box, The CVIM system

Display menu box. performs these functions:

Displays the selected tool(s) over the image. The color of each tool shows whether it passed or failed the inspection.

Displays the contents of the selected menu box in the

“header” box of the

Analysis popup menu.

NOTE: When you pick any of the next three analysis functions, you may see some slight variations in the displayed tool processing time. These variations can result from the specific timing of internal processing routines and from synchronization delays.

The variations are typically small compared to tool processing times; thus, they should not adversely affect the usefulness these calculations have in helping you to estimate the processing times for your application.

Using Analyze Image function

Use this function to display the processing time for the current camera image.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Analyze Image

When you pick the

Analyze Image menu box, the CVIM menu box, ifappropriate. system uses the current stored camera image to display the inspection processing time, in milliseconds, in the “header” box in the

Analysis popup menu.

Your Action

Pick the

Snap &Analyze menu box, if’appropriate.

Using Snap & Analyze Function

Use this function to acquire a new camera image and display the processing time for the tool(s) that you have selected in the

Tool Display popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the

Snap & Analyze menu box, the CVIM system acquires a new camera image (takes a “snapshot”), then displays the inspection processing time, in milliseconds, in the “header” box in the

Analysis popup menu.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-19

Selecting Analysis

Popup

Menu (continued)

Using Continuous S&A Function

Use this function to perform the Snap & Analyze function continuously.

Your Action

Pick the Continuous S&A menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

When you pick the Continuous S&A menu box, the CVIM system continuously acquires a new camera image (takes a

“snapshot”) and displays the inspection processing time, in milliseconds, in the “header” box in the Analysis popup menu. Also, the following message appears in the message box on the monitor screen:

Depress the lightpen to continue

The system repeats the “snap and analyze” process about every half second (if the auto/internal trigger source is enabled); however, the actual rate depends on the type and number of tools that are enabled and the trigger selected.

To end the function, use your finger to press light pen tip, or press the tip against the monitor screen. Hold the tip this way until the message box disappears.

Selecting Registration

Popup Menu

Select the Registration popup menu, then select the registration functions.

NOTE: In order to make use of this function, you must first configure at least one reference tool and then assign the inspection tools to the reference tool.

The Registration function enables you to automatically re- align inspection tools with a workpiece when the workpiece has been moved from its original position in the screen image. You can then saue the shifted tool positions and re- configure them as needed.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-20

Selecting Registration

Popup Menu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Pick the Regist.ration menu

When you pick the

Registration menu box, the

Registration box in the

Miscpopup menu. popup menu appears above the

M kc popup menu, as follows:

Snap & Register

I

Continuous S&R

I

I

I

Archival 0.0

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win

Gage

..:.: ::: :

Window

:.:,

From the top down, these are the functions in the

Registration popup menu:

Snap & Register:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system takes a “snapshot” and re-registers the tools to the new location of the workpiece in the screen image.

Continuous S&R:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system will perform the

Snap & Register function continuously.

Register to Image:

When you pick this function, the CVIM system registers the tools using the current stored image.

Learn Registration:

When you pick this function, the

CVIM system stores or “learns” the re-registered positions of the tools.

Tool Display:

When you pick this function, a

Tool Display popup menu appears. This menu enables you specify the particular tool(s) that you want the system to display.

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage functions

9-2 1

Selecthg Registration

POpUp /bfenu (continued)

Using Tool Display Function

Use this function to specify the particular tool(s) that you want the CVIM system to display during the

Snap &

Register, Continuous

S &

R, and

Register to Image functions.

Tool displays are color coded to indicate the outcome of the

Snap & Register, Continuous 5 & R, or

Register to Image function. The colors have the following meanings:

Green means that the reference tool found its selected feature.

Yellozu means that the reference tool did not find its selected feature.

Red means that the reference tool is assigned to another reference tool, and that reference tool did not find its selected feature.

Green means only that the inspection tool could be properly positioned within the screen image.

Yellour means that the inspection tool was positioned off the screen image.

Red means that the inspection tool could not be positioned because the reference tool to which it is assigned could not find its selected feature.

Your Action

Tool Display menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

When you pick the

Tool Display menu box, the

Tool Display popup menu will appear, as follows:

Tool Display

I

I

Register to Image

Learn Reg:~‘-.‘: --

I

Archival

I

I- ~

1 Analysis

.a.

I

I

-1

Mist

I+- POWD

Men;

No Tools

I

0 Ref. Lines

I 0 Ref. Windows c

0 Gages

1 q

I

Env.

I I I

1 Camera A I Ref. Line I Ref. Win

I

Gage

I

Window

,.

I

I

I

I

I

I

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-22

Selecting Registration

Popup Menu (continued)

Using Tool Display Function (continued)

Your Action

Pick the ap.propriate

Tool

Display menu box.

Comments

Note that the

All Tools box is darkened, indicating that the currently selected tool display mode is

All Tools.

When you pick a

Tool Display menu box, The CVIM system performs darkens the selected menu box and displays the selected tool(s) over the image.

Your Action

Pick the

Snap & Register menu box, if appropriate.

Using Snap & Register Function

Use this function to acquire a new camera image and register all inspection tools that you have assigned to reference tools.

Comments

When you pick the

Snap & Register menu box, the CVIM system performs these tasks:

It re-registers the inspection tools to their assigned reference tools.

Your Action

Pick the

Continuous S&R menu box,

if

appropriate.

Using Continuous S&R Function

Use this function to perform the

Snap & Register function continuously.

Comments

When you pick the

Continuous S&R menu box, the CVIM system continuously acquires a new camera image (takes a

“snapshot”), registers the inspection tools to their assigned reference tools, and displays the new tool locations on the monitor screen. Also, the following message appears in the message box on the monitor screen:

Depress the lightpen to continue

The system repeats the “snap and register” process about every half second (if the auto/internal trigger source is enabled); however, the actual rate depends on the type and number of tools that are enabled and the trigger selected.

To end the function, use your finger to press light pen tip, or press the tip against the monitor screen. Hold the tip this way until the message box disappears.

-

Chapter 9 Configuration Aids and Storage Functions

9-23

Selecting

Popup

Registration

Menu (continued)

Your Action

Pick the Register to Image menu box, if appropriate.

Using Register to Image Function

Use this function to register the tools using the current screen image.

Comments

When you pick the

Register to

Image menu box, the CVIM system uses the same stored camera image to register the inspection tools to the workpiece.

Your Action

Pick the Learn Registration menu box, if appropriate.

Using Learn Registration Function

Use this function to “learn” the new tool locations if you want to modify the tool configurations in these locations.

Comments

When you pick the

Learn Registration menu box, the CVIM system stores the locations of the re-registered inspection, and thereby alters the previous configuration of these tools.

NOTE: Window rotation cannot be ‘learned” for rectangular and elliptical windows. Only shift can be learned.

-

-

,-

Chapter

70

Run time Functions

Chapter Objectives

This chapter shows you how to select and use the runtime functions in the Exit popup menu. This menu appears when you pick the Exit menu box in the Main Configuration menu.

Run time Functions:

The term “runtime functions” refers to the tasks that relate

Overview

directly to the run mode -the mode during which the CVIM system performs inspections and reports inspection results.

Runtime functions include these main tasks:

Initializing the counters, output lines, freeze and halt functions, and operating mode.

Arming a freeze or halt function.

Selecting the tool set and display that will appear when run mode begins.

Selecting the run mode itself-this enables an inspection operation.

All of these functions are in the Exit popup menu, which you can access after picking the Exit menu box in the Main

Configuration menu.

Using Runthe Functions

This remainder of this chapter shows you the details of selecting and using the runtime functions.

You will pick the Exit menu box in the Main Configuration menu, then select one of the runtime functions.

Selecting

Exit

Popup Menu

Your first step is to select the Exit popup menu.

Your Action

Pick Exit in the Main

Configuration menu.

Comments

When you pick the Exit menu box, the Exit popup menu appears above the Main Configuration menu, as follows:

I

Runtime Init. 0.0

I

Runtime ..a

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist -&t:.i

The menu boxes correspond to the functions described in the overview: Runtime Init., Runtime Arm, Runtime Display, and

Runtime.

Chapter 10 Runtime functions

10-2

Selecting Runtime Init.

Select the

Runtime init. popupmenu, then select the

Popup Menu appropriate runtime initialization function.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Runtime Init. menu When you pick the

Runtime Init. menu box, the

Runtime Init. box in the

Exit popup menu. popup menu appears above the

Exit popup menu, as follows:

Halt: Disabled

Freeze: Disabled

Outputs: Disabled

Mode: Learn

Reset Counters

Runtime Arm 0.0 ~1

Env.

I

Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist

From the top down, these are the initialization functions in the

Runtime Init. popup menu:

Stat. Samples:

When you pick this menu box, you can configure the statistics pages

(Stat. Page 1 and

Stat. Page 2) to display the accumulated inspection results from a specified number of sample inspections.

For example, if you specify “50,” the statistics pages will display the accumulated inspection results for each series of

50 inspections. The statistics pages will be updated at the end of each series of 50 inspections, but they will display only the results accumulated from the immediately preceding series of 50 inspections.

Disp. Windows:

When you pick this menu box, you can specify the number of windows whose inspection results are to be displayed in the

Results Page and in

Stat. Page 1.

0 Disp. Gages:

When you pick this menu box, you can specify the number of gages whose inspection results are to be displayed in the

Results Page and in Stat.

Page 1.

-.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

70-3

Selecting Runtime Init.

POpup A&nu (continued)

Your Action Comments

Disp Pro be:

When you pick this menu box, you either enable or disable displaying the light probe data in the

Results Page and in

Stat Page

The

Disp Probe status is either

Enabled or

Disabled.

Halt:

When you pick this menu box, you either enable or disable the halt-on-reject function during the run mode.

When armed, this function causes the CVIM system to freeze the last image and halt any reject condition. (You can resume inspection operations by picking the

Resume menu box in the runtime menu.) The

Halt status is either

Enabled or

Disabled.

Freeze:

When you pick this menu box, you either enable or disable the three “freeze” functions during the run mode.

When armed, these functions cause the CVIM system to freeze the lust image when the selected freeze condition is met. The system continues inspection operations. (You can resume live image displays by picking the

Resume menu box in the runtime menu.) The

Freeze status is either

Enabled or

Disabled.

These are the three freeze conditions: Freeze on first reject, freeze on all rejects, and freeze on the next inspection.

Outputs:

When you pick this menu box, you either enable or disable signal outputs to the discrete output lines. This function determines whether or not the CVIM system can send signals to the assigned output lines. The

Outputs status is either

Enabled or

Disabled.

Mode:

When you pick this menu box, you select either the standard operating mode or the learn operating mode.

The main difference is this: When the CVIM system is in the learn operating mode, it gathers statistical information from each inspection cycle. You can use these statistics during configuration to help you determine tool range parameters and analyze system operation. During the run mode, you can watch these statistics accumulate in real time on one of the statistics display “pages.” Using the learn mode increases processing time slightly.

In the standard operating mode, the system does not accumulate and display statistics. It does, however, display inspection results.

Reset Counters:

When you pick this menu box prior to starting the run mode, the statistical and pass/fail counters are reset, along with the values in the statistics displays.

In the next several steps, configure the status of each

Runtime Init. function according to your needs.

Chapter 10 Run time Functions

IO-4

Selecting Runtime Init.

Popup Menu (continued)

Selecting Halt Status

The halt status determines whether the halt-on-reject function can be armed to halt an inspection operation when a reject condition (that is, an inspection failure) occurs from any cause.

Note that after you set the

Halt status to enable, you must arm the halt-on-reject function, using the

Runtime Arm popup menu or the

Arm menu box in the Run Mode menu.

This is described later.

Your Action

Look the Halt lt2enu box.

Pick the

Halt menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Halt menu box shows the current status of the halt function:

Enabled or

Disabled.

If you need to change the

Halt status from

Ena bled to

Disabled, or vice versa, pick the

Halt menu box once. (If you pick this box repeatedly, the status will toggle between

Enabled and

Disabled.)

Selecting Freeze Status

The freeze status determines whether the freeze functions can be armed to freeze an image when one of the three freeze conditions is met. In all cases, inspection operations will continue.

The three freeze conditions are these:

Freeze on 1st reject -The screen image will freeze when the first reject-causing condition occurs (such as a window pixel count being outside range limits).

Freeze on all rejects - The screen image will freeze whenever a reject-causing condition occurs. The frozen image will remain until the next reject condition occurs.

Freeze on the next inspection - The screen image will freeze after the next inspection cycle, regardless of whether a reject-causing condition has occurred. The frozen image will remain until you pick the

Resume or

Go on Reject menu box, or pick another freeze function.

Note that after you set the

Freeze status to enabZe, you must arm the specific freeze function, using the

Runtime Arm popup menu or the

Arm menu box in the Run Mode menu.

This is described later.

-

Your Action Comments

Look at the

Freeze menu box. The

Freeze menu box, shows the current status of the freeze function:

Ena bled or

Disabled.

Pick the

Freeze menu box, if appropriate.

If you need to than e functions from

Ena

% the current status of the freeze led to Disabled, or vice versa, pick the

Freeze menu box once. (If you pick this box repeatedly, the status will toggle between

Enabled and

Disabled.)

-

Chapter 10

Rontime

Functions

10-S

Selectring Runtime Init.

Popup

Menu

(continued)

Selecting Output Line Status

The output line status determines whether the

14 discrete output lines are enabled or disabled for sending signals to your production equipment. When the output lines are enabled and the CVIM system is performing inspections, the signal that appears on any particular output line depends on both the inspection results and the function you assigned to that line.

A

WARNING: The output lines should not be enabled or connected to your production equipment while you are developing and testing your CVIM configurations. Otherwise, an unpredictable and possibly dangerous reaction in your equipment may cause injury to personnel.

Your Action

Look at the

Outputs menu box.

Pick the

Outputs menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Outputs menu box shows the current status of the output-line function:

Enabled or

Disabled.

If you need to change the current status of the output-line function from

Enabled to Disabled, or vice versa, pick the

Outputs menu box once. (If you pick this box repeatedly, the status will toggle between

Enabled and

Disabled.)

Selecting Operating Mode Status

The operating mode status determines whether the CVIM system will operate in the learn operating mode or the standard operating mode. The main difference is that in the learning mode the system accumulates and displays statistics on the basis of inspection results. You can use these statistics during configuration for setting tool range limits.

In the standard mode, the CVIM system does not accumulate and display statistics. You would normally operate the system in this mode after configuration is complete and the system is in production use.

Look at the

Your Action

Mode menu box.

Pick the

Mode menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

The

Mode menu box shows the current status of the

CVIMsystem operating mode.

If you need to change the system operating mode from

Standard to Learn, or vice versa, pick the

Mode menu box once. (If you between ick this box repeatedly, the status will toggle led and

Disabled.)

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

10-6

Selecting Runtime

Init.

Popup Menu (continued)

Selecting Reset Counters function

The Reset Counters function resets the counters and other data in the Results, Stat Page 1, and Stat Page 2 display pages, which are described later in this chapter. It also resets the data in all of the inspection statistics table for each inspection tool (these tables appear when you assign range limits and output lines).

Note that the CVIM system tabulates and displays statistics only when it is in the learn operating mode.

Your Action

Pick the Reset Counters menu box, if appropriate.

Comments

When you pick Reset Counters, the counters and data in the tables are reset to zeros.

-

Selecting

Runtime Arm

Popup Menu

Select the Runtime Arm popup menu, then select the appropriate halt or freeze function to be “armed” during run mode operations.

The main function of the Runtime Arm popup menu is to enable you to “arm” the halt or freeze function that you enabled in the Runtime Init. popup menu.

Your Action

Pick the Runtime Arm menu box in the Exit popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the Runtime Arm menu box, the Runtime

Arm popup menu appears above the Exit popup menu, as follows:

0 Go on Reject

I

I

0 Halt on Reject

---I

Runtime Init.

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist i’f$t&+ .;:i

Note that the Freeze All Rejs box in the menu is shaded and has a filled square (0). This indicates that for any reject that occurs during runmode operations, the image with the reject- causing condition will “freeze,” but inspections will continue.

-

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

70-7

Selecting Runtime Arm

POpup Menu (continued)

Your Action

Pick the appropriate freeze or halt function to be armed.

Comments

You can arm a freeze or halt function only if you enabled it in the Runtime init. popup menu.

Selecting Runtime Display

Popup Menu

Select the Runtime Display popup menu, then select the appropriate runtime display function.

The main function of the Runtime Display menu is to enable you to select the “default” display that you want to appear on the monitor screen when you start the run mode. After the run mode begins, you can change the display.

Your Action

Pick the Runtime Display menu box in the Exit popup menu.

Comments

When you pick the Runtime Display menu box, the Runtime

Display popup menu appears above the Exit popup menu, as follows:

Tool Set: 1

I

0 Failed Tools

I

1 0 Stat. Page 1

0 Stat. Page 2

Runtime Init.

I

Runtime Arm moo

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist y&@j’j

Note that the Results Page box in the menu is shaded and has a filled square (0). This indicates that Results Page is the current display selection. Thus, at the start of the run mode, the monitor screen will display the results page for the tool set number shown in the Tool Set menu box. (No data will appear, however, until triggers are received.)

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

70-8

Selecting Runtime Display

POpup Menu (continued)

Pick the appropriate runtime tool set and display selection.

Here is a brief description of the menu boxes in the

Runtime

Display popup menu:

Tool Set:

This box shows the currently selected tool set number. This tool set applies to all of the remaining selections in the Runtime Display menu. When you pick this box repeatedly, the tool set number toggles between 1 and 2.

Image Only:

When you pick this box, only the camera image (and run mode menu) will appear on the monitor screen.

Failed Tools:

When you pick this box, during the run mode the monitor screen will display only the enabled tools in the currently selected tool set whose “results” exceed a warning or fault limit.

All Tools:

When you pick this box, during the run mode the monitor screen will display a2Z enabled tools in the currently selected tool set.

I/O

Page:

When you pick this box, the I/O page will appear on the monitor screen at the start of the run mode. The I/O page shows the “pass/fail” condition of all enabled tools assigned to output lines having “results” and Master Range function assignments. Separately, the I/O page also shows the “pass/fail” condition of each enabled tool in the currently selected tool set.

Results Page:

When you pick this box, the Results page will appear on the monitor screen at the start of the run mode.The results page shows the tool measurement readings and any faults that may occur during each inspection cycle.

Stat. Page 1: appear on the monitor screen at the start of the run mode.

The Stat 1 page shows statistics for the light probe, gages, and windows resulting from each inspection cycle while the

CVIM system is in the learn operating mode.

When the system is in the standard operating mode, the Stat

1 and Stat 2 pages cannot be selected.

Stat. Page 2:

This functions the same as the Stat 1 page, except it shows statistics for the reference windows only.

If appropriate, change the tool set number and/or pick a different display selection. When you activate the run mode, this display selection will appear automatically on the monitor screen.

-

-

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

10-9

Selecting Runtime

Select the

Runtime popup menu, then select either the run

Popup

Menu mode function to start an inspection operation, or select the

Save Config. (Int) function to store the current configuration in the CVIM module’s EEPROM.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Runtime menu box When you pick the

Runtime menu box, the

Runtime popup in the

Exit popup menu. menu appears above the

Exit popup menu, as follows:

Goto Runmode

Save Config. (Int)

Runtime Init. 0.0

- Runtime

Popup Menu

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist

Selecting Save Config. (Int) function

Select the

Save Config. (Int) function to store the current configuration in CVIM system EEPROM. This function operates the same as the

Save Config. (Int) function described in Chapter 9, Configuration Aids

and

Storage.

Your Action Comments

Pick the

Save Config. (Int)

When you pick the

Save Config. (Int) menu box, the CVIM menu box, if appropriate. system will store the current configuration in the EEPROM.

The following message appears in the message box in the upper part of the monitor screen:

Saving Configuration

This indicates that configuration storage is under way.

NOTE:

If a power interruption occurs here, configurations in both the CVIM system EEPROM and RAM will be lost.

After a moment, the following message appears in the message box:

Configuration Saved

This indicates that configuration storage is finished.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

IO-70

Selecting Goto Runmode Function

Select the

Goto Runmode to set the CVIM system to the run mode.

Note that the CVIM system will not actually perform an inspection operation until it receives a trigger signal. The trigger source that you set earlier (Chapter 4, Operating

Erzvironment) will determine the system’s response when you select the

Goto Runmode function.

Thus, if you have selected Auto/Internal as the runtime trigger source, the system will immediately begin performing inspections. If you have selected the I/O

(discrete) or hosted trigger source, the system will wait until it receives a trigger signal from the I/O or host source before it performs an inspection. It will perform ooze inspection per trigger signal.

Your Action Comments

Pick the Goto Runmode

When you pick the

Goto Runmode menu box, the CVIM menu box to start an system will enter the run mode, and the Run Mode menu inspection operation. will appear at the bottom of the screen, as follows:

Reset Stat’s

-

-

In addition to the Run Mode menu, the display selection that you picked earlier in the

Runtime Display popup menu will appear on the screen above the menu. The contents of these display selections are explained in detail in the following section.

If you want to change the display after the run mode begins, you can do so by picking the

Display menu box in the Run

Mode menu, as follows:

Reset Stat’s

Note that the seven display selections appear in boxes alongside the

Display menu box. The I/O Page selection is darkened, indicating that the I/O Page is the currently selected display appearing on the monitor screen.

To change to another display selection, simply pick the box with that selection. The current selection (I/O Page, in this example) will be replaced by the new selection.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

Interpreting Run Mode

Displays

10-l 1

At the start of the run mode, the monitor screen diplays the camera image and Run Mode menu either alone or in combination with either tool symbols or a display page. The specific symbol(s) or table appearing on the screen depends, as shown earlier, on which display selection you picked in the Runtime Display popup menu.

NOTE: Tool processing takes precedence over tool display.

Thus, although all tools are processed, in certain high-speed applications, some tools may not always be displayed.

These symbols and display pages show, in various forms, the results of each inspection operation for the currently selected tool set.

Here is a detailed description of these symbols and display pages:

Image Only

If you picked this display selection, only the camera image and Run Mode menu appear on the monitor screen. You may want to use this selection to view the complete camera image. failed Tools

This display selection shows the camera image and the enabled analysis tools (except the light probe) that fail an inspection will appear on the screen. These are the tools whose inspection “results” are outside one of the warning or fault range limits that you set during configuration.

On a color monitor, the tools whose results exceed a fault limit appear in red. The tools whose results exceed a warning limit only appear in yellow.

All Tools

This display selection shows the camera image and al2 enabled analysis tools (except the light probe). This applies whether the tools pass or fail the inspection.

On a color monitor the tools that pass an inspection appear in green. These are the tools whose inspection results are within both the fault and the warning range limits.

The tools that fail an inspection appear in red. These are the tools whose inspection results are outside one of the fault range limits.

The tools whose results are outside one of the warning range limits, but are within both fault range limits appear in yellow.

Chapter

10 Rontime

Functions

IO-12

Interpreting Run Mode

Displays (continued)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7. a.

1.

2.

3.

4.

II0 Page

If you picked the I/O

Page display selection, the I/O Page will appear on the screen when you start the run mode:

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

INSPECTION RESULT OUTPUTS

Disabled/forced

5.

6.

7. a.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13. +

14. -

GAGES

17. ia.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

5.

6.

7. a.

1.

2.

3.

4.

LIGHT

PROBE

REFERENCE

LINES I WINDOWS

1.

2.

3.

WINDOWS

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

1.

2.

3.

17. ia.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

The I/O Page is a table that summarizes the inspection

“results” for all enabled analysis tools in whichever tool set is currently selected. These appear in the

GAGE, WINDOWS,

LIGHT PROBE, and REFERENCE LINES / WINDOWS blocks.

The table uses color blocks (color monitor) or letters and words (monochorme monitor) to indicate the

“pass/warning/fail” status of the inspection results.

In the

INSPECTION RESULT OUTPUTS block, the I/O Page shows the “pass/fail” status of each “results” output line to which an enabled analysis tool is assigned. The L/O page also shows the “pass/fail” status of the Master Range signal if it is assigned to an output line.

Appearing directly under the

INSPECTION RESULT OUTPUTS heading is the status of the output lines. This can take one of the following forms:

No message - The output lines are ena bled.

Disabled - The output lines are disabled.

Forced -The output lines are enabled, but some may be forced to either the “on” or the “off’ state by a host system.

The lines that are forced “on” have a plus ( + ) sign (see line

13 in the figure above). The lines that are forced “off’ have a minus (-) sign (see line 14).

Disabled/forced - The output lines are disabled, but some may be forced to either the “on” of the “off’ state. (The

“forced” condition takes precedence over the “disabled” condition.)

-

-

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

10-13

Interpreting Run Mode 110 Page (continued)

Disp/ays (continued)

In all of the above cases, the appearance of the inspection results (the color blocks or words and letters) nay not reflect the output line status.

The I/O Page is updated at the end of each inspection, time permitting.

NOTE 1: Since more than one tool can be assigned to a particular output line, that line will indicate an “off’ condition only if all tools assigned to it pass inspection. If one tool fails inspection, the output line will indicate an “on” condition regardless of whether the other tools pass or fail.

NOTE 2: The I/O Page indicates only the “results” for analysis tools. It does not show signals from strobe, trigger

NAK, data valid, or module busy conditions.

On a color monitor screen, the I/O Page uses small colored blocks to indicate inspection results for the analysis tools and output lines, as follows:

Green blocks indicate a pass condition for tools and an off condition for the output lines.

Red blocks indicate a fail condition for tools and an on condition for the output lines.

YeZlow blocks indicate a warning condition for the light probe, gages, and windows only. They do not apply to reference tools and output lines.

The color blocks appear as shown in the following example of a color

I/O Page:

GAGES WINDOWS

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions lo-74

Interpreting Run Mode

Displays (continued)

I/O Page (continued)

Output lines 1,2, and 4 are “green,” indicating an “off” condition. This means that the tool inspection results connected to these lines are ulithin their respective range limits,

Output lines 3,5, and 6 are “red,” indicating an “on” condition. This means that the tool inspection results connected to these lines are outside one of their respective range limits. Note that a tool whose inspection results are outside a warning range limit causes a “red” output line indication.

Gages 1,2, and 4 are “green,” indicating that the inspection results for these gages are within both the warning and the fault limits.

Gage 3 is “yellow,” indicating that the inspection results for this gage are within the fault limits, but outside one of the warning limits.

Gages 5 and 7 are “red,” indicating that the inspection results for this gage are outside both the fault limits and the warning limits.

NOTE: The I/O Page does not show how the tools are assigned to the output lines; thus, you cannot determine by looking only at the I/O Page whether output lines 1,2, and 4 correspond to gages 1,2, and 4, or whether output lines 3,5, and 6 correspond to gages 3,5, and 6. To determine the gage- to-output line assignments, you will need to look at the output line assignments for each gage.

On a monochrome monitor screen, the I/O Page uses letters and words to indicate inspection results for the analysis tools and output lines, as follows:

Upper case P indicates a pass condition for all tools.

Upper case W indicates a warning condition for the light probe, gages, and windows.

The words Off and On indicate the condition of the output lines.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

10-15

Interpreting

Displays

Run Mode

(continued)

110 Page (continued)

The words and letters appear as shown in the following example of a monochrome I/O Page:

1. Off

2. Off

3. On

4. Off

INSPECTION RESULTS OUTPUTS

Disabled

5. On

6. On

7.

9.

10.

11.

13.

14.

8. 12.

GAGES

I.

)

;:

3.

P

P

9.

10. w 11.

1. P 12.

5. F 13.

5. F 14.

7. 15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31

32.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

LIGHT

PROBE

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

REFERENCE

LINES / WINDOWS

1.

2.

3.

WINDOWS

1.

2.

3.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

Output lines 1,2, and

4 are “off.” This means that the inspection results to these lines are from tools that have passed their inspections.

Output lines 3,5, and 6 are “on.” This means that the inspection results to these lines are from tools that have either failed their inspections or have a warning condition.

Note that a warning condition from a tool causes an “on” output line indication.

Gages 1,2, and 4 show a “P,” indicating that the inspection results for these gages are within both the warning and the fault limits.

Gage 3 shows a ‘W,” indicating that the inspection results for this gage are within the fault limits, but outside one of the warning limits.

Gages 5 and 7 shows a “F,” indicating that the inspection results for this gage are outside one of the fault limits.

As was stated in the preceeding NOTE, the I/O Page does not show how the tools are assigned to the output lines.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions lo-16 interpreting

Displays

Run Mode

(continued)

Results Page

If you picked the Results Page display selection, the Results

Page will appear on the screen when you start the run mode, as follows:

I

TRI GGERS FAULTS

Act

:epted:

Mi! ssed :

To1 tal:

123456 Master Fault:

0 Light Probe:

123456

GA ,GE

1.

2.

3.

6

Faults

1

12

Fail Low

130.000

25.000

WI NDOW Faults Fail Low

1. 1 3000.000

2.

3.

Warn Low

140.000

28.000

Warn Low

3100.000

12

1

Reference Lines / Windows

1. 2 1.

2.

3.

2.

3.

Reading

150.187

32.354

Reading

3214.485

Warn Hi

160.000

34.000

Warn Hi

3300.000

Fail Hi

170.000

37.000

Fail Hi

3400.000

1

The Results Page is a table that summarizes inspection results for all enabled analysis tools for whichever tool set is currently selected.

The Results Page is updated at the end of each inspection, time permitting.

The TRIGGER section shows the total number of trigger signals received; and of those, the number that the system was able to process and the number that it could not process.

Typically, the CVIM system will miss a trigger if the trigger appears before the system is finished processing data from the last trigger.

The FAULT section shows the accumulation of faults from the light probe and any of the reference or inspection tools.

In the example page above, the light probe has 1 fault and the master fault has 12 faults (this is from gage 1).

The absence of numbers next to reference lines 2 and 3 and reference windows 2 and 3 indicate that these tools are not enabled. This also applies to gages and windows.

The GAGE and WINDOW sections show the accumulation of faults, the low and high range limits that you set for each tool, and the “reading” or measurement from the current inspection. On the color monitor, the readings appear in green,.red, or yellow, indicating a pass, fail, or warning condltlon.

-

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

IO-17 lnterpre ting Run Mode

Displays (continued)

Results Page (continued)

Note that in the GAGE section and WINDOW section above, only gages 1 to 4 and windows 1 to 3 are shown. You can display the results for the remaining gages and windows by picking the

Page

4 (page down) menu box in the

Runtime menu. This will scroll the page so that you will now see the results for gages 5 - 8 and windows 4 - 6. Pick

Page

J again and gages 9 - 12 and windows will appear. You can repeat this process until gages 29 - 32 and windows 22 - 24 appear.

To reverse the page scroll, pick the

Page t (page up) menu box.

NOTE: The

Page i menu box has additional functions.

When you pick the

Page

J box successively, reference tool data will appear in the FAULT block as shown in the following figures.

TRIGGERS Reference Line Readings

Accepted:

Missed:

Total :

123456 1 .X: 157

0 Y: 203

123579 8: 88.33”

Warn Low GAGE

5.

6.

7.

8.

Faults Fail Low

WINDOW Faults Fail Low

4.

5.

6.

2.x:

Y:

0:

Warn Low

Reading

Reading

3.x:

Y:

0:

Warn Hi Fail Hi

Warn Hi Fail Hi

The block now displays “readings” (“results” data) from all enabled reference lines. This data consists of the X and/or Y coordinates of the selected “feature” (edge or midpoint).

Note that the gage and window numbers have advanced to the next level.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

IO-78

Interpreting Run Mode

Disp/ays (continued)

Results Page (continued)

After the second page-down the block appears as follows:

TRIGGERS Reference Window Readings

Accepted:

Missed:

Total :

123456

0

123579

1.1 X: 362

Y: 106

5: 4

1.2 X: 378

Warn Low

Y: 380

5: 2

Reading

1.3 x:212

Y: 213 s: 2

Warn Hi xx:

Y:

317

233

8: 62.58"

Fail Hi GAGE

9.

10.

11.

12.

Faults Fail Low

WINDOW Faults Fail Low

7.

8.

9.

Warn Low Reading Warn Hi Fail Hi

The block now displays the “readings” (“results” data) from each active feature in an enabled reference window # 1. (No data appears for inactive features or disabled windows.)

The results data in the columns labeled “1.1,” “1.2,” and

“1.3” consists of the X and Y coordinates of the upper-left corner(s) of the feature window(s) and the “score” value

(S).

The results data in the column labeled “2” consists of the X and Y coordinates of the shift reference point and the angle

(6) of the rotation reference line (these are described in

Chapter 6 under the Using

Learn

Function heading in the

Reference Windows section.)

Note that the gage and window numbers have advanced to their next levels.

The third and fourth page-downs display the same type of information: They advance the gage and window numbers and display the results for reference windows #2 and #3, respectively.

Subsequent page-downs return the block to the FAULT display and advance the gage and window numbers. The page-down function remains active until the last window or gage number appears.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

70-79

Interpreting Run Mode

Displays (continued)

Stat I Page

If you picked the Stat

1 Page display selection, the Stat

1

Page will appear on the screen when you start the run mode, as follows:

GAGE Samples

1.

2.

3.

4.

123

123

123

WINDOW Samples

1.

2.

3.

4.

Mean

37.287

145.395

6.000

Mean

123 3245.245

123 181.662

123 11.000

Std. Dev.

1.348

5.386

0.000

Std. Dev.

32.399

3.542

0.000

Min.Reading

36.413

141.165

6.000

MinReading

322 1.476

179.198

11 .ooo

Max. Reading

39.293

148.223

6.000

Max. Reading

3278.243

183.42 1

11.000

The Stat

1 Page is a table that summarizes inspection results for all enabled gages and windows in whichever tool set is currently selected. It is updated at the end of each inspection, time permitting.

Note in the display example above that no results data appear alongside gage #3 and window #4. The reason is that these tools are disabled.

The number of gages and windows that appear in the Stat

1

Page depends on the selections that you make in the

Disp.

Windows, Disp. Gages, and

Disp. Probe menu boxes in the

Runtime Init. popup menu.

The following tables show the maximum number of gages and/or windows that can be displayed in all combinations with the

Disp. Probe display disabled and enabled.

Gages

Windows

Light Probe Display disabled:

0 0 0 1 2 3 4

12 11 10 9 8 7 6

5

5

6

4

7

3

8

2

9

1

10

0

11

0

12

0

Gages

Windows

0

9

Light Probe Display enabled:

0

8

0

7

1

6

2

5

3

4

4

3

5 6

2 1

7

0

8

0

9

0

Chapter 10 Runtime functions

10-20 interpreting Run Mode Stat 1 Page (continued)

Displays (continued)

If you pick the

Disp. Windows

(or

Disp. Gages) menu box, then pick the Help symbol, the help message box will show the current maximum number of windows (or gages) whose results data can be displayed in the Stat

1 Page.

The PROBE, GAGE and WINDOW sections all show the number of inspections performed, the mean “reading” or measurement, the standard deviation, the minimum reading, and the maximum reading for the enabled probe and for each enabled gage and window.

Note that you can scroll this page using the

Page

J and

Page t menu boxes, as with the

Results page, above. Note also that you can reset the statistics to zero by picking the

Reset Stat‘s menu box.

-

Stat 2 Page

If you picked the Stat 2

Page display selection, the Stat 2

Page will appear on the screen when you start the run mode, as follows:

1.1

1.2

1.3

2.1

2.2

2.3

3.1

3.2

3.3

Samples

1234

1234

1234

1234

REFERENCEWINDOWSTATISTICS

Mean

0.406

0.675

0.105

,746

Std. Dev.

2.031

3.467

0.542

1.334

Min.Reading

12

19

3

6

Max. Reading

36

57

10

20

-

The Stat 2

Page is a table that summarizes inspection results for all enabled reference windows.in whichever tool set is currently selected. The Stat 2

Page is updated at the end of each inspection, time permitting.

This table shows the number of inspections performed, the mean “reading” or measurement, the standard deviation, the minimum reading, and the maximum reading for each of the three features in each enabled reference window. Blank lines - indicate a disabled reference window or an inactive feature.

Note that you can reset the statistics to zero by picking the

Reset Stat’s menu box.

-

Chapter

10 Runtime functions

IO-21

Displaying Other

If you are using both tool sets, you can alternately display

Tool Set the two tool sets by picking the

Display TS menu box successively.

When you pick the menu box, the current tool set number appears in the box. Thus,

Display TS 1 becomes

Display TS 2, and vice versa. Note that the image will also change if the other tool set uses the second camera.

Using Run Mode Halt and

To use the halt and/or freeze functions, you can enable and

Freeze Functions

“arm” these functions in the

Runtime lnit popup menu, as explained earlier.

You can also arm the enabled freeze or halt function by picking the

Arm menu box in the

Runmode menu and pick the appropriate arm selection, as follows:

Reset Stat’s

~~::’

Display

: $&j:&j

LOO 1:: :!.:

.:: i. ::

:

1st Rej All Rej’s Next lnsp

0 Halton

Reject

Note that the five arm selections appear in boxes alongside the

Arm menu box. The

Go on Reject selection is darkened, indicating that the Go on Reject function is currently enabled. This means that the system will perform inspections and update the screen image regardless of the occurrance of a reject condition.

If the halt or freeze function is disabled (in the

Runtime lnit menu), you will not be able to pick the corresponding arm box. This is indicated by the black lettering in the box(es).

To arm the halt function or one of the freeze functions, pick the appropriate arm box.

Once you have armed the halt and/or freeze function, the system will respond when the iven condition occurs. For example, if you have enabled t a e freeze function and then pick the

Freeze 1st Rej box, the system will freeze the screen image and tool status when a reject condition from any tool occurs.

The system will continue inspections when the freeze function is enabled and armed, and will halt inspections when the halt function is enabled and armed.

If you want to resume normal inspection operations after a freeze or halt occurs, pick the

Resume box. The system will continue normal inspection operations until the next freeze or halt condition occurs.

If you want to disarm halt or freeze conditions (without disabling these functions in the

Ru ntime I nit menu), pick the

Go on Reject box.

Chapter 10 Runtime Functions

1 o-22

Using Run Mode Halt and

NOTE: If you return to the setup mode with a “frozen” or

Freeze Functions (continued)

“halted” image on the monitor screen, and the camera resolution is set to 512H x 512V, any “learn” operation you perform on the frozen or halted image may produce a different result than is indicated on the

Results Page. See

Chapter 5, Camera and Lighting Parameters, for more information.

-

-

-

Appendix

A

Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

Appendix Objective

The objective of this appendix is to help you plan:

The number of discrete output lines (up to 14) that your application will require.

The function that each output line will perform in your application.

The assignment of analysis tool “results” to output lines.

The assignment of status signals to output lines.

The electrical and mechanical connections of the trigger

(input) and output lines to your production equipment.

Plannling OuQwt Line

Assrgnmen ts

This section provides a planning sheet that you can use to lay out the function and tooE assignments for output lines.

The term “function assignment” refers to the type of signal information that you want an output line to carry to your production equipment.

The term “tool assignment” refers to the tool(s) that you assign to an output line. Note that tools can be assigned only to output lines that you have assigned a “results” function.

These output lines will carry the “pass/fail” results signals from the tools during each inspection.

The next section, PZanning Output Line Connections, provides electrical and timing diagrams and data. You will use these to identify and connect the output lines to your production equipment.

Using Output Line

The Output Line Planning Sheet is a form on which you can

Planning Sheet lay out your plans for each output line. On this form you can account for: a The 64 gages and their warning and fault outputs. a The 48 windows and their warning and fault outputs. a The 12 reference tools and their “passifail” outputs. a The two light probes and their warning and fault outputs.

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

A-2

Using Output line

P/arming Sheet (continued)

Line

No.

Here is an example of how an Output Line Planning Sheet could be filled out:

EXAMPLE OUTPUT LINE PLANNING SHEET:

Output Line

Functions and

Tool Assianments

Output Line

Function

Tool

Gage Window

Reference

Tool

Light

Probe

No. NO. Rng. NO. Rng. NO. Rng. NO. Rng. Line Win. Cam. Rng.

I Results I I w 2 w 1 w 2 w

In the example planning sheet, the entries under “Output

Line Function” have the following meanings:

Output Line

1: The Results function is assigned to line 1.

The Warning Range results (W) for gages l-4 and windows 1 and 2 of tool set #l are assigned to output line 1.

Output Line

2: The Results function is assigned to line 2.

The Fault Range results (F) for gages l-4 and windows 1 and

2 of tool set # 1 are assigned to output line 2.

Output Line

3: The Results function is assigned to line 3.

The “pass/fail” results for reference line 1 and reference window 1 of tool set #l are assigned to line 3.

-

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

A-3

Using Output line l

4: The Results function is assigned to line 4.

Phning Sheet (continued)

The Warning Range result from the camera A light probe is assigned to line 4. Camera A is assigned to tool set #l.

Output Line

5: The Results function is assi

The Fault Range result from the camera A lig a assigned to line 5. ned to line 5. t probe is

Output Line

6: The Results function is assigned to line 6.

The Warning and Fault Range results for gages 1 and 2 of tool set #2 are assigned to line 6.

Output Line

7: The Strobe function for tool set #l is assigned to line 7.

Output Line

8: The Trigger NAK function for tool set #l is assigned to line 8.

Output Line

9: The Master Range function for tool set #l is assigned to line 9.

Output Line

10: The Data Valid function for tool set #1 is assigned to line 10.

Output Line

12: The Module Busy function is assigned to line 11. (Note that this function does not relate to a tool set.)

Output Lines 12-14:

These lines are not used.

Note that output lines l-6 are assigned the Results function.

These lines will carry “pass/fail” results from the analysis tools to your production equipment. Lines 7-11 are assigned other functions. Lines 12- 14 are not used.

Here is a brief explanation of the signal functions that you can assign to the output lines:

Module Busy: This signal goes high when the CVIM system enters the configuration mode and during a configuration download operation. Module Busy goes low when the system enters the runmode (whether or not triggers are present).

You can assign the Module Busy function to only one output line.

NOTE:

All of the remaining signal functions produce a pulse whose duration depends on the number of milliseconds that you assign to the Duration/l (or Duration/2) parameter.

(The “1” and “2” designate tool set # 1 and tool set #2.)

1 /Results: This signal occurs when the “results” data of a tool inspection exceed the warning or fault limits. (The tool must be assigned to an output line that has already been assigned the l/Results function.)

You can assign the l/Results signal function to any unassigned output line.

As noted above, the l/Results signal function must be assigned to an output line before any tool can be assigned to that line. Thus, if you wanted inspection results from

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

A-4

Using Output

Line

Planning Sheet (continued)

Ref. Line # 2 to be assigned to output line #lo, you would first have to assign the l/Results signal function to output line #lo.

Note also that you can assign the inspection results from any tool in tool set #l to an output line to which you have already assigned the l/Results signal function.

1 /Data Valid: This signal occurs when the CVIM system has completed an inspection using tool set # 1. The inspection results signals (the “data”) are stable on all output lines assigned to the l/Results signal function.

Note that l/Data Valid does not indicate whether an inspection has passed or failed. That is the task of the output lines assigned to the l/Results signal function.

You can assign the l/Data Valid function to only one output line. l/Trigger Nak: This signal occurs when the CVIM system receives a trigger input signal for tool set #l, but cannot process that trigger.

You can assign the l/Trigger Nak function to only one output line.

1 /Master Range: This signal occurs when any tool in tool set #l fails its inspection task. For a light probe or inspection tool, this means a “results” value that exceeds a

fault

range limit. For a reference tool, it means failing to find an edge or feature.

You can assign the l/Master Range Alarm function to only one output line.

1 /Strobe: This signal occurs within lms after the CVIM system receives a trigger input signal.

You can assign the l/Strobe function to only one output line. l/Duration (n)ms: This determines the pulse duration, in milliseconds, of all pulse-type signals.

2fTrigger NAK, 2IMaster Range, a/Data Valid, B/Strobe,

2/Results, and2IDuration (n)ms: These functions apply to the tools in tool set #2.

In your application, the function and tool assignment(s) for each output line will of course depend on the specific requirements of your production equipment.

You will find a full-page, blank copy of the planning sheet on the last page of this appendix. We suggest that you do not mark that page, but use it instead as a copy master, and use the copies to prepare your output line plans.

Keep in mind that a compEeted planning sheet can serve also as a record of your output line usage. You may find it desirable to store your filled-out planning sheets in a file folder or loose leaf binder.

-

-

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

Using Output Signal

Timing Data

A-5

To make proper use of the signal data available to the output lines, you must first understand the timing relationships that exist between the trigger input signal

(which starts each inspection cycle) and the output signals.

Knowing these signal timing relationships enables you to accurately synchronize the inspection cycles with your production equipment.

Timing charts A, B, and C, show the timing relationships in various circumstances.

Chart A shows the relationship between the trigger leading edge and the Strobe, Data Valid, Results, and Master Range signals, where the last three appear as pulses whose rRlGGER i

(Input) i

I

I

I

I

I

I

STROBE f

I

I

L

I

DATA

I i

;

+i

I

I

I-

I

I

1

I

:t-

---+I

I

I

I

PULSED I/O TIMING i&F-

VlODULE i

BUSY i

;I//

I

--+I

I I

I I

I j+ Min. trigger = 2ms

Trigger pulse #l

Max. lag = lms

I

I it

You can select a pulse width of 1 to 2OOOms

-t

-

Trigger pulse

I

F

DATA VALID will always pulse high when inspection processing is complete.

#2

Strobe = Sms

RESULTS i

I

I I

* r 7 RESULTS signal will pulse high

If an analysis tool range limit

I is exceeded.

I I ri

I I

I I

I I

MASTER :

RANGE : i i

I I i-

I

I ii

MASTER RANGE will pulse

I if any tool detects a failure

I condition.

I I

I I high ri

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I c i *Minimum acquisition time: 17ms, for 256x256 and 512x256 Res.; 34msfor 512x512. Res.

**Analysis time.

A-6

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

Using Output Signal duration you determine during configuration. Whenever

Timing Data

(continued) these signals go high, they will go low again at the end of the specified pulse duration (1 to 2000ms).

Note also that Module Busy is high only during system configuration and when the CVIM module is receiving a configuration download from PLC or computer equipment.

In Chart B, the Data Valid, Results, and Master Range signals appear as changes in signal leuels. This will occur if, during system configuration, you select a pulse “duration” of

0 (zero) milliseconds. In this case, the three signals will stay high until the leading edge of the next valid trigger signal

(trigger pulse #2).

NON-PULSED I/O TIMING

I i

TRIGGER i

(Input) i i i i i i

I

STROBE i

I i

I

I i i

DATA i

VALID i

-

I

I

I

.

I f

I

Trigger pulse #l

-

I

I

I

1

I

Trigger pulse #2

I

I ,

4

*

-

**

DATA VALID will go high when inspection processing is complete, and will go low with the leading edge of the next vaild trigger.

*

I

++

------------mm

FESULTS signal will go high

If an analysis tool range limit i

---

I-

I

I l

I

--------mm----

RANGE signal will go high any tool detects a failure

1

I

,

I

I-

I

I

I

I time: 17ms, for 256x256 and 512x256 Res.; 34msfor 512x512. Res.

---

**Analysis time.

-

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

A-7

Using Output

Timing Data

Signal

The CVIM system will “miss” a trigger pulse in the following

(continued) circumstances:

The trigger pulse occurs within 5ms after the previous trigger pulse. (No Trigger NAK signal.)

The trigger pulse occurs within the same camera image field. (The Trigger NAK signal follows.)

The trigger pulse occurs within the next camera image field and the image resolution is 512H x512V. (The Trigger NAK signal follows.)

The trigger pulse occurs before the previous inspection is complete and sufficient memory is available to acquire the image. (The Trigger NAK signal follows.)

Chart C shows trigger pulse #2 occuring before the CVIM system has finished processing the inspection cycle started by trigger pulse # 1. This causes the Trigger NAK signal to go high. Trigger NAK will stay high until leading edge of the next valid trigger pulse (trigger pulse #3).

I i d+

MODULE i

BUSY ;

MISSED-TRIGGER EXAMPLE

.s

I 7Y i i

TRIGGER i Trigger

(Input) i pulse #I

See NOTE 1 below

I

I+--

/

I

-4

,

Trigger pulse #2

-

Trigger pulse #3

TRIGGER ; e i

I

_I

I i

I

STROBE :

I i

I

I

&

1

I

I

I

I

I

I-

I

I

I i TRIGGER NAK goes high because

. trigger 2 cannot be processed.

(Trigger 1 processing is not yet complete.)

;

I

I

I

’ Tl$iG:i ,“,“n”,~O,erS,ow~;,cause

I

I

I

I

(Trigger 1 processing is now complete.)

I

.

*Min. Processing time:

17ms, 256x256 Res.

17ms, 512x256 Res.

34ms, 512x512 Res.

**Analysis time.

NOTE 2: In delayed trigger reject (DTR) mode, the

Trigger NAK signal can occur up to = 15ms afterthe rising edge of trigger pulse #2.

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and Connections

A-8

Planning Output Line

Connections

This section provides diagrams of electrical connections for correctly connecting your production equipment to the

CVIM system’s discrete output lines.

The 26-pin D-type connector on the CVIM module’s front panel is designed for direct connection to the I/O Interface

Box, Catalog No. 2801-N21, through the CVIM-to-I/O

Interface Box cable, Catalog No. 2801 -NC17.

If you intend to use an I/O connection of your own design, you will need to know the pin assignments and the signal names and functions for each pin.

The following diagram shows the pin numbers and layout on the 26-pin D-type connector as it appears when you look at the front panel of the CVIM module.

-

The following table shows the signal name/function pin on the 26-pin D-type connector:

Pin 1: Trigger input line #l.

Pin 2: Trigger input line #2.

Pin 3: Output line #l.

Pin 4: Output line #2.

Pin 5: Output line #3.

Pin 6: Output line #4.

Pin 7: Output line #5.

Pin 8: Output line #6.

Pin 9: Output line #7.

Pin 10: Output line #8.

Pin 11: Output line #9.

Pin 12: Output line #lo.

Pin 13: Output line #ll. for each

Pin 14: Output line #12.

Pin 15: Output line # 13.

Pin 16: Output line #14.

Pin 17: Reserved.

Pin 18: Reserved.

Pin 19: Ground (power).

Pin 20: Ground (power).

Pin 21: Ground (chassis).

Pin 22: Ground (signal).

Pin 23: TXD (Transmit Data - RS-232).

Pin 24: RTS (Request to Send - RS-232).

Pin 25: RXD (Receive Data - RS-232).

Pin 26: CTS (Clear to Send - RS-232).

-

-

Appendix A Planning Discrete II0 Assignments and Connections

A-9

Planning

Connections to

The RS-232 connector is a g-pin D-type connector on the L’O

M-232 Connector Interface Box and is designed for connection to your computer equipment. (For more information about connecting the CVIM system to peripheral serial devices, refer to the

CVIM Communications Manual,

Catalog No.

5370-ND002.)

If you intend to use the RS-232 connection on the L/O

Interface Box, you will need to know the pin assignments and the signal names and functions for each pin.

The following diagram shows the pin numbers and layout on the RS-232 connector as it appears when you look at the front of the I/O Interface Box.

.-

The following table shows the signal name/function pin on the RS-232 connector: for each

Pin 1: No connection.

Pin 2: RXD (Receive Data - RS-232).

I

Pin 3: TXD (Transmit Data - RS-232)

Pin 4: Ground (chassis).

Pin 5: Ground (signal).

Pin 6: No connection.

Pin 7: RTS (Request to Send - RS-232).

Pin 8: CTS (Clear to Send - RS-232).

Pin 9: No connection.

Planning II0 Connections to The 1771-JMB interface board is designed for direct edge

1771-I/MS interface

Board

connection to the I/O Interface Box, Catalog No. 2801-N21.

If you intend to use the JMB board and the I/O Interface Box, you will need to know the relationship between the discrete

I/O line numbers and the LED numbers, the optic isolator type, and the terminal block screws numbers on the JMB board. These are shown in the figure and table that follows,

Note that the JMB board has a terminal block for connection of an external + 5VDC power supply. This provides power to the JMB board.

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and

Connections

A-70

Planning Connections to

1771-JMB Interface Board

(continued)

The figure shows the layout of the JMB board and the adhesive-backed overlay with the I/O line numbers.

CVIM

Overlay r

1

1 i i

2

12

13

14

10

11

8

9

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

0

0

0

1

0

2

0

3

0

9

0

10

0

11

0

12

0

13

0

14

0

15

0

4

0

5

0

6

0

7

0

8

Terminal Screws for

External + 5VDC W

Power Supply

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

-

Appendix A Planning Discrete 110 Assignments and

Connections

Planning Connections to

The following table shows the relationship between the

1771-IM8: Interface

Board

numbers mentioned above:

(continued)

A-l I

I Input 101

1

2

0

1

1

3

2

4

I 6

I

Be sure to observe the following warning when connecting the I/O lines to your production equipment.

WARNING:

The CVIM local I/O lines will be disabled whenever hardware or software faults occur in the CVIM module and/or other modules in the Pyramid Integrator chassis. Failure to accommodate this logic convention when you interface the CVIM I/O lines to your production equipment may cause unintended operation of your equipment, which may result in serious personal injury or death.

Line

No.

OUTPUT LINE PLANNING SHEET:

Outaut

--

Line Functions

and

Assianments

Output Line

Function

Tool

Set

Gage Window

Reference

Tool

Light

Probe

No- NO. Rng. NO. Rng. NO. Rng. No. Rng. Line Win. cam. Rng.

Appendix

B

Planning System Configuration

Appendix Objective

The objective of this appendix is to help you plan your CVIM system configuration by preparing a series of tables that you can use during the system configuration process.

Sys tern Con fi ura tion

? /arming

This appendix provides a series of tables that can help you select the parameters and functions within each configuration category in the Main Configuration menu:

Env. Camera A Ref. Line Ref. Win Gage Window Mist

Note that Chapters 4 through 9 of this manual describe these seven configuration categories in detail.

The tables are arranged in the same order as the chapters.

Each table pertains to a specific set of configuration parameters and/or functions within a main configuration category. You can record the parameters and/or functions that are appropriate for your application of the CVIM system.

The information that you’ve recorded in these tables can help you perform the configuration rocedures described in

. When you finish the configuration procedures, the tables can then serve as a record of your configuration or configurations.

Before you begin, we suggest that you remove the pages containing the configuration planning tables and make one or more working copies of them.

Configuration Planning

Tab/es

On the next several pages are the configuration planning tables. Do not mark these pages. Instead, remove them and make as many copies as you need for you configuration planning.

System Parameters

Host Select:

I

Stand Alone

Tool Display: q

On

Monitor: q

Color

Pyramid 0 Monochrome

Remote 110

0 Off q

/

RS-232

0

0 Pixels

0 Inches

CM

Units: cl cl cl

I

B-2

Appendix B Planning

System

Configuration

_ _

Tables

(continued)

/IO Parameters (1 of 2)

-

110 Parameters (2 of 2)

RS-232 Parameters Remote I/O Parameters

Baud Rate: Remote:

I Rack Address:

300 0

1200 0

2400 0

4800 0 Disabled

9600 0

19200 0

Enabled

Protocol:

ASCII n up0 nl2I-l

Data Rate: 146~

57.6

115.2 q l-l l6Cl

10

30

50

70

-

-

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

T;?bkS (continued)

Tool Set Parameters

Trigger Source

Carneraflool Set Combination:

K?ra A, Tool Set #l

Camera A, Tool Set #2

Camera A, Tool Sets #1 and #2

Camera B, Tool Set # 1

Camera B, Tool Set #2

Camera B, Tool Sets #l and #2

Camera A, Tool Set #l

Camera B, Tool Set #2

Camera A, Tool Set #2

Camera B, Tool Set # 1

Tool Set #l,

Runtime:

Tool Set #2,

Runtime:

IJ None/Disabled

0 Auto/Internal

0

0

None/Disabled

Auto/Internal q I/O q Host q

Tool Set #l,

Setup: q

Auto/Internal q

Same as Runtime

I/O (Tool Set #2) 0 q

I/O(Tool Set #I) 0 u

Host (Tool Set #2) 0

Host (ToolSet #l) 0

Tool Set #2,

Setup: q

Auto/Internal 0

0 Same as Runtime 0 q

0 q

Camera Parameters

Camera: Light Probe:

Image

Resolution:

Calibration: Camera Type:

A

Disabled

Same Field

Next Field

0 256Hx256V q

ObjectCa,ib. q

512Hx256V q

Grid Calib. q

512Hx512V 0 q

Standard Camera

0

Std. Cam., DTR Mode

*Frame Reset Camera

A

Disabled q

256Hx256V c] ObjectCalib.

6

Same Field q

512Hx256V 0 Grid Calib.

Next field q

512Hx512V q u Standard Camera q

Std. Cam., DTR Mode

*Frame Reset Camera

*NOTE: If your application requires two cameras and you select Frame Reset Camera, both cameras must be the frame reset type. q q q q q q

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

B-4

Configuration Planning

Tables

(continued)

Reference Line Parameters (Part 1 of 3)

Parameters:

Reference -

Line Number:

Status:

1

Type:

Gaging Mode’

Enable

Disable

0

X Axis Only

Y Axis Only q q

X and Y Axis (X 1st) 0 B’nary q

X and Y Axis (Y 1st) 0 Gray Sca,e

X-X Then Y

Y-Y Then X

Enable

X Axis Only

Y Axis Only q XandYAxis(Xlst)

Disable 0

X-X Then Y

Y-Y Then X

X Axis Only

Y Axis Only

Enable ’ X and Y Axis(X 1st)

X

Disable 0 x-X The,.., y

Y-Y Then X q

’ Binary q Gray q q

Output Line

Assignment:

q q

(Fill in): cl q

(Fill in): q

(Fill in):

Search Mode:

Reference Line Parameters (2 of 3)

I Offset # fFill Inl: I I I I I I I I I

-

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

Tables

(continued)

I

Reference Line Parameters (Part 3 of 3)

Source:

Reference

Line #

Destinatior

Referencr ’ I- h None

1 0

I I L I ;1 I

1 NA 1 0 1 0 1

B-5

Reference Window Parameters

teference Window Status:

X-Y Shift Compensation only:

Use One Active Feature

X-Y Shift and Rotation

Compensation: Use Two Active

Features

X-Y Shift and Rotation

Compensation: Use Three

Active Features

Output Line Assignment:

Output Line # (FIII In):

0

0

0

1

---

0

Cl 0

0

2 cl

0

3

Ref. Line #3

Ref. Win. #l

0 q q

NA 0 0

Ref. Win. #2 NA NA 0 l I I

Appendix 6 Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

Tables

(continued)

Gage Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 1 of 6)

*Note: Sub Pixel Resolution and Gage Width apply only to Gray Scale Mode.

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

Tab/W (continued)

Gage Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 2 of 6)

(Measurement OperatioFs Only)

Search Mode:

(Active Feature A)

Gage Number (1 - 16):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

q oclclclclooclclclclclclocl

All Edges

Maximum White

Object cllJclclclcllJoclclclclooocl

8-7

“B” Offset #

---------------_

Appendix 8 Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

Tables

(con tit-wed)

Gage Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 3 of 6)

Y Position

Measure Chord Angle

(circular gage only) clunucluclucloouuuuu

q nunonuuunuunuuu

Measure Wedge Angle

(circular gage only)

A__

“Note:

q uunuuuuunuuuuou

Sub Pixel Resolution and Gage Width apply only to Gray Scale Mode.

-

Appendix 8 Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

rElbk?S (continued)

Gage Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 4 of 6)

(Measurement Operatioys Only)

Gage Number (I; 7 - 32):

Search Mode:

(Active FeatureA

All

Maxim

C

Maximum

Maximum Object q uuouuouuuuuuuno

Search Direction:

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Head-to-Tail

Tail-,to-Head q unuoonuunuuuuuu q uuuuuuuuouuuouu

Search Direction:

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

All Edges

Maximum White

Object

Maximum BlackObject

Maximum Object q uuuuuuuuuuuuuuu q uuuuuuuuuuuuuuu

IJ q q q q

I-J q q q q q q q q q q q uuuuuuuuuuuuuuu

Head-to-Tail

Tail-to-Head q uuuuuuuuuuuuuuu q uuouuuuuuuuuuuu

Edge or Mid

Offset # (fil P oint

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

“A” Offset #

------__-----___

“6” Offset #

B-9

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

B-10

Configuration Planning

Tab/es (continued)

Ga e

Gage Parameters: Tool Set #

-

(Part 5 of 6)

Output Line Output Line

Ga e Ga e

*Line

Range Number

Range N>tb\r

Output Line

*Line

Range Number

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

*Enter the appropriate output line number for the Fault and Warning ranges.

You can assign the same number or different numbers for each ranges. Use only those output line numbers that you have assigned a “l/Results” or “2IResults”function.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Appendix 6 Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

Talb/eS (continued)

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Ga e

1

2

Gage Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 6 of 6)

Reference Tool Assignment Reference Tool Assignment

Gage hmber

29

30

31

32

21

22

23

24

25

17

18

19

20

26

27

28 q lolololololo q q uunuu q q unuuu q

lolololololo

B-11

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

Tables

(continued)

Window it #

--

(Part 1 of 4)

I

Window Number (1 - 12):

Window Status:

Count White Objects

Count Black Objects

Perform Gradient

Operation

Perform Template

Match

Perform Luminance

Comwtation clooEloo~~---- cl00000000000 cloooclooclouoo

q uocloclooclnoo

clclcluuuuoclooo n

-

-

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

TZlb/eS (continued)

Window Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 2 of 4)

c

Window Number

(13 - 24):

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Enable

q unuuuuuuuuu

B-13

Perform Luminance

Computation

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

B-14

Configuration Planning

Tables

(continued)

JVindow

Number

Window Parameters: Tool Set #

-

(Part 3 of 4)

Window

Number

Window

Number

1

2

3

4

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Warn.

.

12

13

14

15

I Warn. I

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

Fault

Warn.

I

Fault

I

8 I I -I

*Enter the appropriate output line number(s) for the Fault and Warning ranges. You can assign the same number or different numbers for each range. Use only those output line numbers that you have assigned a “l/Results” or “Z/Results”function.

-

-

Appendix B Planning System Configuration

Configuration Planning

T&k (continued)

Window Parameters: Tool Set # (Part 4 of 4)

-

-

-

Appendix

C

Definition of Terms

Appendix Objective

The objective of this appendix is to define the terms used in this manual that have a special meaning for machine vision and/or the CVIM system.

Definition of Terms

Active Tool Set -The active tool set is the one that is currently displayed for configuration purposes. It is selectable by a menu box of the same name.

Analysis Function -This function enables you to determine the processing time for the tools used in your application.

Analysis Tool - An analysis tool is any one of the

CVIM system’s tools, and includes the inspection tools

(gages and windows), the reference tools (lines or windows) and the light probes.

Binary Image -This is an area in the screen image in which all parts of the image are either black or white.

For a gage operating in the binary gaging mode, it is the area immediately around the gage. For a window operating in a pixel-counting or object-counting mode, it is the entire area within the window’s boundaries.

Brightness Compensation - Brightness compensation is the result of light probe operation. It minimizes changes in gray scale image data under varying lighting conditions.

CVIM -This is the abbreviation for Configurable

Vision Input Module. It is the vision processing module designed for the Allen-Bradley Pyramid Integrator chassis.

Discrete I/O Lines -These are the 16 lines that carry electrical signals between the CVIM system and your production equipment. The two input lines carry

“trigger” signals, which initiate inspection cycles. The

14 output lines carry the “pass/fail” inspection results and status, which the production equipment can use to process the workpiece being inspected.

Drag -This is the name for moving the analysis tools around on the monitor screen. Before “dragging” a tool, you must first “pick” the tool.

Edge - An edge is a transition along a gage’s length.

Operating in the binary gaging mode, the gage looks for a transition from black to white, or vice versa. In the gray scale gaging mode, the gage looks for a transition from one shade of gray to another over a specified number of pixels.

c-2

Appendix c Definition of Terms

Definition of Terms

Filter - The adjustable filter function removes unwanted

(continued) visual “noise” from a binary image for gages operating in the binary gaging mode and windows operating in the pixel- or object-counting modes.

Freeze Function -This funtion applies to the run mode.

When the freeze function is enabled (and armed), the CVIM system will freeze the screen image when the appropriate condition occurs. In all cases, the CVIM system will continue its inspection operations. The last image -the one with the freeze-causing condition - will be “frozen” on the monitor screen.

You can “arm” the system to freeze the screen image for one of three freeze conditions, as follows:

Freeze on First Reject - The screen image will freeze when a reject-causing condition occurs, such as a window pixel count being outside range limits.

Since inspection operations will continue, other reject- causing conditions could occur; however, they will not be displayed. Only the image from the first reject-causing condition will be displayed. It will remain on the screen until you pick the

Resume menu box in the runmode menu.

Freeze on All Rejects - The screen image will freeze whenever a reject-causing condition occurs.

Inspection operations will continue; however, the image from the most recent reject-causing condition will remain on the screen until you pick the

Resume menu box in the runmode menu.

Freeze on Next Inspection - The screen image will freeze after the next inspection cycle, regardless of whether a reject-causing condition has occurred. When you pick the

Resume menu box in the runmode menu, the screen image will freeze again after the next inspection cycle. This process will continue until you pick one of the other freeze condition menu boxes or the

Go on Reject menu box.

Gage - A gage is one of 32 one-dimensional inspection tools within each tool set. Each gage can be set to any length, position, or angular orientation within the screen image, and can perform a variety of measurement and counting inspection tasks. A gage performs its inspection functions by detecting edges or counting black or white pixels on a workpiece.

Gaging Mode - The gaging mode is the means by which a gage detects edges.

In the binary gaging mode, features on the workpiece change to either black or white. To detect an edge, the gage looks for a transition from black to white, or vice versa.

In the gray scale gaging mode, features on the workpiece remain in gray scale form. To detect an edge, the gage looks for a transition from one shade of gray to another shade of gray over a specified number of pixels.

-

-

-

Appendix c Definition of Terms c-3

Definition of Terms

Gray Scale Image - This is the “digitized” screen image in

(continued) its original form, in which each pixel has a brightness value ranging from 0 (zero) for the darkest to 63 for the lightest.

Grid Calibration -This function, which applies only to linear and circular gaging operations, compensates for the

X/Y aspect ratio and optical distortions. It uses mulitple reference points, derived from a special grid pattern, as the basis of the compensation calculation. At the same time, it calibrates gage measurements so that the “results” values of the gage operation appear in the specified “world” units; that is, inches, centimeters, or pixels.

Halt Function -This function applies to the run mode.

When the halt function is enabled (and armed), the CVIM system will halt all inspection operations when a reject- causing condition occurs, such as a gage measurement being outside the range limits. The last image -the one with the reject-causing condition - will be “frozen” on the monitor screen and all processing will stop.

You can resume CVIM inspection operations by picking the

Resume menu box in the runmode menu.

Host-The host is the system that you designate to have primary control of the CVIM system’s operations. The host system can be an externally connected PLC (programmable logic controller) or computer, or an Allen-Bradley Pyramid

Integrator controller or computer residing in the same chassis with the CVIM module.

Image Resolution -This parameter determines the image resolution, in pixels, for three ranges: 256 horizontal pixels by 256 vertical pixels. 512 horizontal pixels by 256 vertical pixels, and 512 horizontal pixels by 512 vertical pixels. The finer the resolution, the greater the time required to process the image.

You should always set the image resolution first before configuring the reference and inspection tools.

Inspection Tool -An inspection tool is one of 32 gages and

24 windows within each tool set. These are the main tools that the CVIM system uses to measure, count, or otherwise evaluate a workpiece. The “results” values of these tools following an inspection operation are used to determine whether the workpiece passed or failed the inspection.

I/O Page -This is a display “page” that you can activate during the run mode. The I/O page shows, in summary form, the “pass/warning/fail” status of all enabled analysis tools.

In addition, the I/O page shows the “on/off’ status of all discrete output lines that have been assigned a “results” function, and to which one or more enabled tools are assigned.

c-4

Definition of Terms

Learn Function -This function, when activated, causes

(continued) the currently selected tool to perform one inspection cycle and return the “results” data. The results data varies according to the tool’s assigned operation.

To activate the learn function, you must pick the

Learn menu box associated with the specific analysis tool. The results data appear in the

Learn menu box.

Learn Mode - The learn mode, when enabled, causes the

CVIM system to accumulate “results” statistics from the analysis tools when the system is in the run mode.

Light Pen -The light pen is one of the two main elements of the user interface. Its tip contains a light sensor and switch.

When you press the tip against a graphic symbol on the monitor screen -that is, when you “pick” the symbol - the sensor and switch send signals to the CVIM system. The action that follows depends on the symbol you picked.

Light Probe -This is a small box-shaped analysis tool that measures the average luminance or brightness within a user-designated reference area within the screen image. It determines whether the brightness level from the lighting has changed, and, if so, compensates the gray scale image prior to tool processing.

Mask -A mask is a special window function that removes or

“masks” an unwanted portion of the image area within a window. This has the effect of reducing the visual clutter or

“noise” within the window’s boundaries.

Menu Box - This is the name for one of the small rectangular boxes appearing on the monitor screen. Each box has a name or abbreviation that represents a specific configuration parameter or function, or a runmode parameter or function. To select the parameter or function, you “pick” the menu box with the light pen.

Noise -This is the term for unwanted pixels, or small clusters of pixels, along a gage operating in the binary gaging mode or a window operating in the pixel- or object- counting mode.

Noise consists of either white pixels on a black field or black pixels on a white field. Usually, you can remove all or most of the noise using the threshold and/or filter functions.

0 bject Calibration - This function, which applies to linear and circular gaging operations, compensates for the X/Y aspect ratio. It uses four reference points as the basis of the compensation calculation. At the same time, it calibrates gage measurements so that the “results” values of the gage operation appear in the specified “world” units; that is, inches, centimeters, or pixels.

-

_

Appendix c Definition of Terms c-5

Defini’tion of Terms

Output Line Function

-This is one of the six types of

(continued) signalling functions that you can assign to an output line.

Pick

- This is the name for pressing the light pen tip against a graphic symbol on the monitor screen for the purpose of selecting that symbol. The action that follows depends on which symbol is picked.

Pick and Place

-This is the name for “picking” a tool,

“dragging” the tool to a different location, and locking or

“placing” the tool at its new location.

Pixel-This

is the term for one of the thousands of discrete picture elements that form the screen image. The term is derived from Picture + X + ELement.

The CVIM module digitizes the analog signal from the camera; that is, it assigns a discrete value to each pixel ranging from 0 (zero) for the darkest to 63 for the lightest parts of the camera image.

Pixel Tolerance

-This parameter applies to a window configured for template operation. The pixel tolerance is the amount by which the brightness value of each pixel in a workpiece image can vary from the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the “template,” or stored image of the workpiece, and still be counted

as

acceptable.

Thus, if a pixel’s brightness value varies within. the pixel tolerance range, the window accepts the pixel. If a pixel’s brightness value deviates outside the tolerance range, the window counts it as a “failed” pixel.

As an example, if you set the pixel tolerance to 5, and the brightness value of a pixel in the stored image were 30, the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in a workpiece image would be acceptable if it were within the range from

25to35(30-5 = 25,and30 + 5 = 35).

You can set the pixel tolerance to any number from 3 to 63.

At one extreme, if the pixel tolerance were set to 3, the pixels in the workpiece image could vary only by zb 3. At the other extreme, if the pixel tolerance were set to 63, any pixel in the workpiece image would be acceptable. Thus, the window would “accept” any image.

Popup Menu

-When you pick a menu box during the configuration mode, one or more menus may “pop up” somewhere on the monitor screen. You can use these popup menus to perform functions and enter tool parameters.

Range Limit

- A range limit is a value that you specify as a maximum or minimum permissible value for the “results” data from an analysis tool following an inspection operation.

Range limits are used to indicate whether a workpiece passed or failed an inspection.

C-6

Appendix c Definition of Terms

Definition of Terms

Reference Line - A reference line is one of three pairs of

(continued) one-dimensional reference tools within each tool set. Each of the three pairs consists of an X-axis line and a Y-axis line, which can be used alone or together.

The sole purpose of each reference line is to locate a specified point of interest on a workpiece and determine whether that point of interest has shifted from the position of the same edge on the original workpiece. If so, the reference line provides shift compensation to all associated inspection tools.

Reference Tool - A reference tool (line or window) compensates for shift and/or rotation of the workpiece within the screen image. It detects the amount that a workpiece has shifted and/or rotated from the original workpiece position, and shifts and/or rotates the inspection tools by that amount.

The result is that the tools maintain the same relative position over the shifted workpiece that they had over the original workpiece.

Reference Window -A reference window is one of three sets of two-dimensional reference tools within each tool set.

Each of the three sets consists of three search/feature window pairs.

The sole purpose of each reference window is to locate one or more specified features on a workpiece and determine whether the feature(s) has shifted and/or rotated from the position of the same feature(s) on the original workpiece. If so, the reference window provides shift and/or rotation compensation to all associated inspection tools.

Registration Function -This function enables you to automatically reposition all tools associated with reference tools whenver the workpiece location has changed in the screen image. This can save considerable time compared to repositioning all tools manually.

Results Page -This is a display “page” that you can activate during the run mode. The results page shows the accumulation of faults for all analysis tools, and shows the current “results” value for each enabled inspection tool. The page also shows the number of triggers accepted and missed.

Score and Set Score -These terms apply to reference windows, as follows:

Score is the “results” value that a feature window accumulates during an inspection operation as it looks for a specific workpiece feature within a search window.

Set score is a parameter that you set during system configuration. It determines the acceptable limit of the score

“results” value, and thus determines the point beyond which the reference window is considered to have failed to “find” the workpiece feature.

-

-

-

Appendix c Definition of Terms c-7

Definition of Terms

Score and Set Score

(continued) -

For example, if you set

(continued) the set score parameter to 25, and during an inspection operation a feature window finds a feature whose score is 20, the reference window operation is considered to be successfuE. As a consequence, the reference window can supply position compensation to its associated inspection tools, and the tools can perform their inspections.

If, on the other hand, the lowest score that the feature window can find is 30, the reference window operation is considered unsuccessful. As a consequence, the reference window cannot supply position compensation to its associated inspection tools, and the tools cannot perform their inspections.

If two or three feature/search window pairs in a reference window are “active,” a2Z on the workpiece for the reference window operation to succeed. If any one fails, the whole reference window fails.

Standard Mode -The standard mode, when enabled, inhibits the CVIM system from accumulating “results” statistics from the analysis tools when the system is in the run mode.

Statistics Pages -These are two separate display “pages” that you can activate during the run mode. The

Stat 1 page shows the accumulated statistical data based on the number of trial inspections and the “results” values from the enabled inspection tools. The Stat 2 page shows the accumulated statistical data based on the number of inspections and the

“results” values from the enabled reference windows.

You can reset that data in the statistics pages by pressing he

Reset

Stat’s menu box in the runmode menu.

Sub Pixel -This function enables a gage to locate an edge to better than one-pixel accuracy. The sub pixel function is available only for a gage operating in the gray scale gaging mode and performing linear gaging.

Template -This is a stored image of a workpiece or part of a workpiece. When a window is configured for “template” operation, during an inspection operation the window compares the image of the current workpiece (the one being inspected) to the stored image.

Test Pattern -The test pattern is a geometric array of gray- scale shaded vertical bars and binary figures on the monitor screen. It appears after a successful system powerup and whenever you “pick” a menu box called

Display Test Image.

C-8

Appendix c Definition of Terms

4

Definition of Terms

Threshold -This is an adjustable numerical reference that

(continued) determines which parts of a gray scale image become either white or black. You can adjust the threshold according to the needs of the application.

The threshold setting is used for gages operating in the binary gaging mode and windows operating in the pixel- or object-counting modes.

You can adjust the amount of filtering according to the needs of the application.

Tool Set - A tool set is a complete set of inspection tools

(gages and windows) and reference tools (lines and windows).

The CVIM system has two sets of tools, each of which can be separately triggered. In addition, each tool set can be associated with the same camera image or different camera images.

Trigger Source -The trigger source is the point of origin of the signal that starts an inspection cycle when the CVIM system in is the run mode. The source can be either internal to the CVIM module, or external. The internal trigger recurs automatically at a fixed rate. The external trigger, whether directly from a presence-sensing switch or sensor, or indirectly from a host system, recurs as dictated by events at the switch or within the host system.

Units or World Units -The units or “world” units parameter determines how the “results” values from linear or circular gaging operations are reported. These units can be specified as inches, centimeters, or pixels. This parameter is used in conjunction with the calibration functions.

User Interface -The CVIM User Interface is the means by which you, the user, interact with the CVIM system for configuring and running the system. The main user interface tools are the light pen and the graphic figures on the video monitor screen.

Window -A window is one of 24 two-dimensional inspection tools within each tool set. Each window can be set to any size or position within the screen image, and can perform a variety of measurement, counting, and feature-evaluation inspection tasks. A window performs its inspection functions by evaluating the pixels within its boundaries.

Workpiece -This is the name for an item that the CVIM system is to inspect.

During an inspection operation, the camera acquires an image of the workpiece. One or more inspection tools then measure, count, or evaluate the workpiece, or some part of it, and report the “results.” If the results data are within specified range limits, the workpiece passes the inspection; otherwise, it fails the inspection.

-

index

Section Page

A

AC voltage selection switch . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

AC voltage specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -3

Acquire single camera image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-l 5

Acquire test image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-l 5

Active feature selection, Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . 7-38

Active feature selection, Reference line 6-26

Active feature selection, Reference window

Active reference line selection

Activetoolsetselection

. : : : : : : : : 6-52

6-14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

C

Calibration, Description of ........................

Calibration function grid calibration ...............

Calibration function object calibration .............

Camera power supply connections ................

Camera type selection .............................

Camera/Tool Set selection .....................

Chassis backplane .................................

Chassis power supply connections ..................

Circular gage examples ........................

Circular gage picking and placing ..................

Component catalog numbers ...............

5-25

5-48

5-34

2-8,9

5-5

4-l 6,18

I -3

2-3

7-6,7,8

7-23

2-1,6,7,8

D

DCpowerloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._............... 2-4,s

DC voltage selection switch

Dimensions, Grid calibration

Dimensions, Object calibration.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

5-46

5-34

E

Edge definition, Gage (binary mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Edge definition, Gage (gray scale mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Edge definition, Grid calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Edge definition, Object calibration 5-33

Edge definition, Reference line (bina’ry’mode) - : : 1 : : : 6-20

Edge definition, Reference line (gray scale mode) . . . 6-23

F

Feature window display function ..................

Feature window picking and placing ...............

Find feature function .............................

Focus camera function .............................

Freeze status selection ............................

G

Gage number selection ...........................

Gage operation selection .........................

Gage output line assignments .....................

Gage range limit assignments .....................

6-59

6-53

6-67

5-6

1 O-4

7-10

7-l 2

7-52

7-51

I-2 index

Section Page

G

(continued)

Gage reference tool assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

Gage shape selection 7-11

Gaging mode selection] Rinary;Gray scale’ : : : : : : : : : : 7-14

Gradient selection . . . . _ . _ . . _ _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ _ . 8-40

Grid calibration picking and placing _ . . . . _ . . . . _ . _ . . 5-38

H

Halt status selection _ _ _ . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . .

Help message function _ . . _ . _ _ . . . _ _ . . _ . . _

Hosted operating mode l-3,4-3

........

........

10-4

3-l 1

Image processing time, Determination of . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

L

Learn function gages .............................

Learn function, Light probe .......................

Learn function, Reference line

Learn function, Reference window’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

Learn function, Window

Learn tool registration

Light pen operations

..........................

...........................

.............................

7-45

5-18

6-34

6-68

8-46

9-23

. 3-2

Light probe learn function ........................

Light probe output line assignments ...............

Light probe picking and placing ...................

Light probe range limit assignments

Light reference threshold adjustment

Linear gage examples ...........................

Linear gage picking and placing

...............

Light probe status selection .......................

..............

...................

Loading configuration from internal memory ......

5-18

5-23

5-15

5-22

5-14

5-10

7-3,4

7-16

. 9-6

Loading configuration/image from RAM card ...... 9-13

Loading default configuration .................... . 9-7

M

Menu removal function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menus, Description of . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . .

Monitor selection, Color or BW . . . . . . . . . . .

........

3-11

......... 3-4

......... 4-5

N

Naming configurations and images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

0

Ob’ect calibration picking and placing . . . .

........

5-27

Of / set function, Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 7-43

Offset function, Reference line . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6-31

Output enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 10-5

Output line assignments, Gage . . . . . . _ _ . . . ........ 7-52

Output line assignments, Light probe . . . _ . ........ 5-23

Output line assignments, Reference line . . ........ 6-35

-

-

-

Index

1-3

Section Page

0

Output line assignments, Reference window . . . . . . . 6-71

Output line assignments, Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

Output line connection data _ . . . . _ _ _ . . . . . _ . _ . . . . _ . . A-8

Output line function assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Output line planning sheet . _ _ . . . . . . . _ . . . . . _ . . . . . A-l 2

Output line planning sheet considerations _ . _ . . . . _ _ . A-l

Output signal timing data . . . . . . _ _ _ . . . . . . _ . . . . . _ . _ . A-5

P

Power supply specifications l-4

R

RAM card battery change ......................

RAM card formatting .........................

RAM card, loading configuration/image from ......

RAM card preparation

9-10, 11

9-l 1, 12

9-13

9-9

RAM card, Saving config;‘ra;idn;imgse;d’

Range limit assignments, Gage ....................

: : : : : : : : : : . 9-12

7-51

Range limit assignments, Light probe ..............

Range limit assignments, Window .................

5-22

8-52

Reference line, Binary/Gray Scale mode ............

Reference tool assignment, Reference window .....

6-l 5

Reference line example 6-3

Reference line learn function ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ’ 6-34

Reference line number selection ...................

Reference line output line assignments ............

Reference line picking and placing ................

Reference line reference tool assignment ..........

Reference line type, Description ...................

Reference line type selection ......................

Reference tool assignment, Gage ..................

Reference tool assignment, Reference line .........

6-9

6-35

6-l 6

6-36

6-10

6-10

7-54

6-36

6-73

Reference tool assignment, Window

Reference window learn function

...............

.................

Reference window number selection

Referencewindow outputlineassign&&'::: 1::::

8-55

6-68

6-51

6-71

Reference window reference tool assignment ......

Reference window set score function ..............

Remote I/O parameter selection ...................

RemoteVOport ..................................

Reset counters function

Resolutioncameraimage.:::::::::::::::::::::::::.

RS-232 parameter selection .......................

RS-232 port ......................................

Runmode display selection ....................

Runmode halt/freeze functions, Using ............

Runmode halt/freeze functions, Using ..........

Runmode I/O page, Description of ................

Runmode results page, Description of ............

Runmode statistics page, Description of ........

6-73

6-60

4-l 3 l-3

10-6

5-8

4-l 2 l-3

10-7, 10

IO-21 lo-6,21

1 O-l 2

1 O-l 6 lo-19,20

l-4

Index

Section Page

Saving configuration to internal memory . . . . . . 9-6, 10-9

Saving configuration/image to RAM card _ . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Search direction selection, Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Search direction selection, Reference line . . . . . _ _ _ _ 6-26

Search mode selection, Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ 7-39

Search mode selection, Reference line _ . . . . . _ . . . . . 6-27

Search window picking and placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

Set score function, Description of . . _ . . . _ _ _ . _ _ . _ _ _ _ . 6-60

Set score function, Using

Set score value, Determinationof ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

6-66

6-61

Shutter parameter selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Snapshot function . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ _ _ . 9-l 5

Standalone operating mode l-3,4-3

Standard/Learn operating mode selection . . . . . . . _ . _ lo-5

Symbols, Monitor screen . . . . . _ _ . . . _ . . _ _ . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

T

Tables, Description of .............................

Test image display function .......................

Threshold/Filter function

Tooldisplay,Analysismode.::::::::::::::::::::

Tool display, Configuration mode ..................

Tool display, Registration mode ...................

Tool display, Run mode ........................

Tool registration function .....................

Tool set display selection ........................

Trigger source selection .......................

3-6

9-15

8-34, 39

.. . 9-17

4-5

9-21

10-7, 10 g-22,23

1 O-21

4-16,18

U

Units selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

V

Variable data, creating messages with . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vernier arrows, Circular gages

Vernierarrows,Gridcalibration’:::::::::::::::::::

Vernier arrows, Light probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vernier arrows, Linear gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vernier arrows, Object calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vernier arrows, Reference lines

Vernier arrows, Reference windows . : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

Vernier arrows, Windows . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . _ . _ _ . . .

11-2

7-31

5-43

5-17

7-20

5-32

6-19

6-57

8-25

W

Warningsymbol . . . . . . . . .._................._..... l-3

Window examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3,5,7,9,10

Window mask picking and placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Window mask selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Window number selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Window operation, Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Window operation, Object counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

-

Index

-

Section

Window operation, Selection .....................

Window operation, Template match ..............

Window output line assignments ..................

Window picking and placing ......................

Window range limit assignments ..................

Window reference tool assignment ................

Window shape selection .......................... l-5

Page

8-28

8-43

8-53

8-15

8-52

8-55

8-13

a

Rockwell

Automation

Allen-Bradley

Allen-Bradley, a Rockwell Automation Business, has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years. We design, manufacture and support a broad range of automation products worldwide. They include logic processors, power and motion control devices, operator interfaces, sensors and a variety of software.

Rockwell is one of the world’s leading technology companies.

Worldwide representation.

Argentina

Finland l

Australia l

Austria l

France * Germany l

Bahrain l

Greece l

Belgium l

Brazil l

Bulgaria l

Guatemala a Honduras l l

Canada

Hong Kong l

Chile l

China, PRC l

Hungary * Iceland l

Colombia l

India l l

Costa Rica

Indonesia l l

Croatia l

Ireland a Israel

Cyprus l l

Czech Republic * Denmark Ecuador

Italy Jamaica l

Japan l

Jordan * Korea

Malaysia

Slovenia l l

Mexico * Netherlands l

New Zealand

South Africa, Republic a Spain l l

Norway * Pakistan l

Peru l

Philippines l

Poland l

Portugal Puerto Rico

Sweden * Switzerland * Taiwan a Thailand Turkey * United Arab Emirates l l

Qatar l

Romania * Russia-CIS

United Kingdom * United Stales l l

Saudi Arabia

Uruguay * Venezuela l l l l

Egypt l

El Salvador

Kuwait * Lebanon

Singapore * Slovakia

Yugoslavia

Allen-Bradley Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414 382-2000 Fax: (1) 414 382-4444

Catalog No. 5370.ND001 Series B

40062-190-01 (A)

Copyright 1995 Allen-Bradley Company. Inc Printed in USA